123508194-3g-Motorolla

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

© 2005-2006 Motorola, Inc.

Pub-Date

Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memoriesor other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs,including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computerprograms contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the expresswritten permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication,estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operationof law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/ordisclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorizedcopies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrievalsystem, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.

Accuracy

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changesto any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assumeany liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patentrights of others.

Trademarks

Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

M-Cell™, Taskfinder™ and Intelligence Everywhere™ are trademarks of Motorola Inc.

All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

CE Compliance

The CE mark confirms Motorola Ltd’s statement of compliance withEU directives applicable to this product. Copies of the Declarationof Compliance and installation information in accordance with therequirements of EN50385 can be obtained from the local Motorolarepresentative or the CNRC help desk, contact details below:

Email: [email protected]

Tel: +44 (0) 1793 565 444

© 2005-2006Motorola, Inc.


Pub-Date

Contents■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■

■

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 1: IntroductionObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 4HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 6Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 8

Higher Cell Capacity and Higher Spectral Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

LTE Detailed Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Chapter 2: Network ArchitectureObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 3UMTS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4

Domain split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4User equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4Mobile equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4USIM Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4Infrastructure Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 4Access Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6Core Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6Serving Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6Home Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6Transit Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 6

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 8The Core Network (CN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 8The Access Network (AN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10The Mobile Station (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

UMTS Network - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Entities of the CN-CS Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

UMTS Network R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Media Gateways (MGWs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16MSC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

UMTS Network Release 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20UTRAN Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Radio network Controller (RNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Horizon 3G-n macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Transport subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Baseband subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28RF subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Control subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Antenna and Feeder Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30



i

Pub-Date

Contents CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

User Equipment (UE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Introduction to User Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32UE Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Integrated Circuit (IC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Terminal Equipment (TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Mobile Equipment (ME). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Chapter 3: Network ServicesObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 3Services in the UMTS Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 4Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 6Quality of Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8

Conversational Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8Streaming Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8Interactive class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8Background Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 8

Supported Service Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Description of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

The Security Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Security and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

User authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Network authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Mobile equipment identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Ciphering Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18F8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20SQN and RAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Authentication Key Management Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Algorithms f1 -f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20AUTN and AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

USIM Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Retrieval of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Computation of X-MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Verification of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Computation of CK and IK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22User Authentication Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Access Link Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Data integrity protection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Input parameters to the integrity algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Input parameters to the cipher algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Chapter 4: W-CDMA TheoryObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3Multiple Access Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 4

W-CDMA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 6Re-Use of Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 8Re-Use of Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

ii CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6 Contents

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16De-spreading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Orthogonal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Channelisation Code Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20De-spreading Other Users Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Processing Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Exercise 1 - Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Scrambling and Summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36De-Scrambling and Data Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Multi-path Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Inter-symbol Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Signal Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Matched Filter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42The Rake Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Chapter 5: The Physical LayerObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3Physical Layer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 4QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 6Structure of Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8

Downlink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8Uplink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 8

Channel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Channels on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Traffic Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Transport Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Random Access Channel (RACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Forward Access Channel (FACH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Broadcast Channel (BCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Paging Channel (PCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Dedicated Channel (DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Common Physical Channels (CPCHs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Channel Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Physical signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Generic Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Radio Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22System Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Timeslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Synchronisation Channel (SCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24The Primary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24The Secondary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Modulation Symbol "a" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Step 1: Slot synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Step 3: Scrambling-code identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30



iii

Pub-Date


Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

P-CCPCH Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32SCH and P-CCPCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

PICH Channel Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Secondary CCPCH Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Structure of the PRACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Random Access Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42PRACH Pre-amble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42Structure of the random-access transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43Structure of PRACH Message Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Relationship Between PRACH and AICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

DL-DPCH Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54Downlink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56Uplink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Radio Frame Equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58Rate Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58DTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Chapter 6: MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRC Protocols and ProceduresObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4

Layer 2 Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4Layer 3 Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 4

Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 6Transport Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 8Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Transparent Mode (TM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Unacknowledged Mode (UM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Acknowledged Mode (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Radio Resource Control (RRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16RRC Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Broadcast of System Information.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Cell Selection/Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20UE State Transition Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22RRC connection establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Establishment of signalling connections between the UE and the Core Network and directtransfer of signalling messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Radio bearer establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Measurement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Chapter 7: Radio Resource Management FunctionsObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 3Radio Resource Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4

Introduction to Radio Resource Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 4Handover Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 6Measurement Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8

Monitored List Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8

iv CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date


Intra-frequency Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Algorithm Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Intra-frequency Hard Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Inter-frequency Hard Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Overview of Inter-Frequency Hard Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Handover Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Inter-RAT Hard Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Algorithm Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Preconditions for UMTS to GSM Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Handover Procedures for UMTS to GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24UMTS to GSM Handover Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Hierarchical Cell Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28HCS Handover Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Compressed Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32Algorithm Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Macro Diversity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34SRNS Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

SRNS Relocation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Static Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Relocation Due to Hard Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Relocation Due to Cell or URA Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44Directed Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Rate Re-allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48UE State Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50Overview of Load Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Chapter 8: HSDPA OverviewObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4

Feature Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4Compatibility with Release ‘99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4Demand for Packet Switched Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 4

HSDPA Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6Higher Spectrum Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 6

HSDPA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8Modulation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8Higher Throughput Rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8Hybrid ARQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 8

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1016–QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Maximum Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12UMTS Rel’. 99 / Rel. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12HSDPA – Rel. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Important Changes for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14



v

Pub-Date


New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14New UE Capabilities / Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

New Channels with HSDPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Transport Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Future Enhancements of HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Beamforming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Transmit Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18MIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Chapter 9: HSUPA OverviewChapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4

HSUPA vs R99 DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4Key Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 4

Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 6HSUPA Protocol Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 6

HSUPA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 8E-DCH Transport Channel Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Chapter 10: UMTS Terrestrial Interface ProtocolsObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 4Introduction to UMTS Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 6

Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 6Non-Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 6

General Protocol Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8Horizontal Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8Vertical Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 8

IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Iur Interface Protocols Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Chapter 11: UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link LayerObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 4ATM Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 6Concepts of ATM Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 8ATM Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Structure of an ATM Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Use of Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

Functions of the ATM Adaptation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16Types of Services at the ATM Adaptation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16

vi CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date


ATM Service Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18ATM QoS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20E1/T1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22

Logical Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22

ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24E1 Link Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30SDH Drop and Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

Network Simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32Bandwidth on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-32

Principles of SDH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36Circuit Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36ATM Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

Introduction to IP RAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38TDM Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38Data Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40Hybrid Transport Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42

IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44Concepts of Data Link Layer Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-44Internet Protocol (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46SCTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and Layer 2/3 Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50

Chapter 12: Annexe AObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 3Paging for a UE in Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 4Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 6RRC Connection Establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 8RRC DCH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10RA Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12SRNC Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Chapter 13: GlossaryGlossary of technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 3

A Interface - AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 3B Interface - Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 7C - CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11D Interface - DYNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19E - EXEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24F Interface - Full Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27G Interface - GWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30H Interface - Hyperframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33I - IWU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34k - KW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40M - MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42NACK - nW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48O - Overlap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51PA - PXPDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53QA- Quiesent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-60R - RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61



vii

Pub-Date


S7- SYSGEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-66T -TxBPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75U - UUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-81V - VTX host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-83W - WWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-84X - X Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-85ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-86

viii CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date

About This Manual Version 1 Rev 0

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■

■



1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0

This page intentionally left blank.

2 CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date

Introduction Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 1

Introduction



1-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction


1-2 CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED


Pub-Date

Objectives Version 1 Rev 0

ObjectivesOn completion of this chapter the student should be able to:

• State the WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status• State the HSxPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule• Describe the Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA• Describe the WCDMA/HSxPA Standardization and Background• State how the HSxPA standard migrates towards LTE



1-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

WCDMA Technology and Deployment StatusThe first Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Wideband Code Division MultipleAccess (WCDMA) networks were launched during 2002. By the end of 2005 there were100 open WCDMA networks and a total of over 150 operators having frequency licensesfor WCDMA operation. Currently, the WCDMA networks are deployed in Universal MobileTelecommunications System (UMTS) band around 2GHz in Europe and Asia including Japanand Korea.WCDMA in America is deployed in the existing 850 and 1900 spectrum allocationswith a total of 9 bands being supported at Release 7 of the 3GPP specifications.

As of 2006 there are signs that 3G take-up is increasing. 70 operators are now offering 3G on acommercial basis and 3G services are now available in all European Union member states. WhileJapan retains the highest penetration of 3G services, Europe now has the highest number ofsubscribers. It is estimated that there are around 45 million 3G subscribers in the EU, indicatingthat Europe has overtaken Japan as leader in terms of subscriptions. In June 2007 the numberof WCDMA 3G subscribers went over the 70 million mark worldwide.

The number of available WCDMA 3G handsets continues to grow with handsets that supportHigh Speed Packet Access (HSPA) with rates up to 7.2 mbps downlink and 1.8 mbps uplink.Applications include MP3 file players, mobile TV, as well of course voice.

As WCDMA mobile penetration increases, it allows WCDMA networks to carry a larger share of voiceand data traffic.WCDMA technology provides a few advantages for the operator in that it enables databut also improves basic voice. The offered voice capacity is very high because of interference controlmechanisms including frequency reuse of 1, fast power control and soft handover. WCDMA makes itpossible to offer substantially more voice minutes to customers. At the same time WCDMA can alsoenhance the voice service with wideband AMR codec, which provides clearly better voice quality thanthe fixed land line telephone. In short, WCDMA can offer more voice minutes with better quality.

In addition to the high spectral efficiency, 3G WCDMA provides even more dramatic evolution interms of base station capacity and hardware efficiency. The high integration level in WCDMA isachieved because of the wideband carrier: a large number of users are supported per carrier, andfewer radio frequency carriers are required to provide the same capacity. With fewer RF parts andmore digital baseband processing, WCDMA can take benefit of the fast evolution in digital signalprocessing capacity. The high base station integration level allows efficient building of high-capacitysites since the complexity of RF combiners, extra antennas or feeder cables can be avoided.

WCDMA operators are able to provide interesting data services including browsing, person-to-personvideo calls, sports and news video clips and mobile-TV. WCDMA enables simultaneous voice and datawhich allows, for example, browsing or emailing during voice conferencing, or real time video sharingduring voice calls. The operators also offer laptop connectivity to the Internet and corporate intranetwith the maximum bit rate of 384 kbps both in downlink and in uplink. The initial terminals and networkswere limited to 64–128 kbps in uplink while the latest products provide 384-kbps uplink.



Pub-Date

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status Version 1 Rev 0

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status• 9 Frequency bands supported R7

• More voice minutes with better quality

• Base station capacity and hardware efficiency

• Data services offered



1-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

HSPA Standardization and Deployment ScheduleHigh-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) was standardized as part of 3GPP Release 5 with thefirst specification version in March 2002. High-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA) was part of 3GPPRelease 6 with the first specification version in December 2004. HSDPA and HSUPA together arecalled ‘high-speed packet access’ (HSPA). The first commercial HSDPA networks were available atthe end of 2005 and the commercial HSUPA networks are expected to be available by 2007.

The HSDPA peak data rate available in the terminals is initially 1.8Mbps and will increase to 3.6 and 7.2Mbps during 2006 and 2007, and potentially beyond 10Mbps. The HSUPA peak data rate in the initialphase is expected to be 1–2 Mbps with the second phase pushing the data rate to 3–4Mbps.

HSPA is deployed on top of the WCDMA network either on the same carrier or – for a high-capacityand high bit rate solution – using another carrier. In both cases, HSPA and WCDMA can shareall the network elements in the core network and in the radio network including base stations,Radio Network Controller (RNC), Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and Gateway GPRSSupport Node (GGSN). WCDMA and HSPA are also sharing the base station sites, antennas andantenna lines. The upgrade from WCDMA to HSPA requires new software package and, potentially,some new pieces of hardware in the base station and in RNC to support the higher data rates andcapacity. Because of the shared infrastructure between WCDMA and HSPA, the cost of upgradingfrom WCDMA to HSPA is very low compared with building a new standalone data network.



Pub-Date

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule Version 1 Rev 0

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule



1-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPAThe performance of the radio system defines how smoothly applications can be used over theradio network. The key parameters defining application performance include data rate and networklatency. There are applications that are happy with low bit rates of a few tens of kbps but requirevery low delay, like Voice-Over-IP (VoIP) and real time action games. On the other hand, thedownload time of a large file is only defined by the maximum data rate, and latency does notplay any role. GPRS Release 99 typically provides 30–40 kbps with latency of 600 ms. EGPRSRelease 4 pushes the bit rates 3–4 times higher and also reduces latency below 300 ms. TheEGPRS data rate and latency allow smooth application performance for several mobile-basedapplications including Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) browsing and push-to-talk.

WCDMA enables peak data rates of 384 kbps with latency 100–200 ms, which makes Internetaccess close to low-end digital subscriber line (DSL) connections and provides good performancefor most low-delay Internet Protocol (IP) applications as well.

HSPA pushes the data rates up to 1–2Mbps in practice and even beyond 3Mbps in goodconditions. Since HSPA also reduces network latency to below 100 ms, the end userexperienced performance is similar to the fixed line DSL connections. No or only little effortis required to adapt Internet applications to the mobile environment. Essentially, HSPA is abroadband access with seamless mobility and extensive coverage.

HSPA was initially designed to support high bit rate non-real time services. The simulation results show,however, that HSPA can provide attractive capacity also for low bit rate low-latency applications like VoIP.3GPP Releases 6 and 7 further improve the efficiency of HSPA for VoIP and other similar applications.



Pub-Date

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA



1-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA


Higher Cell Capacity and Higher Spectral EfficiencyHigher cell capacity and higher spectral efficiency are required to provide higher data rates andnew services with the current base station sites. The diagram opposite illustrates the estimatedcell capacity per sector per 5MHz with WCDMA, with basic HSPA and with enhanced HSPA in themacro-cell environment. Basic HSPA includes a one-antenna Rake receiver in the terminals andtwo-branch antenna diversity in the base stations. Enhanced HSPA includes two-antenna equalizermobiles and interference cancellation in the base station. The simulation results show that HSPAcan provide substantial capacity benefit. Basic HSDPA offers up to three times WCDMA downlinkcapacity, and enhanced HSDPA up to six times WCDMA. The spectral efficiency of enhancedHSDPA is close to 1 bit/s/Hz/cell. The uplink capacity improvement with HSUPA is estimatedbetween 30% and 70%. HSPA capacity is naturally suited for supporting not only symmetricservices but also asymmetric services with higher data rates and volumes in downlink.



Pub-Date

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA Version 1 Rev 0




1-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background

WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and BackgroundThis section introduces the standardization framework around WCDMA, HSDPAand HSUPA and presents the standardization schedule and future development forLong Term Evolution (LTE), currently ongoing.

3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP)The 3GPP is the forum where standardization is handled for GSM, EDGE, HSDPA, HSUPA and LTE.

The background of 3GPP is in the days when WCDMA technology was being standardizedfollowing technology selections in different regions during 1997. Following that, WCDMA waschosen in several places as the basis for third-generation mobile communication systems andthere was regional activity in several places around the same technological principles. It becameevident, however, that this would not lead to a single global standard aligned down to bit leveldetails. Thus, at the end of 1998 the US, Europe, Korea and Japan joined forces and created3GPP. China followed a bit later. Note also that the related standardization organization, althoughmarked as regional, usually had members from other countries/ regions as well.

The first major milestone was reached at the end of 1999 when Release 99 specifications werepublished, containing the first full series of WCDMA specifications. Release 4 specifications followed inearly 2001. The working method had been moved between Release 99 and Release 4 away from theyearly ‘release’ principle. The release cycle was made longer than just 1 year, which enabled makingbigger releases with less frequent intervals. This also allowed having more consideration of what is thenecessary release content rather than when are release publication data needed. Release 5 followedin 2002 and Release 6 in 2004. and Release 7 specifications were ready in the second half of 2006.

3GPP originally had four different Technical Specification Groups (TSGs), and later five following themove of GSM/EDGE activities to 3GPP, returning to four again after two of the groups amalgamated:

• TSG Radio Access Network (RAN) focuses on the radio interface and internal interfaces betweenBase Transceiver Stations (BTSs)/ Radio Network Controllers (RNCs) as well as the interfacefrom RNC to the core network. HSDPA and HSUPA standards were under TSG RAN responsibility.

• TSG Core and Terminals (CT) focuses on the core network issues as well as covering,for example, signalling between the core network and terminals.

• TSG Services and System Architecture (SA). focuses on the servicesand overall system architecture.

• TSG GSM/EDGE RAN (GERAN) covers similar issues like TSG RAN but forthe GSM/GPRS/EDGE-based radio interface.

Under each TSG there are further working groups where the actual technical work is done.



Pub-Date

WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background Version 1 Rev 0

WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background3GPP

• TSG Radio Access Network (RAN)

• TSG Core and Terminals (CT)

• TSG Services and System Architecture (SA)

• TSG GSM/EDGE RAN (GERAN)



1-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology

Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology3GPP work on the Evolution of the 3G Mobile System started with the RAN Evolution WorkShop, 2 - 3 November 2004 in Toronto, Canada. The Work Shop was open to all interestedorganizations, members and non members of 3GPP. Operators, manufacturers and researchinstitutes presented more than 40 contributions with views and proposals on the evolutionof the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN).

A set of high level requirements was identified in the Work Shop:

• Reduced cost per bit• Increased service provisioning – more services at lower cost with better user experience• Flexibility of use of existing and new frequency bands• Simplified architecture, Open interfaces• Allow for reasonable terminal power consumption

LTE Detailed RequirementsA number of detailed requirements were established in technical report 25.913 summarised here:

• Peak data rate — Instantaneous downlink peak data rate of 100 Mb/s within a 20 MHzdownlink spectrum allocation (5 bps/Hz) Instantaneous uplink peak data rate of 50 Mb/s(2.5 bps/Hz) within a 20MHz uplink spectrum allocation);

• Control-plane latency — Transition time of less than 100 ms from a camped state, suchas Release 6 Idle Mode, to an active state such as Release 6 CELL_DCH Transitiontime of less than 50 ms between a dormant state such as Release 6 CELL_PCHand an active state such as Release 6 CELL_DCH;

• Control-plane capacity — At least 200 users per cell should be supported in theactive state for spectrum allocations up to 5 MHz;

• User-plane latency — Less than 5 ms in unload condition (ie single user withsingle data stream) for small IP packet;

• User throughput — Downlink: average user throughput per MHz, 3 to 4 times Release 6 HSDPAUplink: average user throughput per MHz, 2 to 3 times Release 6 Enhanced Uplink;

• Spectrum efficiency — Downlink: In a loaded network, target for spectrum efficiency(bits/sec/Hz/site), 3 to 4 times Release 6 HSDPA ) Uplink: In a loaded network, target forspectrum efficiency (bits/sec/Hz/site), 2 to 3 times Release 6 Enhanced Uplink;

• Mobility — E-UTRAN should be optimized for low mobile speed from 0 to 15 km/h. Highermobile speed between 15 and 120 km/h should be supported with high performance.Mobility across the cellular network shall be maintained at speeds from 120 km/h to 350km/h (or even up to 500 km/h depending on the frequency band);

•



Pub-Date

Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology Version 1 Rev 0

Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio TechnologyLTE Introduction

eNB eNB

eNB

MME/UPE MME/UPE

S1

X2

X2

X2

Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

E-UTRANeNB eNB

eNB

MME/UPE MME/UPE

S1

X2

X2

X2


E-UTRAN

K ey P oints :

• 100mbps DL 50mbps UL

• S hort c ontrol and us er plane latenc y

• G reater s pec tral effic ienc y

• UT R AN and G E R AN c ompatible

Note:

MME = Mobility Management E ntity

UP E = User P lane E ntity



1-15

Pub-Date


Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology• Coverage — Throughput, spectrum efficiency and mobility targets above should be met for 5 km

cells, and with a slight degradation for 30 km cells. Cells range up to 100 km should not be precluded;• Further Enhanced Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) — While reducing

terminal complexity: same modulation, coding, multiple access approaches and UE bandwidththan for unicast operation. Provision of simultaneous dedicated voice and MBMS servicesto the user. Available for paired and unpaired spectrum arrangements

• Spectrum flexibility — E-UTRA shall operate in spectrum allocations of different sizes, including1.25 MHz, 1.6 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz and 20 MHz in both the uplink anddownlink. Operation in paired and unpaired spectrum shall be supported The system shallbe able to support content delivery over an aggregation of resources including Radio BandResources (as well as power, adaptive scheduling, etc) in the same and different bands, inboth uplink and downlink and in both adjacent and non-adjacent channel arrangements. A“Radio Band Resource” is defined as all spectrum available to an operator;

• Co-existence and Inter-working with 3GPP Radio Access Technology (RAT) —Co-existence in the same geographical area and co-location with GERAN/UTRAN onadjacent channels. E-UTRAN terminals supporting also UTRAN and/or GERAN operationshould be able to support measurement of, and handover from and to, both 3GPP UTRANand 3GPP GERAN. The interruption time during a handover of real-time services betweenE-UTRAN and UTRAN (or GERAN) should be less than 300 ms;

• Architecture and migration —Single E-UTRAN architecture. The E-UTRAN architectureshall be packet based, although provision should be made to support systems supportingreal-time and conversational class traffic E-UTRAN architecture shall minimize thepresence of "single points of failure" E-UTRAN architecture shall support an end-to-endQoS Backhaul communication protocols should be optimised;

• Radio Resource Management Requirements — Enhanced support for end to endQoS. Efficient support for transmission of higher layers. Support of load sharing andpolicy management across different Radio Access Technologies.



Pub-Date

Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology Version 1 Rev 0

Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio TechnologyLTE Introduction

eNB eNB

eNB

MME/UPE MME/UPE

S1

X2

X2

X2


E-UTRANeNB eNB

eNB

MME/UPE MME/UPE

S1

X2

X2

X2


E-UTRAN

K ey P oints :

• 100mbps DL 50mbps UL

• S hort c ontrol and us er plane latenc y

• G reater s pec tral effic ienc y

• UT R AN and G E R AN c ompatible

Note:

MME = Mobility Management E ntity

UP E = User P lane E ntity



1-17

Pub-Date





Pub-Date

Network Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 2

Network Architecture



2-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Network Architecture




Pub-Date



• Name and state the purpose of the UMTS Domains• Describe the architecture of a UMTS network.• Describe the purpose of the major network components.• Describe the options for evolution to future releases.



2-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Domains

UMTS Domains

Domain splitA basic architectural split is between the user equipment (terminals) and the infrastructure. This resultsin two domains: the User Equipment Domain and the Infrastructure domain. User equipment is theequipment used by the user to access UMTS services. User equipment has a radio interface to theinfrastructure. The infrastructure consists of the physical nodes which perform the various functionsrequired to terminate the radio interface and to support the telecommunication services requirementsof the users. The infrastructure is a shared resource that provides services to all authorised endusers within its coverage area. The reference point between the user equipment domain and theinfrastructure domain is termed the "Uu" reference point (UMTS radio interface).

User equipment DomainThis domain encompasses a variety of equipment types with different levels of functionality.These equipment types are referred to as user equipment (terminals), and they may also becompatible with one or more existing access (fixed or radio) interfaces e.g. dual mode UMTS-GSMuser equipment. The user equipment may include a removable smart card that may be usedin different user equipment types. The user equipment is further sub-divided in to the MobileEquipment Domain (ME) and the User Services Identity Module Domain (USIM). The referencepoint between the ME and the USIM is termed the "Cu" reference point.

Mobile equipment DomainThe Mobile Equipment performs radio transmission and contains applications. The mobile equipmentmay be further sub-divided into several entities, e.g. the one which performs the radio transmissionand related functions, Mobile Termination, (MT), and the one which contains the end-to-endapplication or (e.g. laptop connected to a mobile phone), Terminal Equipment, (TE).

USIM DomainThe USIM contains data and procedures which unambiguously and securely identify itself. Thesefunctions are typically embedded in a standalone smart card. This device is associated to a givenuser, and as such allows to identify this user regardless of the ME he uses.

Infrastructure DomainThe Infrastructure domain is further split into the Access Network Domain, which is characterized bybeing in direct contact with the User Equipment and the Core Network Domain. This split is intendedto simplify/assist the process of de-coupling access related functionality from non-access relatedfunctionality and is in line with the modular principle adopted for the UMTS. The Access NetworkDomain comprises roughly the functions specific to the access technique, while the functions in the Corenetwork domain may potentially be used with information flows using any access technique. This splitallows for different approaches for the Core Network Domain, each approach specifying distinct typesof Core Networks which can be connected to the Access Network Domain, as well as different accesstechniques, each type of Access Network connected to th Core Network Domain. The reference pointbetween the access network domain and the core network domain is termed the "lu" reference point.



Pub-Date

UMTS Domains Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Domains

HomeNetworkDomain

TransitNetworkDomain

ServingNetworkDomain

CoreNetworkDomain

AccessNetworkDomain

MobileEquipment

Domain

USIMDomain

InfrastructureDomain

User EquipmentDomain

Iu [Yu]Uu

[Zu]

CuSIM

CARD



2-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Domains

UMTS Domains

Access Network DomainThe Access Network Domain consists of the physical entities which manage the resources of theaccess network and provides the user with a mechanism to access the core network domain.

Core Network DomainThe Core Network Domain consists of the physical entities which provide support for the networkfeatures and telecommunication services. The support provided includes functionality such as themanagement of user location information, control of network features and services, the transfer(switching and transmission) mechanisms for signalling and for user generated information.

The core network domain is sub-divided into the Serving Network Domain, the Home NetworkDomain and the Transit Network Domain. The reference point between the serving network domainand the home network domain is termed the [Zu] reference point. The reference point between theserving network domain and the transit network domain is termed the [Yu] reference point.

Serving Network DomainThe serving network domain is the part of the core network domain to which the access networkdomain that provides the user’s access is connected. It represents the core network functions thatare local to the user’s access point and thus their location changes when the user moves. Theserving network domain is responsible for routing calls and transport user data/information fromsource to destination. It has the ability to interact with the home domain to cater for user specificdata/services and with the transit domain for non-user specific data/services purposes.

Home Network DomainThe home network domain represents the core network functions that are conducted at a permanentlocation regardless of the location of the user’s access point. The USIM is related by subscriptionto the home network domain. The home network domain therefore contains at least permanentlyuser specific data and is responsible for management of subscription information. It may alsohandle home specific services, potentially not offered by the serving network domain.

Transit Network DomainThe transit network domain is the core network part located on the communication path between theserving network domain and the remote party. If, for a given call, the remote party is located inside thesame network as the originating UE, then no particular instance of the transit domain is activated.



Pub-Date

UMTS Domains Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Domains

HomeNetworkDomain

TransitNetworkDomain

ServingNetworkDomain

CoreNetworkDomain

AccessNetworkDomain

MobileEquipment

Domain

USIMDomain

InfrastructureDomain

User EquipmentDomain

Iu [Yu]Uu

[Zu]

CuSIM

CARD



2-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999The diagram opposite illustrates the basic configuration of a Public Land Mobile Network(PLMN) supporting UMTS and GSM/GPRS. This architecture is as defined in Release1999 of the 3GPP (Dec 02) specifications (TS23.002)

The Core Network (CN) EntitiesThe CN is constituted of a Circuit Switched (CS) domain and a Packet Switched (PS)domain. These two domains differ by the way they support user traffic, as explainedbelow. These two domains are overlapping, i.e. they contain some common entities. APLMN can implement only one domain or both domains.

CS Domain

The CS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "CS type of connection" for usertraffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "CS type of connection" is aconnection for which dedicated network resources are allocated at the connection establishmentand released at the connection release. The entities specific to the CS domain are:

• MSC - The Mobile-services Switching Centre• GMSC - Gateway Mobile Service Switching Centre• VLR - Visitor Location Register

PS Domain

The PS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "PS type of connection"for user traffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "PS type ofconnection" transports the user information using autonomous concatenation of bits calledpackets: each packet can be routed independently from the previous one. The entitiesspecific to the PS domain are the GPRS specific entities, i.e.

• SGSN - Serving GPRS Support Node• GGSN - Gateway GPRS Support Node

Entities Common to the CS and PS domains

The following entities are common provide common functions to the CS and PS Domains:

• HLR - The Home Location Register• AUC - Authentication Centre• EIR - Equipment Identity Register



Pub-Date

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

GMSC GGSNAuC

HLR

EIR

SGSNVLR

MSC

VLR

MSC

SIM

ME

USIM

Um Um

CN

BSC

BTS BTS

BSC

BTS BTS

RNC

Node B Node B

RNC

Node B Node B

H Gc

GrD

C

Gi

Gs

GfFG

E

Gp

GnPSTN PSTN

Abis

GbBSS

Abislublub

RNSRNSBSS

SIM-ME I/f

or

MS

Cu

Uu

IuPSIuCSIuPS IuCS

A

Iur



2-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Architecture - Release 1999


The Access Network (AN) EntitiesTwo different types of access network are used by the CN: the Base Station System (BSS) andthe Radio Network System (RNS). The BSS offers a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)based technology to access the Mobile Station whereas the RNS offers a Wideband-CodeDivision Multiple Access (W-CDMA) based technology. The MSC (resp. SGSN) canconnect to one of these Access Network type or to both of them.

The Base Station System (BSS)

The Base Station System (BSS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers,controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single A-interface as being the entityresponsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supportingGPRS, the BSS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Gb interface. The functionality forthe A interface is described in GSM 08.02 and for the Gb interface in TS 23.060. The radioequipment of a BSS may support one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more basestations. Where an Abis-interface is implemented, the BSS consists of one Base StationController (BSC) and one or more Base Transceiver Station (BTS).

The Radio Network System (RNS)

The Radio Network System (RNS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers,etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single Iu-interface as being the entity responsiblefor communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS,the RNS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Iu-PS interface. The functionality for the Iu-CSinterface is described in TS 25.410 and for the Iu-PS interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipmentof a RNS may support one or more cells. A RNS may consist of one or more base stations. TheRNS consists of one Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node B.

The Mobile Station (MS)The mobile station consists of the physical equipment used by a PLMN subscriber; it comprisesthe Mobile Equipment (ME) and the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), called User ServicesIdentity Module (USIM) for Release 99 and following releases. The ME comprises theMobile Termination (MT) which, depending on the application and services, may supportvarious combinations of Terminal Adapter (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE) functionalgroups. These functional groups are described in GSM 04.02.



Pub-Date

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0


GMSC GGSNAuC

HLR

EIR

SGSNVLR

MSC

VLR

MSC

SIM

ME

USIM

Um Um

CN

BSC

BTS BTS

BSC

BTS BTS

RNC

Node B Node B

RNC

Node B Node B

H Gc

GrD

C

Gi

Gs

GfFG

E

Gp

GnPSTN PSTN

Abis

GbBSS

Abislublub

RNSRNSBSS

SIM-ME I/f

or

MS

Cu

Uu

IuPSIuCSIuPS IuCS

A

Iur



2-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network - Release 1999

UMTS Network - Release 1999The diagram opposite shows a simplified schematic of a Release 1999 UMTS Network.It illustrates only those entities associated with providing a UMTS service (i.e. excludesany entities specifically associated with GSM/GPRS)

Entities of the CN-CS Domain

The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC)

The Mobile-services Switching Centre (MSC) constitutes the interface between the radio systemand the fixed networks. The MSC performs all necessary functions in order to handle the circuitswitched services to and from the mobile stations. In order to obtain radio coverage of a givengeographical area, a number of base stations are normally required; i.e. each MSC would thushave to interface several base stations. In addition several MSCs may be required to cover acountry. The Mobile-services Switching Centre is an exchange which performs all the switchingand signalling functions for mobile stations located in a geographical area designated as theMSC area. The main difference between a MSC and an exchange in a fixed network is thatthe MSC has to take into account the impact of the allocation of radio resources and the mobilenature of the subscribers and has to perform procedures required for the location registration(see TS 23.012) and procedures required for handovers (see TS 23.009).

The Gateway MSC (GMSC)

If a network delivering a call to the PLMN cannot interrogate the HLR, the call is routed toan MSC. This MSC will interrogate the appropriate HLR and then route the call to the MSCwhere the mobile station is located. The MSC which performs the routing function to the actuallocation of the MS is called the Gateway MSC (GMSC). The acceptance of an interrogation toan HLR is the decision of the operator. The choice of which MSCs can act as Gateway MSCsis for the operator to decide (i.e. all MSCs or some designated MSCs).

The Visitor Location Register (VLR)

A mobile station roaming in an MSC area is controlled by the Visitor Location Register (VLR) incharge of this area. When a Mobile Station (MS) enters a new location area it starts a registrationprocedure. The MSC in charge of that area notices this registration and transfers to the VLR theidentity of the location area where the MS is situated. If this MS is not yet registered, the VLR and theHLR exchange information to allow the proper handling of calls involving the MS. A VLR may be incharge of one or several MSC areas. The VLR contains also the information needed to handle the callsset-up or received by the MSs registered in its database. The following elements are included:

• The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI);• The Mobile Station International ISDN number (MSISDN);• The Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN), see TS 23.003 for allocation principles;• The Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI), if applicable;• The Local Mobile Station Identity (LMSI), if used;• The location area where the mobile station has been registered;• The last known location and the initial location of the MS.



Pub-Date

UMTS Network - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Network - Release 1999

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

UTRAN

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

HLRVLR AuC

GMSC

MSC

GGSN

SGSN

CN-CS CN-PS

CN Domain

Iu-CS Iu-PS

PSTN PDN

OMC-T(Transport)

OMC-U(UTRAN)

Iur

Uu

User Equipment

RNS RNS



2-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network - Release 1999


Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains

The Home Location Register (HLR)

This functional entity is a database in charge of the management of mobile subscribers. A PLMN maycontain one or several HLRs: it depends on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of theequipment and on the organisation of the network. The following kinds of information are stored there:

• Subscription information.• Location information enabling the charging and routing of calls towards the

MSC where the MS is registered (e.g. the MS Roaming Number, the VLRNumber, the MSC Number, the Local MS Identity).

• If GPRS is supported, location information enabling the charging and routing of messages inthe SGSN where the MS is currently registered (e.g. the SGSN Number).

• The types of identity are attached to each mobile (e.g. International Mobile Station Identity(IMSI), one or more Mobile Station International ISDN Number(s) (MSISDN), if GPRSis supported zero or more Packet Data Protocol (PDP) address(es)).

The Authentication Centre (AuC)

The Authentication Centre (AuC) is an entity which stores data for each mobile subscriberto allow the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) to be authenticated and toallow communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network to beciphered. The AuC transmits the data needed for authentication and ciphering via the HLR tothe VLR, MSC and SGSN which needs to authenticate a mobile station. The AuthenticationCentre (AuC) is associated with an HLR, and stores an identity key for each mobile subscriberregistered with the associated HLR. This key is used to generate:

• Data which are used to authenticate the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI).• A key used to cipher communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network.

The Equipment Identity Register (EIR)

The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) in the GSM system is the logical entity which isresponsible for storing in the network the International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEIs),used in the GSM system. The equipment is classified as "white listed", "grey listed", "blacklisted" or it may be unknown as specified in TS 22.016 and TS 29.002.

This functional entity contains one or several databases which store(s) the IMEIs usedin the GSM system. An EIR shall as a minimum contain a "white list" (Equipmentclassified as "white listed"). See also TS 22.016 on IMEI.



Pub-Date

UMTS Network - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0


Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

UTRAN

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

HLRVLR AuC

GMSC

MSC

GGSN

SGSN

CN-CS CN-PS

CN Domain

Iu-CS Iu-PS

PSTN PDN

OMC-T(Transport)

OMC-U(UTRAN)

Iur

Uu

User Equipment

RNS RNS



2-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network R4

UMTS Network R4In R4 the separation of the switching and call control functions within the core network is commonlyreferred to as a softswitch architecture. The call control component, i.e. the MSC server, is thesoftswitch in this case. This separation of functions makes it easier to scale the network asthe traffic demand increases. If the network planners require more switching capacity they canadd MGWs; if they require more call control capacity they then add more MSC servers. This isa clear distinction from the UMTS Release 99 and GSM networks, in which the call control andswitching functions are all carried out within the MSC and gateway MSC (GMSC).

Media Gateways (MGWs)This translates media traffic between different types of network. Functionalitycarried out by the MGW includes:

• Termination of bearer channels from the circuit switched and packet switched networks;• Echo cancellation for circuit switched circuits;• Translation of media from one CODEC form to another,

Each MGW is controlled by one or more MSC servers.

MSC ServerThis performs functions such as call control for mobile-originated and mobile-terminated calls, andmobility management in terms of maintenance of the registry of mobiles within its area of control.The MSC server integrates with the Visitor Location Register (VLR) component, which holdslocation information as well as CAMEL (customized applications for mobile network enhancedlogic) data for subscribers. Functions carried out by the MSC server include:

• Controlling the registration of mobiles to provide mobility management;• Providing authentication functions;• Routing mobile-originated calls to their destination;• Routing mobile-terminated calls by using paging to individual mobiles.

The MSC server terminates signalling from the mobile network over the Iu interface to the RNC. It alsocontrols the establishment of bearers across its core by the use of MGWs under its control.



Pub-Date

UMTS Network R4 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Network R4

NODEB

BTS

RNC

BSC

GERAN

UTRAN

MGW MGW

MSC Server

CN CS Domain

SGSN GGSN

CN PS Domain

HLR/VLR/EIR

Data Network

PSTN/ISDN

Um

Uu

Network Management (NMS)



2-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network Release 5

UMTS Network Release 5Release 5 (R5) builds on the partial implementation of IP packet switching within the core network,to move to an all-IP architecture. In this release, packets can be moved end-to-end using IPtransport with an enhanced GPRS network connected to an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS). TheGPRS backbone for R5 must be able to provide similar levels and classifications of QoS usuallyassociated with ATM networks. This is to allow for the delivery of time-sensitive traffic such asvoice and multimedia. As well as enhancements to the core network, the RAN also migratesfrom ATM to IP. Even though the vision for R5 is for a total IP solution, the operator may wellstill use ATM as a transport solution for some parts of the network. This is possible because allUMTS releases must provide backward compatibility with earlier releases.

Notice that in the R5 network, the CS domain can be dispensed with since the servicesassociated with it, such as transfer of voice traffic, can be carried over the GPRS and IMSnetworks using IP QoS mechanisms. That given, many operators may still be using the R4CS domain as well as the R5 IMS architecture. This allows for a gradual migration to an all-IParchitecture with the minimal disruption to service. Some voice calls may be handled usingthe CS domain and some, for example video call services, via the IMS.

IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS)R5 introduces a new network domain called the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This is an IPnetwork domain designed to provide appropriate support for real-time multimedia services.

The UE communicates with the IMS using GPRS, with the IMS being directly connected tothe GGSN. The IMS provides services to mobile users such as:

• Real-time communication using voice, video or multimedia messaging(i.e. voice and video telephony);

• Audioconferencing and videoconferencing;• Content delivery services such as video, audio or multimedia download;• Content streaming services such as video, audio or multimedia streaming

(e.g. using video on demand server);• Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS).

Each operator’s IMS can be connected to other operators’ IMSs, allowing multimedia servicesbetween users on different networks. Connections to the public Internet allow MMS messagingas well as voice over IP (VoIP) and video telephony between mobile and fixed-line users. Finally,the interface to the ISDN (or other circuit switched networks) allows VoIP calls to be connectedthrough to conventional fixed-line and mobile users, e.g. GSM. Connections between the IMS andother IP networks are controlled by firewalls to protect against hacking. The interface between theIMS and the CS network is controlled by the softswitch and MGW components. Within the operator’snetwork the IMS is connected to the Home Subscriber Server (HSS) to allow for subscriberauthentication, authorization and mobility management. For R5 and beyond, the IMS can be usedto provide transport for all of the operator’s services, including conventional voice calls.



Pub-Date

UMTS Network Release 5 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Network Release 5

NODEB

BTS

RNC

BSC

GERAN

UTRAN

SGSN GGSN

CN PS Domain

HSS

IMS

IP Multimedia

PSTN/ISDN

Um

Uu

Network Management (NMS)

ATM/IP



2-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)The UTRAN consists of a set of Radio Network Subsystems (RNSs) connected to the CoreNetwork through the IuCS and IuPS. A RNS consists of a Radio Network Controller (RNC) andone or more Node Bs. A Node B is connected to the RNC through the Iub interface. A NodeB can support FDD mode, TDD mode or dual-mode operation. The RNC is responsible for theHandover decisions that require signalling to the UE. An RNC may include a combining/splittingfunction to support combination/splitting of information streams.

Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the Radio Network Subsystems can be interconnected togetherthrough the Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over direct physicalconnection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable transport network.

UTRAN FunctionsThe following is a list of the functions performed by the UTRAN sub-systems. Thesefunctions will be discussed in further detail in later chapters.

Functions related to overall system access control

• Admission Control• Congestion Control• System information broadcasting

Radio channel ciphering and deciphering

Functions related to mobility

• Handover• SRNS Relocation

Functions related to radio resource management and control

• Radio resource configuration and operation• Radio environment survey• combining/splitting control• Radio bearer connection set-up and release (Radio Bearer Control)• Allocation and deallocation of Radio Bearers• Radio protocols function• RF power control• RF power setting• Radio channel coding/decoding• Channel coding control• Initial (random) access detection and handling• CN Distribution function for Non Access Stratum messages

Functions related to broadcast and multicast services

NOTE: Only Broadcast is applicable for Release 1999.

• Broadcast/Multicast Information Distribution• Broadcast/Multicast Flow Control• CBS Status Reporting



Pub-Date

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

c

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

Core Network

Iu Iu

IurRNS RNS



2-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio network Controller (RNC)

Radio network Controller (RNC)A Radio Network Controller (RNC) is a network component within the PLMN with thefunctions to support one or more Node B, Cell and/or User Equipment.

Typically one RNC can support up to 300 Node Bs, which in turn can provide resources for upto 6 cells. However, it should be noted that the ultimate limiting factor in planning the number ofRNCs required within a PLMN will be the traffic capacity that the RNC can support. Typical valueswill start at around 1000 Erlang, rising to 10,000 Erlang as networks mature.

A Radio Network Controller (RNC) can be considered to operate in one or more of the following roles:

• Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)• Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)• Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)

Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)Controlling RNC is a role an RNC can take with respect to a specific set of NodeB’s. There is only one Controlling RNC for any Node B. The Controlling RNC has theoverall control of the logical resources of its node B’s.

The main functions of a CRNC are:

• Control of the Radio Resources for the Node-B it controls.• Provision of Services to the Node-B that it controls.• Load and Congestion Control• Admission Control• Code allocation for new radio links



Pub-Date

Radio network Controller (RNC) Version 1 Rev 0

Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN CRNC Functions

Controlling of the Radio Resources

Provision of Services to the Node-B

Load and Congestion Control

Admission Control

Code Allocation for new Radio Links

·

···

·Iu

lur

Iu C-RNCC-RNC



2-23

Pub-Date


Radio network Controller (RNC)

Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)A Serving RNC is the RNC located within a Serving RNS (SRNS). SRNS is a role an RNScan take with respect to a specific connection between an UE and UTRAN.

There is one Serving RNS for each UE that has a connection to UTRAN.

The Serving RNS is in charge of the radio connection between a UE and the UTRAN.

The Serving RNS terminates the Iu for this UE.

The main functions of an SRNC are:

• Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE.• L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC).• Radio Resource Control operations.• Mapping of Iu Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channels Parameters.• Hand-over decisions.• Outer loop power control.• Macro-Diversity combining and splitting.



Pub-Date


Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN SRNC Functions

Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE

L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC)

Radio Resource Control Operations

Mapping of Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channel Parameters

·

··

·Hand-Over Decisions·

S-RNC

Outer Loop Power Control·Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting·



2-25

Pub-Date


Radio network Controller (RNC)

Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)A Drift RNC is located within a Drift RNS. DRNS is role that an RNS can take withrespect to a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN.

A DRNS is any RNS that supports the Serving RNS by providing radio resources via the cell(s) itcontrols, to provide additional radio bearer services for a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN.

There may be zero, one or more DRNSs associated with a specificconnection between a UE and UTRAN.

The main functions of a DRNC are:

• Macro-diversity combining and splitting.• No L2 processing, i.e. no re-transmissions, acknowledgements or negative acknowledgements.• Transparent routing of data on the Iub and Iur Interfaces, except when Common

or shared channels are used.



Pub-Date


Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN DRNC Functions

Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting

No L2 Processing

Transparent Routing except for Common/Shared Channels

···

D-RNCS-RNC



2-27

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Horizon 3G-n macro

Horizon 3G-n macroThe Horizon 3G-n macro logical structure is divided in four subsystems responsible for allprocessing needed for radio transmission and reception in one or more cells.

The Horizon 3G-n macro Subsystems are:

• Transport subsystem.• Baseband subsystem.• Control subsystem• Antenna and feeder subsystem

Transport subsystemIt’s responsible for the termination of the IuB interface connecting the Horizon 3G-n toRNC to exchange information and performs ATM switching

It is formed by two boards: NDTI (NodeB Digital Trunk Interface) and NAOI(NodeB ATM Optical Interface)

Baseband subsystemThe baseband subsystem processes uplink and downlink signals at the physicallayer, and includes the following functions:

• Forwarding and controlling baseband signals and RF signals• Processing uplink and downlink baseband signals• Supporting the HSDPA• Supporting the resource pool• Supporting RRU connection• Search over UL access channels• Demodulation over dedicated channels• Uplink channel encoding• Channel estimation• RAKE receiving• Softer combination• Decoding

HULP (NodeB HSUPA Up-link Processing Unit), HDLP (NodeB HSDPA Down-link ProcessingUnit), HBBI (HSDPA Baseband Processing and Interface Unit) (or NBBI (NodeB BasebandProcessing and Interface Unit) ), and HBOI (HSDPA Baseband Processing and OpticalInterface Unit) boards are part of the baseband subsystem .



Pub-Date

Horizon 3G-n macro Version 1 Rev 0

Horizon 3G-n macroLogical structure of the Horizon 3G-n macro

Figure 2-1

TransportSubsystem

Control Subsystem

BasebandSubsystem

RF Subsystem

RNC Antenna

H3G-n macro



2-29

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Horizon 3G-n macro

Horizon 3G-n macro

RF subsystemAll RF signals and it conversion to digital signals are processed by the RF subsystem.

This subsystem include the following functions:

• • Modulate and demodulate RF signals.• • Amplifying the received signals• • Analog-to-digital conversion and viceversa.• • Digital down and up conversion.• • Matched filtering.• • Digital Automatic Gain Control (DAGC).• • Shaping and filtering downlink spread signals.• • converting RF signals to the transmit frequency band.• • Power amplification.

The MTRU (Multi-carrier Transceiver Unit) and MAFU (Multi-carrier Antenna FilterUnit) boards are installed in this subsystem.

Control subsystemThe control subsystem provides the control of the entire Horizon 3G-n macro Indoor, provides thesystem synchronization clock, alarm management, IuB signal termination, resource and configurationmanagement environment monitoring, and control the RET antennas system.

The control subsystem is formed by two boards: NMON (NodeB Monitor Unit) andNMPT (NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit).

Antenna and Feeder SubsystemThis subsystem transmits and receives signals over the air interface. With the help of the(optional) TMA, amplifies weak signals from the antennas, improves the receiver sensitivityand enhances the uplink coverage of the Horizon 3G-n macro BTS.

The Antenna and Feeder subsystem is formed by the following components:

• Antenna.• Feeder.• TMA ( Optional)



Pub-Date

Horizon 3G-n macro Version 1 Rev 0

Horizon 3G-n macrological structure of the Horizon 3G-n macro Indoor

Figure 2-2

HULPNDTI/NAOI

HDLP

HBBIRx0

Rx1

Tx PA

Rx0

Rx1

Tx Dup

lexe

r

TMA

TMA

RNC

Antenna

Antenna

MTRU MAFUTransportsubsystem

Baseband subsystem

NMON

NMPT

RF subsystem

Controlsubsystem



2-31

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 User Equipment (UE)

User Equipment (UE)

Introduction to User EquipmentUMTS aims to offer service capabilities that enable a wide variety of services to be implemented.Such services range from simple services like speech, to complex multimedia services containingseveral simultaneous media components that place totally different requirements on the system andon the terminal equipment. By standardising service capabilities rather than actual services, moreflexibility is available for service providers/network operators to create unique services. The sameprinciple also applies for UMTS terminals, i.e. the types of terminals are not standardised and aretherefore not limited in any way. A wide range of terminal types is likely in the UMTS environment,e.g. speech only terminals, videophones, data terminals, wideband data terminals, fax terminals,multi-band/multi-mode terminals and any combination of the aforementioned.

Terminal development trends for today’s terminals are mainly towards higher integration levels resultingin smaller size. The goal of "four 100’s" has been a rule of thumb target for handsets, i.e., 100 hourstandby, 100 cc size, 100 gram weight and also 100 MIPS performance. The size targets havealready been achieved and any requirement for smaller terminals is questionable from the usabilityand physical size limitations perspective. The other target parameters have no maximum limitations.On the other hand, we can see the following further trends for near future terminals:

• Application specific terminals (smart traffic, vending machine radio, etc.);• Increased number of value adding features (graphics, smart messaging, PC connectivity

and compatibility, memory databases, speech recognition, messaging features, displayfunctions, and different source coding methods (e.g., JPEG));

• Support for higher number of source codecs (several speech codecs);• Multiband terminals (e.g., GSM in 900MHz and DCS1800);• Multimode terminals (e.g., UMTS/GSM dualmode terminal);• Dynamic SW configurability;

These trends are more than likely to continue in the future. Multiband and multimode terminalswith high integration levels would be preferred by the users. Technological development of theseterminals relies on new packaging and interconnection technologies, as well as technologicalsteps like SW-radio. The concept trends of mobile handheld terminals is likely to diverge fromsimple speech terminals towards a variety of different types, e.g., communicators, wearablephones, data terminals, etc. The dominant role of speech terminals will be challenged inthe future by these new data- and multimedia-oriented terminals.



Pub-Date

User Equipment (UE) Version 1 Rev 0

User Equipment (UE)

Speech Only

Videophones

Data Terminals

Wideband Data Terminals

Fax Terminals

·

···

·Application Specific Terminals ·Multiband/Multimode Terminals·Dynamic Software Configurability·Value Adding Features·



2-33

Pub-Date


User Equipment (UE)

UE ArchitectureThe UMTS UE will consists of a number of logical software and hardware modules. Althoughthese modules may be delivered by a single vendor as single physical and indivisable package,it is also possible that they will be independent physical units.

The reference architecture showing the modules of the UE, along with their corresponding networkfunctions are illustrated opposite and described in the following paragraphs.

Integrated Circuit (IC) CardThe IC card is the module on which are implemented the user and subscription dependent functions ofthe UE. The primary component of the IC card is the User Service Identity Module (USIM)

The mandatory requirements for IC Cards used for holding USIM application, are related tothe need to have one USIM application on the IC card, as well as to the security issues. Thefollowing functionality is required from the IC card holding a USIM application:

• Physical characteristics same as used for GSM SIM• The support of one USIM application• The support of one or more user profile on the USIM• Possibility to update USIM specific information over the air, (e.g. such information as service

profile information, algorithms, etc.) in a secure and controlled manner.• Security mechanisms to prevent USIM application specific information from

unauthorised access or alteration.• User authentication.

In addition to the mandatory functions, the IC Card may support the followingadditional, optional functionality

• The support for more than one simultaneous application (Multiple USIM, Ecashand/or some other applications).

• Possibility to have shared applications/files between multiple subscriptions, includingADNs, other user/SP controlled files and data.

• Possibility for some applications/files to be restricted to one or some of thesubscriptions, under user/SP control.

• Inclusion of a payment method (electronic money and/or prepaid and/or subscription details)• An interface allowing highly secure downloading and configuration of new functionality,

new algorithms and new applications into the IC card as well as updating theexisting applications, algorithms and data.

• Support for storing and possibly executing encryption related information,such as keys and algorithms.

• In multi application cards a functionality to prevent the unauthorised access and alterationof USIM specific information by other applications residing on the card.

• The ability to accept popular value-adding IC card applications, such as digital signatureapplications, EMV credit/debit card, electronic purses such as Mondex and Visacash, etc.

• Possibility for one UMTS SP to block multiple subscription on the card the SP has issued.

Shared applications could include databases (e.g. telephone books), service profiles (e.g.controlling divert information), users preferences (e.g. short dialling codes) and SP-specificparameters inside a USIM application (e.g. call barring tables).



Pub-Date


User Equipment (UE)UE Architecture

MTRT

NT

TAF

IC CARD

USIM

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

MOBILEEQUIPMENT

UTRAN

CORENETWORK

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

R

TuIu

USEREQUIPMENT

(UE)

USERAPPLICATION

USERAPPLICATION



2-35

Pub-Date


User Equipment (UE)

Terminal Equipment (TE)The TE is the part of the UE on which the users end-to-end application functions execute,terminating the services transported via the UMTS bearers. The TE is regarded as a servicedependent component, interacting with a peer TE in the external network.

Mobile Equipment (ME)The ME is the users subscription independent, but mobile system dependent componentof the UE. It will terminate all control plane functions and the user plane UMTSbearer. The ME consists of the following modules:

• Terminal Adaptation Function (TAF)• Mobile Termination (MT)

TAF

The TAF provided the interaction between the TE and MT, via the R interface/referencepoint. This may include the ability of the TE to control the MT by, for example, the useof commands sets ( e.g. Modem AT control commands).

MT

The MT is the telecom service independent, but UMTS dependent portion of the UE which terminatesthe radio transmissions to and from the network. Within the MT two further modules are defined.

The Radio Termination (RT) which is dependent upon the the radio access network. Asingle RT will provide common functions for all services using the same radio accesstechnology. For UMTS the RT terminates the UTRAN physical layer (Uu interface) and alsoencompasses the Access-Stratum layer 2 and layer three protocols.

The RT interfaces to the Network Termination (NT), at the Tu reference points. While the RTis RAN dependent, the NT is CN dependent, and thus terminates, at the serving network, theNon-access Stratum layer 3 protocols, for functions such as mobility management, call control, sessionmanagement, etc. To fulfil many of these functions, the NT must have access to information stored onthe USIM (e.g. security information), this is accessed via the interface at the Cu reference points.



Pub-Date


User Equipment (UE)UE Architecture

MTRT

NT

TAF

IC CARD

USIM

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

MOBILEEQUIPMENT

UTRAN

CORENETWORK

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

R

TuIu

USEREQUIPMENT

(UE)

USERAPPLICATION

USERAPPLICATION



2-37

Pub-Date





Pub-Date





Pub-Date





Pub-Date

Network Services Version 1 Rev 0

User Equipment (UE)Chapter 3

Network Services



3-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Network Services




Pub-Date



• Describe the UMTS service classifications• Describe Quality of Service Architecture• Describe the UMTS Security Architecture



3-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Services in the UMTS Environment

Services in the UMTS EnvironmentBack in the days of 1G networks there was only one available service, speech. When 2G was releasedthe idea of having third parties providing services or service content was open to development.

The diagram opposite illustrates how services, their creation and content provision are located in UMTS.

The system must be able to handle end-to-end service requirements in all levels and the highinvestment required is mainly there to provide the necessary QoS for those services. The lowerlayers (Physical and Network) have more hardware requirements so therefore more cost.

The service creation layer is provided by such things as HTML and WAP and the Content ProviderLayer provides the end user services, for instance a banks internet service.

The commercial nature of the UMTS services means that sensitive information will be transferredand the security mechanisms used must be robust enough to cope.



Pub-Date

Services in the UMTS Environment Version 1 Rev 0

Services in the UMTS Environment

Content Provider Layer

Service Creation Layer

Network Element Layer

Physical Transmission Layer

Net

wo

rk M

anag

emen

t

Sec

uri

ty F

un

ctio

ns

En

d-t

o-e

nd

Qo

S



3-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture

Quality of Service (QoS) ArchitectureFrom the end user point of view, the UMTS network is a network for services. In this respectthe technology itself is not the most important aspect but it is an enabler providing QoS sothat the end-users can be satisfied with the end-to-end services they use.

The end-to-end services in the UMTS network are carried by bearers and a bearer is a serviceproviding QoS between two defined points. The UMTS network contains many system levelshaving their own QoS properties. For example the air interface and the Iub. The QoS that hasto be provided by the different bearers is illustrated by the diagram opposite.

The end-to-end service sets the requirement for QoS. These requirements are then mapped tothe next level which in turn maps the QoS to the next level and so on. As a result the UMTSnetwork forms a connection through itself fulfilling the original QoS requirements. To makethis possible the QoS requirements are classified by traffic classes.

The leading principles that are applied to UMTS QoS classes are:

• The QoS classes must allow for efficient use of the UMTS UTRA service (radio capacity);• The CN and UTRAN must be allowed to evolve independently;• The UMTS network can evolve independently but must be backwards compatible

with its surrounding networks;• The operator must be allowed to utilise existing technology within the UMTS system i.e. ATM and IP.



Pub-Date

Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture

NodeBMTTE RNCMSC/VLR SGSN

GMSC GGSN

End-to-end Services

Local Bearer Services UMTS Bearer Services

External Bearer Services

Radio Access Bearer ServicesCN Bearer Services

Radio Bearer ServicesIu Bearer Services

Backbone Bearer Services

UTRA Bearer Services Physical Bearer Services Physical Bearer

Services

UE



3-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Quality of Service Classes

Quality of Service ClassesNetwork Services are considered end-to-end, this means from a Terminal Equipment (TE)to another TE. An End-to-End Service may have a certain Quality of Service (QoS) which isprovided for the user of a network service. It is the user that decides whether he is satisfiedwith the provided QoS or not. To realise a certain network QoS a Bearer Service with clearlydefined characteristics and functionality is to be set up from the source to the destination ofa service. The diagram opposite illustrates the QoS classes for UMTS.

The main distinguishing factor between these QoS classes is how delay sensitive thetraffic is: Conversational class is meant for traffic which is very delay sensitive whileBackground class is the most delay insensitive traffic class.

Conversational and Streaming classes are mainly intended to be used to carry real-time traffic flows.Interactive class and Background are mainly meant to be used by traditional Internet applications likeWWW, Email, Telnet, FTP and News. Due to looser delay requirements, compared to conversationaland streaming classes, both provide better error rate by means of channel coding and retransmission.

Conversational ClassThe most well known use of this scheme is telephony speech (e.g. GSM). But with Internet andmultimedia a number of new applications will require this scheme, for example voice over IP and videoconferencing tools. Real time conversation is always performed between peers (or groups) of live(human) end-users. This is the only scheme where the required characteristics are strictly given byhuman perception. (e.g. The real time data flow is always aiming at a live (human) destination).

Streaming ClassThis scheme is one of the newcomers in data communication, raising a number of new requirements inboth telecommunication and data communication systems. It is characterised by the fact that the timerelations (variation) between information entities (i.e. samples, packets) within a flow shall be preserved,although it does not have any requirements on low transfer delay. The delay variation of the end-to-endflow shall be limited, to preserve the time relation (variation) between information entities of the stream.When the user is looking at (listening to) real time video (audio) the scheme of real time streams applies.

Interactive classInteractive traffic is the other classical data communication scheme that on an overall level ischaracterised by the request response pattern of the end-user. At the message destination there is anentity expecting the message (response) within a certain time. Round trip delay time is therefore oneof the key attributes. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparentlytransferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are: web browsing, data base retrieval, server access.

Background TaskBackground traffic is one of the classical data communication schemes that on an overall levelis characterised by that the destination is not expecting the data within a certain time. Thescheme is thus more or less delivery time insensitive. Another characteristic is that the contentof the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate).

Examples are background delivery of E-mail notification, SMS, download of databasesand reception of measurement records.



Pub-Date

Quality of Service Classes Version 1 Rev 0

Quality of Service Classes

E -mailData needs to be integral and correct

No requirementB ackground

W eb brows er and location-bas ed s ervices

Data needs to be integral and correct

F airly highInteractive

Multimedia s erviceData needs to be trans ferred s teadily and continuously

HighS treaming

S peech s ervice and videophone

E rrors are permitted to a certain degree

V ery highC onvers ational

S erviceR equirement for data

trans mis s ion

R equirement for realtime

performance

QoS C las s

E -mailData needs to be integral and correct

No requirementB ackground

W eb brows er and location-bas ed s ervices

Data needs to be integral and correct

F airly highInteractive

Multimedia s erviceData needs to be trans ferred s teadily and continuously

HighS treaming

S peech s ervice and videophone

E rrors are permitted to a certain degree

V ery highC onvers ational

S erviceR equirement for data

trans mis s ion

R equirement for realtime

performance

QoS C las s



3-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Supported Service Rates

Supported Service RatesThe supported bit rates supported used in UMTS range somewhere between 0 to 7.2 mbit/s peruser. However the actual bit rates are meaningless without defining the QoS offered togetherwith the bit rates. The slides opposite illustrate typical data rates together with the types ofservice offered. Different combinations of the supported bit rates maybe put together in onecall, for example you may have Sig 3.4 kbit/s + CS service + PS Service.

Description of TerminologyIn the sub sections below the terminology used in the slides is explained.

Connection Oriented and Connectionless Oriented Services

Connection-oriented — Requires a session connection (analogous to a phone call) beestablished before any data can be sent. This method is often called a "reliable" networkservice. It can guarantee that data will arrive in the same order. Connection-oriented servicesset up virtual links between end systems through a network.

Connectionless — Does not require a session connection between sender and receiver.The sender simply starts sending packets (called datagrams) to the destination. This servicedoes not have the reliability of the connection-oriented method, but it is useful for periodicburst transfers. A connectionless network provides minimal services.

Traffic Type

The bearer requirements are that the following is provided:

• Guaranteed/constant bit rate;• Non-guaranteed/dynamically variable bit rate;• Real time dynamically variable bit rate with a minimum guaranteed bit rate.• Real time and non real time services

Traffic Characteristics

Point-to-point services to be provided:

• Uni-directional — Service offered in one direction;• Bi-directional — Service offered in both directions;• Symmetric — The data rate is roughly the same uplink and downlink;• Asymmetric — The data rate is more heavily weighted in one direction.

Uni-directional Point-to-Multipoint:

• Multicast — Thie end user is specified before the connection is established. MulticastBroadcast Multimedia Service (MBMS) is an example of this:

• Broadcast — The messages are broadcast to to all UE”s and the end user is notknown before. Cell Broadcast is an example of this.



Pub-Date

Supported Service Rates Version 1 Rev 0

Supported Service Rates

57.6 kbit/s , 28.8 kbit/s , and 14.4 kbit/sNon-trans parent Data S ervice

64 kbit/s , 56 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , and 28.8 kbit/sT rans parent Data S ervice

12.2 kbit/s ,AMR S peech S ervice

Data R ateT R B C S S ervic e

57.6 kbit/s , 28.8 kbit/s , and 14.4 kbit/sNon-trans parent Data S ervice

64 kbit/s , 56 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , and 28.8 kbit/sT rans parent Data S ervice

12.2 kbit/s ,AMR S peech S ervice

Data R ateT R B C S S ervic e

3.4 kbit/s , 13.6 kbit/sB idirectional S ignalling

Data R ateS R B S ervic e

3.4 kbit/s , 13.6 kbit/sB idirectional S ignalling

Data R ateS R B S ervic e

3648 kbit/s , 2048 kbit/s , 1536 kbit/s , 1024 kbit/s , 768 kbit/sHigh-s peed data s ervice interactive and

background unidirectional

384 kbit/s , 256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s

B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric background s ervice


B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric interactive s ervice

144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/sUnidirectional asymmetric s treaming s ervice

256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s

B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric s treaming s ervice

64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s , 8 kbit/sB idirectional symmetric V oIP s peech

s ervice

Data R ateT R B P S S ervic e

3648 kbit/s , 2048 kbit/s , 1536 kbit/s , 1024 kbit/s , 768 kbit/sHigh-s peed data s ervice interactive and

background unidirectional


B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric background s ervice


B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric interactive s ervice

144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/sUnidirectional asymmetric s treaming s ervice

256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s

B idirectional symmetric or as ymmetric s treaming s ervice

64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s , 8 kbit/sB idirectional symmetric V oIP s peech

s ervice

Data R ateT R B P S S ervic e



3-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 The Security Architecture

The Security ArchitectureFive security feature groups are defined. Each of these feature groups meets certainthreats, accomplishes certain security objectives:

Network access security (I): the set of security features that provide users with secure access to3G services, and which in particular protect against attacks on the (radio) access link.

Network domain security (II): the set of security features that enable nodes in the provider domain tosecurely exchange signalling data, and protect against attacks on the wireline network.

User domain security (III): the set of security features that secure access to mobile stations.

Application domain security (IV): the set of security features that enable applications in theuser and in the provider domain to securely exchange messages.

Visibility and configurability of security (V): the set of features that enables the user toinform himself whether a security feature is in operation or not and whether the use andprovision of services should depend on the security feature.



Pub-Date

The Security Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

The Security ArchitectureApplication

Stratum

TransportStratum

HomeStratum/ServingStratum

AN

(IV)

(I)(III)(V)

(I) (I)

(I)

(II)

(I)MT

TE USIM

User Application Provider Application

SN

HE



3-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Security and Privacy

Security and Privacy

User authentication:The property that the Serving Network (SN) corroborates the identity of the user;

Network authentication:The property that the user corroborates that he is connected to a serving network that is authorised bythe users HE to provide him services; this includes the guarantee that this authorisation is recent.

ConfidentialityCipher algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securelynegotiate the algorithm that they shall use subsequently;

Cipher key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on a cipherkey that they may use subsequently;

Confidentiality of user data: the property that user data cannot beoverheard on the radio access interface;

Confidentiality of signalling data: the property that signalling data cannot beoverheard on the radio access interface.

Data integrityIntegrity algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiatethe integrity algorithm that they shall use subsequently;

Integrity key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on anintegrity key that they may use subsequently;

Data integrity and origin authentication of signalling data: the property that thereceiving entity (MS or SN) is able to verify that signalling data has not been modified inan unauthorised way since it was sent by the sending entity (SN or MS) and that the dataorigin of the signalling data received is indeed the one claimed.

Mobile equipment identificationIn certain cases, SN may request the MS to send it the mobile equipment identity of the terminal. Themobile equipment identity shall only be sent after authentication of SN with exception of emergencycalls. The IMEI should be securely stored in the terminal. However, the presentation of this identity tothe network is not a security feature and the transmission of the IMEI is not protected. Although it is nota security feature, it should not be deleted from UMTS however, as it is useful for other purposes.



Pub-Date

Security and Privacy Version 1 Rev 0

Security and PrivacyUser AuthenticationNetwork AuthenticationConfidentialityData integrityMobile equipment identification



3-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Authentication and Key Agreement

Authentication and Key AgreementAuthentication and Key Agreement (AKA) achieves mutual authentication by the user and thenetwork showing knowledge of a secret key K which is shared between and available only to the USIMand the AuC in the user’s HE. In addition the USIM and the HE keep track of counters SEQMS andSEQHE respectively to support network authentication. The method was chosen in such a way as toachieve maximum compatibility with the current GSM security architecture and facilitate migration fromGSM to UMTS. The method is composed of a challenge/response protocol identical to the GSMsubscriber authentication and key establishment protocol combined with a sequence number-basedone-pass protocol for network authentication derived from the ISO standard ISO/IEC 9798-4

Distribution of authentication data from HE to SNUpon receipt of a request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE/AuC sends an ordered array of n authenticationvectors (the equivalent of a GSM "triplet") to the VLR/SGSN. Each authentication vector consists ofthe following components: a random number RAND, an expected response XRES, a cipher keyCK, an integrity key IK and an authentication token AUTN. Each authentication vector is goodfor one authentication and key agreement between the VLR/SGSN and the USIM.

Authentication and Key AgreementWhen the VLR/SGSN initiates an authentication and key agreement, it selects the nextauthentication vector from the array and sends the parameters RAND and AUTN to the user.The USIM checks whether AUTN can be accepted and, if so, produces a response RES whichis sent back to the VLR/SGSN. The USIM also computes CK and IK.

The VLR/SGSN compares the received RES with XRES. If they match the VLR/SGSNconsiders the authentication and key agreement exchange to be successfully completed.The established keys CK and IK will then be transferred by the USIM and the VLR/SGSNto the entities which perform ciphering and integrity functions.



Pub-Date

Authentication and Key Agreement Version 1 Rev 0

Authentication and Key Agreement

MS SN/VLR HE/HLR

Authentication request

Authentication data responseAV (1 . . . n)

Store authentication vectors

Select authentication vectors

User authentication requestRAND(i) || AUTN(i)

Verify AUTN(i)compute User authentication

RES(i)

Compare RES(i) and XRES(i)

Compute CK(i) and IK(i) Select CK(i) and IK(i)

Distributionauthentication vectors

from HE to SN

Authentication Key

Generatevectors AV (1 . . . n)



3-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering Algorithms

Ciphering AlgorithmsThe ciphering algorithms used in UMTS are shown on the slide opposite. As can be seen alot of different algorithms are active in the UMTS system. Algorithms f1 to f5 are of the typethat are used to compute numbers for use in authentication procedures.

Two very important algorithms, f8 and f9 are also shown, they have the following functions.

F8This algorithm will perform the ciphering function. The ciphering function is performed either inthe RLC sub-layer or in the MAC sub-layer according to the following rules:

• If a radio bearer is using a non-transparent RLC mode (AM or UM), cipheringis performed in the RLC sub-layer.

• If a radio bearer is using the transparent RLC mode, ciphering is performedin the MAC sub-layer (MAC-d entity).

Ciphering when applied is performed in the S-RNC and the ME and the context needed forciphering (CK, Count-C, etc.) is only known in S-RNC and the ME.

F9Most of the control signalling information elements that are sent between the MS and the networkare considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. Therefore a message authenticationfunction has been developed to solve this problem. The MS will still go through the initialRRC connection establishment sequence and perform the set-up security functions. After thishowever some signalling messages will be encoded using the f9 algorithm. This will be thecase for all RRC, MM, CC, GMM and SM Messages. The MM procedure in the MS will bethe process responsible for starting the integrity protection procedure.

AK Anonymity Key

AKA Authentication and key agreement

AUTN Authentication Token

MAC The message authentication code included in AUTN, computed using f1

XRES Expected Response



Pub-Date

Ciphering Algorithms Version 1 Rev 0

Ciphering Algorithms

F1 - Message authentication function used to compute MAC·

F3 - Key generating function used to compute CK·F2 - Message authentication function used to compute RES and XRES·F1* - Message authentication function used to compute MAC-S·

F5* - Key generating function used to compute AK in re-synchronisation procedures·F5 - Key generating function used to compute AK in normal procedures·F4 - Key generating function used to compute IK·

K-Long-term secret key shared between the USIM and the AuC·

F9 - Signalling elements between the UE and RNC·F8 - Data transfer between the UE and RNC·



3-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Generation of Authentication Vectors/TokensUpon the receipt of the authentication data request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE may havepre-computed the required number of authentication vectors and retrieve them from the HLRdatabase or may compute them on demand. The HE/AuC sends an authentication response back tothe VLR/SGSN that contains an ordered array of n authentication vectors AV(1..n). The diagramopposite shows the generation of an authentication vector AV by the HE/AuC.

SQN and RANDThe HE/AuC starts with generating a fresh sequence number SQN and an unpredictablechallenge RAND. SQNs are unique to each user (the HE/AuC keeps a counter: SQNHe

for each user) and are generated in batches, with a "time stamp" derived from a clockgiving universal time. RAND is a randomly generated number.

Authentication Key Management FieldAn authentication and key management field AMF is used as a third input variable to the algorithms andis also included in the authentication token of each authentication vector. AMF may be used by theoperator to "switch" functions in the USIM (e.g to indicate the algorithm and key used to generate aparticular authentication vector, or set the number of entries in a Sequence list (the list size)

Algorithms f1 -f5Subsequently the following values are computed using the various algorithms (f1 - f5):

A message authentication code MAC = f1K(SQN || RAND || AMF) where f1 isa message authentication function.

An expected response XRES = f2K (RAND) where f2 is a (possibly truncated)message authentication function.

A cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) where f3 is a key generating function.

An integrity key IK = f4K (RAND) where f4 is a key generating function.

An anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) where f5 is a key generating function.

AUTN and AVFinally the authentication token (AUTN = SQN ⊕ AK || AMF || MAC) and the authentication Vector(AV:=RAND||XRES||CK||IK||MAC) are constructed from the products of the algorithms.

Here, AK is an anonymity key used to conceal the sequence number as the latter may exposethe identity and location of the user. The concealment of the sequence number is to protectagainst passive attacks only. If no concealment is needed then f5 ≡ 0 (AK = 0).



Pub-Date

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens Version 1 Rev 0

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Generate SQN

Generate RAND

f1

AMF

SQN RAND

K

AUTN := SQN ⊕ AK || AMF || MAC

AV := RAND || XRES || CK || IK || AUTN

MAC XRES CK IK AK

f2 f3 f4 f5



3-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 USIM Authentication Function

USIM Authentication FunctionThe VLR/SGSN invokes the procedure by selecting the next unused authentication vectorfrom the ordered array of authentication vectors in the VLR/SGSN database. The VLR/SGSNsends to the USIM the random challenge RAND and an Authentication Token AUTN fornetwork authentication from the selected authentication vector.

Upon receipt the user proceeds as shown in the diagram opposite.

Retrieval of SQNUpon receipt of RAND and AUTN the USIM first computes the anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND)and retrieves the sequence number SQN = (SQN ⊕ AK) ⊕ AK.

Computation of X-MACNext the USIM computes XMAC = f1K (SQN || RAND || AMF) and compares this with MAC which isincluded in AUTN. If they are different, the user sends user authentication reject back to the VLR/SGSNwith an indication of the cause and the user abandons the procedure. In this case, VLR/SGSNshall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the HLR. VLR/SGSN may alsodecide to initiate a new identification and authentication procedure towards the user.

Verification of SQNNext the USIM verifies that the received sequence number SQN is in the correct range.

If the USIM considers the sequence number to be not in the correct range, it sends synchronisationfailure back to the VLR/SGSN including an appropriate parameter, and abandons the procedure.

If the sequence number is considered to be in the correct range however, the USIM computes RES =f2K (RAND) and includes this parameter in a user authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN.

Computation of CK and IKFinally the USIM computes the cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) and the integrity key IK = f4K (RAND).USIM shall store original CK, IK until the next successful execution of AKA.

User Authentication ResponseUpon receipt of user authentication response the VLR/SGSN compares RES with the expectedresponse XRES from the selected authentication vector. If XRES equals RES then theauthentication of the user has passed. The VLR/SGSN also selects the appropriate cipherkey CK and integrity key IK from the selected authentication vector.

If XRES and RES are different, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Reportprocedure towards the. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identificationand authentication procedure towards the user.



Pub-Date

USIM Authentication Function Version 1 Rev 0

USIM Authentication Function

f1

SQN AK

RAND

K

Verify MAC = XMAC

Verify that SQN is in the correct range

XMAC RES CK IK

AK

f2 f3 f4

f5

AUTN

SQN

AMF MAC

(USIM)



3-23

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Access Link Data Integrity

Access Link Data IntegrityMost control signalling information elements that are sent between the UEand the network areconsidered sensitive and must be integrity protected. A message authentication function shall beapplied on these signalling information elements transmitted between the UE and the RNC.

Data integrity protection methodThe diagram opposite illustrates the use of the integrity algorithm f9 to authenticate the dataintegrity of a signalling message. Based on the input parameters the user computes messageauthentication code for data integrity MAC-I using the integrity algorithm f9. The MAC-I is thenappended to the message when sent over the radio access link. The receiver computes XMAC-Ion the message received in the same way as the sender computed MAC-I on the message sentand verifies the data integrity of the message by comparing it to the received MAC-I.

Input parameters to the integrity algorithm

COUNT-I

The integrity sequence number COUNT-I is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-I value per logicalsignalling channel. COUNT-I is derived from a count of the number of RRC SDUs send/received.

IK

The integrity key IK is 128 bits long. There may be one IK for CS connections (IKCS)and one IK for PS connections (IKPS). IK is established during UMTS AKA as theoutput of the integrity key derivation function f4.

FRESH

The network-side generated FRESH message is 32 bits long. There is one FRESH parametervalue per user. The input parameter FRESH protects the network against replay of signallingmessages by the user. At connection set-up the RNC generates a random value FRESH andsends it to the user in the (RRC) security mode command. The value FRESH is subsequentlyused by both the network and the user throughout the duration of a single connection. Thismechanism assures the network that the user is not replaying any old MAC-Is.

DIRECTION

The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid theuse of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of theDIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE.

MESSAGE

The signalling message itself with the radio bearer identity. The latter is appended in frontof the message. Note that the radio bearer identity is not transmitted with the messagebut it is needed to avoid the circumstance where for different instances of messageauthentication codes the same set of input parameters is used.



Pub-Date

Access Link Data Integrity Version 1 Rev 0

Access Link Data Integrity

COUNT-I

MESSAGE

DIRECTION

FRESH

f9

MAC-I

SenderUE or RNC

COUNT-I

MESSAGE

DIRECTION

FRESH

f9

XMAC-I

ReceiverRNC or UE

IK IK



3-25

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

Ciphering of User/Signalling DataUser data and some signalling information elements are considered sensitive and must be confidentialityprotected. To ensure identity confidentiality the temporary user identity (P-)TMSI must be transferred ina protected mode at allocation time and at other times when the signalling procedures permit it.

These needs for a protected mode of transmission are fulfilled by a confidentiality functionwhich is applied on dedicated channels between the UE and the RNC.

The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the ciphering algorithm f8 to encrypt plaintext byapplying a keystream using a bit per bit binary addition of the plaintext and the ciphertext.The plaintext may be recovered by generating the same keystream using the same inputparameters and applying a bit per bit binary addition with the ciphertext.

Input parameters to the cipher algorithm

COUNT-C

The integrity sequence number COUNT-C is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-C value per logicalsignalling channel. COUNT-C is derived from a count of the number of RLC/MAC SDUs send/received.

CK

The Cipher key CK is 128 bits long. There may be one CK for CS connections (CKCS)and one CK for PS connections (CKPS). CK is established during UMTS AKA as theoutput of the integrity key derivation function f3.

BEARER

The radio bearer identifier BEARER is 5 bits long.

There is one BEARER parameter per radio bearer associated with the same user and multiplexedon a single 10ms physical layer frame. The radio bearer identifier is input to avoid the conditionwhere for different keystream an identical set of input parameter values is used.

DIRECTION

The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid theuse of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of theDIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE.

LENGTH

The length indicator LENGTH is 16 bits long. The length indicator determines thelength of the required keystream block. LENGTH shall affect only the length of theKEYSTREAM BLOCK, not the actual bits in it.



Pub-Date

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data Version 1 Rev 0

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

SenderUE or RNC

ReceiverRNC or UE

COUNT-C

BEARER

DIRECTION

LENGTH

f8CK

COUNT-C

BEARER

DIRECTION

LENGTH

f8CK

KEYSTREAMBLOCK

PLAINTEXTBLOCK

KEYSTREAMBLOCK

CYPHERTEXTBLOCK



3-27

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering of User/Signalling Data




Pub-Date

W-CDMA Theory Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 4

W-CDMA Theory



4-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 W-CDMA Theory




Pub-Date



• Describe various options for multiple access schemes.• State the Characteristics of UMTS W-CDMA.• State why W-CDMA has been chosen for the UMTS multiple access scheme.• Describe W-CDMA spreading and despreading procedures.• Describe the use of orthagonal codes and the channelisation code tree.• Describe the scrambling and summation process.• Describe the effects of multi-path radio channels and the purpose of the RAKE receiver.



4-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Multiple Access Schemes

Multiple Access SchemesThere are 3 forms of multiple access schemes, frequency, time and code. The major issuewith the first two is the requirement to have guard bands.

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)FDMA divides radio channels into a range of radio frequencies and is used in the traditional analoguesystem. With FDMA, only one subscriber is assigned to a channel at one time. Other subscriberscannot access this channel until the original call is terminated or handed off to a different channel.

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)TDMA is a common multiple access technique employed in digital cellular systems. It dividesradio channels into time slots to obtain higher capacity. As with FDMA, no other conversationscan access an occupied channel until that channel is vacated.

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)CDMA assigns each subscriber a unique code to put multiple users on the same channelat the same time. CDMA users can share the same frequency channel because theirconversations are distinguished only by digital code.



Pub-Date

Multiple Access Schemes Version 1 Rev 0

Multiple Access Schemes

CDMA

TDMA

Frequency

Power

FDMA

Frequency

Power

Codes Time

Time

Time

Frequency



4-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 W-CDMA Characteristics

W-CDMA CharacteristicsThe vital statistics for our W-CDMA UMTS system is shown opposite. Don’t be confusedby the slots and frames, this is not a TDMA system, every user does share the same band.The frames and slots are used for interleaving, power control.

The major points are:

FDD requires paired frequencies for up and down channels.

The chip rate of 3.84 Mcps provides a bandwidth of 5 MHz. A chip is the originalsignal split or chipped by the spreading code.

The carrier spacing of 200 kHz is used to allow re-farming of GSM frequencieswhich have been set at 200 kHz spacing.

The frame length is set at 10 ms. Each frame is split into 15 timeslots, each timeslotcontains user data, power control and signalling data.

The UMTS system does not require synchronisation due to the framing structure anduse of matched filters for the framing alignment.

The spreading factor is the ratio between the user data and the chip rate. As the userdata increases this factor will vary between 4 and 512. The spreading factor is a roughindication of the number of users in the system.

The user data rates available in the FDD system is up to 384 Kbps.



Pub-Date

W-CDMA Characteristics Version 1 Rev 0

W-CDMA Characteristics

Multiple Access Scheme

Duplexing Method

Chip Rate

Bandwidth

Carrier Spacing

Frame Length

Slots per Frame

Inter-cell Synchronization

Spreading Factor

User Data Rate

CDMA

FDD

3.84 Mcps

5 MHz

200 kHz Raster

10 ms

15

None

Variable (4-512)

3-384 Kbps



4-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Re-Use of Frequency

Re-Use of FrequencyMobile telephones and cell broadcast networks use cellular radio, a technique developed inrecent years to enable the use of mobile telephones. It would be impossible to provide eachphone with an individual radio frequency, so the idea of cellular radio evolved.

A region is divided into geographical areas called cells, varying in size depending on the number ofusers in the area. In cities cells are small whereas in rural areas cells are much larger.

In GSM cells use a set of frequencies that are different from any neighbouring cell, but canbe the same as another cell as long as it is far enough away.

For UMTS, a frequency re-use of one, may be employed. This means that all cells within a givengeographical area, or even an entire network may use the same carrier frequency.

An alternate method of discriminating between neighbouring cells must therefore be found.



Pub-Date

Re-Use of Frequency Version 1 Rev 0

Re-Use of Frequency

1

2

5

3

7

41 6

2

5

3

7

4

1 6

2

5

3

7

4

1 6

2

5

3

7

4

16

2

5

3

7

41 6

2

3

4

1

2

5

74

6

3



4-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Re-Use of Codes

Re-Use of CodesCodes are used to uniquely identify a cell in the network. Frequency planning is more or less a thing of thepast but code planning will have to be implemented. Code planning will be much easier then frequencyplanning since we have 512 Codes to play with, the code re-use pattern will thus be extremely large.

Codes can be reused when the separation between cells containing the same channel set is farenough apart so that co-channel interference can be kept below acceptable levels. The number ofcells in a cluster is 512, which provides greater separation between co-channel cells than GSM.



Pub-Date

Re-Use of Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Re-Use of Codes

14 6

1615

13

741 27

2830

3129

36 37

225

35

3234

23 39

2018

38

2221

17 19

1110

12

247 4

1

6

5

41

245

3340

26



4-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)The Slide opposite shows how spectrally efficient UMTS and GSM is in comparison toeach other when employed in a multi-cellular structure.

The capacity, which Shannon derived in 1947, provided a Law, which we now call Shannons Law.This details the digital capacity of the link given the transmit power and the bandwidth.

If we are using, FDMA, TDMA or CDMA, the capacity is still controlled by this law. However,some gains are made by technology and coding methods.



Pub-Date

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS) Version 1 Rev 0

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)

7 x 200 kHz = 1.4 MHz

1 Call = 25 kHz

8 Calls = 200 kHz Carrier

1 Call = 25 kHz

GSM

7 Cells, 5 MHz

1 Call = 2.8 kHz

256 Calls = 5 MHz Carrier

1 Call = 19.4 kHz

UMTS



4-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

TransmitterThe digital modulator will take digital speech/data and multiply it with the spreading code.

The radio modulator moves the baseline signal from the digital modulator ontoa 2GHz carrier to produce the W-CDMA output.

ReceiverThe modulated carrier is moved by the radio demodulator to the digital demodulator whichcan be very complicated due to the large number of users.

Here the input is multiplied by the de-spreading codes to produce digital speech.



Pub-Date

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation Version 1 Rev 0

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Single User Channel

5 MHz

Multiple User Channel

5 MHz

Multiple User Channel

5 MHz

Output

0

0

Input External Interference

RadioModulator

DigitalSignal

DigitalSignal

SpreadingCode

Generator

DigitalModulator

DigitalModulator

RadioModulator C

ombiner

Splitter

DigitalSignal

DigitalSignal

DigitalDemodulator

RadioDemodulator

RadioDemodulator

DigitalDemodulator

t0

RxRadioCarrier

RadioCarrier

Tx

W-CDMAModulated Carrier

SpreadingCode

Generator



4-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Spreading

SpreadingThe spreading operation is the multiplication of each user data bit with a "Spreading Code" , whichis a pre-defined bit pattern. To discriminate between User data "bits" and spreading code "bits", thesymbols in the spreading code are referred to as "Chips". The chip rate for UMTS is fixed at 3.84 Mcps.After the spreading operation each "Bit" of the data signal is represented by a number of "chips".

The number of chips representing each bit is referred to as the Spreading Factor (SF) and isgiven by dividing the chip rate by the source signal bit rate; in this example:

3.84

Mcs / 480 kbps = (SF=8)

The spreading operation has resulted in an increase of the "signalling rate of the user data, in this caseby a factor of 8, and corresponds to a widening of the "spectrum" occupied by the user data signal.Due to this, CDMA systems are more generically referred to as "Spread Spectrum" systems.

The SF is also referred to as the Processing Gain (PG), which is expressed as a Decibel ratio anddescribes the gain or amplitude increase that will be applied to the signal at the receiving station as aresult of the de-spreading operation. This concept is described in more detail later in this chapter



Pub-Date

Spreading Version 1 Rev 0

Spreading

Data 480 kB/s

Spreading

Code 3.84 Mcs

Spread

Data

1–1

1–1

1–1



4-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 De-spreading

De-spreadingDe-spreading is performed at the receiving station (UE or Node B) by multiplying the chip rate,spread user data signal by a chip rate spreading code. By using the same spreading codeas used at the transmitting station for the spreading operation, the multiplication of the twochip rate signals will reproduce the original bit rate user data signal.

To aid accurate recovery of the user data, a Correlation Receiver is employed in most CDMAsystems. The correlation receiver integrates the product of the de-spreading process on achip-by-chip basis. In the upper diagram opposite, the example shown illustrated that for a perfectlyreceived de-spread signal, the correlation receiver output has effectively "Lifted" the amplitudeof the received signal by a factor of 8, a function of the processing gain.



Pub-Date

De-spreading Version 1 Rev 0

De-spreading

Spread

Data

Spreading

Code

Correlation

RX Integrator

O/P

Recovered

Data

1–1

1–1

1–1



4-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Orthogonal Codes

Orthogonal CodesTransmissions from a single source are separated by channelisation codes. The channelisation codesof UTRA are based upon the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) technique.

There are a finite number of OVSF codes available, and some restrictions in their use.

OVSF codes are, as their name implies, orthogonal codes. Orthogonal codes possess goodcross correlation properties allowing easy discrimination between signals produced using correctlyselected codes. For OVSF the cross correlation between codes is zero, meaning interferersignals between different codes is effectively "zero" after correlation.

Channelisation Code TreeFor separating channels from the same source, channelisation codes called OrthogonalVariable Spreading Factors are used.

The lines in the diagram represent codes, these are Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF)codes, allowing to mix in the same timeslot channels with different spreading factors while preservingthe orthogonality. The OVSF codes can be defined using the code tree shown opposite.

Each level in the code tree defines a Spreading Factor (SF) indicated in the figure. All codes withinthe code tree cannot be used simultaneously in a given timeslot. A code can be used in a timeslotif and only no other code on the path from the specific code to the root of the tree or in the sub-treeopposite the specific code is used in this timeslot. This means that the number of available codes in aslot is not fixed but depends on the rate and spreading factor of each physical channel.

The spreading codes can be used to identify individual channels, but a mobile usually has to identifythe base station that it is currently parented on. A long code is usually used for that.



Pub-Date

Orthogonal Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Orthogonal CodesChannelisation Code Tree

(1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1, 1, -1)

Cch, 8, 7

Cch, 8, 6

(1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1, 1)

(1, -1, 1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1)

Cch, 8, 5

Cch, 8, 4

(1, -1, 1,- 1, 1, -1, 1, -1)

(1, 1, -1, -1,- 1, -1, 1, 1)

Cch, 8, 3

Cch, 8, 2

(1, 1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1)

(1, 1, 1, 1, -1, -1, -1, -1)

Cch, 8, 1

Cch, 8, 0(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1)Cch, 4, 0

Cch, 4, 1

Cch, 4, 2

Cch, 4, 3

(1, 1, 1, 1)

(1, 1, -1, -1)

(1, -1, 1, -1)

(1, -1, -1, 1)

Cch, 2, 0

Cch, 2, 1

(1, 1)

(1, -1)

Cch, 1, 0

(1)

SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4 SF = 8



4-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 De-spreading Other Users Signals

De-spreading Other Users SignalsIt must be remembered that in a CDMA system, all users are potentially transmittingon the same frequency. This means that at any given receiver station, in addition tothe desired signal, multiple interferer signals will also be received. It is the task of thecorrelation receiver to reject these interferer signals.

The diagram opposite shows the effect of de-spreading and correlation at a given receivingstation (e.g UE "A"), on an interferer signal, (e.g a signal transmitted on the same carrier forreception by UE "B"). The de-spreading/correlation of the interferer signal will result in a crosscorrelation of zero (i.e. the output of the integration process will be zero). This process is onlytrue when correctly selected orthogonal spreading codes are employed.



Pub-Date

De-spreading Other Users Signals Version 1 Rev 0

De-spreading Other Users SignalsData for UE B

Spreading Codefor UE B

Spread Datafor UE B

Spread Codefor UE A

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

Recovered Dataat UE A

Correlation RXIntegrator O/Pat UE A



4-23

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Processing Gain

Processing GainProcessing Gain can be defined as the Chip Rate divided by the bit rate. This gives a ratiothat can be converted to decibels by using the following formula.

PG = 10 x log SF

The gain that we get from the Processing Gain is an extremely important part of CDMA. It is in factbecause of this relationship that CDMA is so effective and is used even in space transmissions.Processing gain will determine how much the received signal can be lifted out of the noise floor.

There is one simple rule to follow, the higher the SF the higher the processing gain will be, thelower the SF the lower the processing gain. As we know, the SF is also inversely proportional tothe speed of the transmission. This means that the higher the speed of transmission the lowerthe processing gain will be. Due to this relationship the power output must be increased for anytransmitter if the transmission rate is increased due to the loss in Processing Gain.

This will also mean that if the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) is increased on thereceiver side the power must be increased or the transmission rate must drop onthe transmitter side to meet the FER requirement.



Pub-Date

Processing Gain Version 1 Rev 0

Processing Gain

PG = 10 x log (Chip Rate/Bit Rate)

or

PG = 10 x log (SF)



4-25

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 1 - Spreading

Exercise 1 - SpreadingThis Exercise demonstrates the Modulo-2 Addition, Spreading Factor usage, Code Lengthsand in general will give the student a feel for the Spreading Principle.

NOTES____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________



Pub-Date

Exercise 1 - Spreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 1 - Spreading

Spreading

De-spreading

C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF = 4

PG = 4 (ratio)PG = 6 dB

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1



4-27

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading

Exercise 2 - Spreading/DespreadingTo gain some experience in Spreading the student can complete the following exercise.The student can complete the despreading part of the exercise and then calculate theSF and PG. See if it matches with the answers provided.

Note the irregular structure in the answer.

NOTES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________



Pub-Date

Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading

C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF = 4

PG = 4 (ratio)PG = 6 dB

Spreading

De-spreading

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

WrongSpreading Code

De-spread DataWrong Code

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1



4-29

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading

Exercise 3 - Spreading/DespreadingIn this exercise the student must complete the following:

1. Determine the SF used?2. Do the spreading part of the exercise?3. Do the despreading part of the exercise using the right code?4. Do the despreading part of the exercise using the wrong code?5. Complete the calculation?

NOTES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________



Pub-Date

Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading

C/I =

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF =

PG = PG =

Spreading

De-spreading

-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

WrongSpreading Code

De-spread DataWrong Code

1



4-31

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling

ScramblingAs previously described, OVSF spreading codes can be used to separate individual users on acommon RF carrier freq. However, because of the need to maintain orthogonality of codes, the numberof codes available is very limited (512 Downlink, 256 Uplink). These 512 code must be reused in everycell, as such they do not become unique to a cell and users located at the boundaries of cells, wouldreceive transmissions using the same OVSF code, from more than one cell. For UMTS therefore,OVSF codes are used only as channelisation codes, used identify individual physical channels. Afurther coding, process, known as a "Scrambling" is performed, in order to discriminate betweenthe transmissions between different cells on the downlink and different UEs on the uplink.

Each physical channel is first individually spread to chip rate using a channelisation code (Cch sf,k) takenfrom the OVSF code tree, resulting in an increase in bandwidth of the signal form "Bit Rate" to "Chip Rate"

The Sequence of chips produced by the channelisation process is then "Scrambled", usinga chip-to-chip multiplication with a complex-valued scrambling code (Csc). The codechosen is used to identify the source of the signal. As scrambling is performed on top ofspreading, it has no further effect on the bandwidth of the signal.

Although the primary purpose of using a scrambling code is to identify all channels from a singlesource, that single source may use more than scrambling code. For example, in the downlink, a cellmay transmit using one of 16 possible scrambling codes. After scrambling, all physical channels arethen combined, using complex addition, before being forwarded to the RF Modulator for transmission.



Pub-Date

Scrambling Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling

Cch SF,x Csc,x

Cch SF,x Csc, x

Cch SF,x Csc,x

Channel x Data

Channel y Data

Channel z Data

Σ



4-33

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton CodesThe Slide shows the major differences between Scrambling Codes (SC) and Channelisation Codes (CC).



Pub-Date

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

CC SC

Usage Uplink

Length Uplink

Number of Codesavailable

Code Family

Spreading

Separation of Data & Control Channels(from the same UE)

Separation of channels to different UEs

Separation of UEs

Separation of CellsUsage Downlink

Length Downlink 4 - 512 Chips

No effect on Bandwidth

LC=10ms = Gold CodeSC = Extended S2 Family

Uplink = 2 – 1 = 16,777,215

LC =38400 Chips

LC - 10ms=38400 Chips orSC = 66.7us = 256 Chips

Increases Tx Bandwidth

512 Uplink and Downlink

OVSF

4 - 256 Chips

24

Downlink = 2 – 1 = 262,143(truncated to 8,192)

18



4-35

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling and Summation

Scrambling and SummationThe diagram opposite illustrates the process of scrambling and summation of multiple channels,prior to modulation onto the RF carrier and transmission over the UMTS air interface (Uu).

For the purposes of this example, three separate data streams (Channels X, Y and Z),each carrying a user bit sequence of "1,0,0,1", have been spread using channelisationcodes of Cch 8,1 , Cch 8,2 and Cch 8,3 respectively.

The spread signals are then independently scrambled using a single scrambling code. Theresultant chip sequences are then combined using complex addition, to produce the multi leveldigital baseband signal, that will be used to modulate the RF carrier.



Pub-Date

Scrambling and Summation Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling and Summation

Spread DataChannel X Cch 8,1

Spread DataChannel Y Cch 8,2

Spread DataChannel Z Cch 8,3

Scramblingcode

Channel X afterscrambling

Channel Y afterscrambling

Channel Z afterscrambling

Complex addedscrambled codes

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

+3+2+1-1-2-3



4-37

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

De-Scrambling and Data RecoveryThe diagram opposite illustrates the processes of de-scrambling of a complex scrambledsignal and the recovery of user data from one channel.

The input signal, (derived from the example on the preceding page) is first de-scrambledby multiplication with the specified scrambling code. The result is a combined version ofall received channels, represented by a complex chip sequence.

The dispreading process must now be performed to recover the user data. The exampleillustrates the recovery of the data for Channel "X" from the preceding page. By performinga direct multiplication of the complex signal with the appropriate channelisation code, theillustrated correlation receiver output will be obtained. As can be seen, the integrated outputindicates bit values of “1,0,0,1", the expected result for this example.



Pub-Date

De-Scrambling and Data Recovery Version 1 Rev 0

De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

ReceivedScrambled

ScramblingCode

De-scrambledSignal

Chan Code forChan Y (Cch8,2)

CorrelationOutput

+3+2+1-1-2-3

1-1

+3+2+1-1-2-3



4-39

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Multi-path Radio Channels

Multi-path Radio ChannelsRadio propagation for mobile communications suffers greatly from the effects of mulipath reflections,diffractions and attenuation of the signal energy. These effects are causes by objects such as buildings,hills, etc, resulting in "Multipath Propagation", which has two main effects upon the signal.

Inter-symbol InterferenceInter-symbol interference occurs when the signal energy from more than one radio path, pertaining to asingle symbol (or chip in the case of W-CDMA), such that the energy from the various paths overlaps.This results in the smearing of the signal, such that is hard to define where one chip starts and one chipends and the true value of the chips may be distorted. This problem can be resolved, providing the delaybetween the two paths is greater than one chip period (0.26µs at 3.84 Mcs). This equates to a pathlength difference of 78 m). Delays of 1 or 2 µs are typical in urban areas, with 20µs possible in hilly areas.

Signal FadeIn multi-path situations where path lengths are multiples of half a wavelength of the received frequency(7cm at 2GHz), the signals on two (or more) paths will arrive in anti-phase to each other. This resultsin cancellation of the signals, causing fast or Rayleigh fading. Such fading can result in signal leveldrops in the order of 20 to 30dB, making the reception of error free data bits very difficult.



Pub-Date

Multi-path Radio Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Multi-path Radio Channels



4-41

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Matched Filter Operation

Matched Filter OperationThe main task of the matched filter is to determine the timing reference of theinformation as it arrives at the receiver.

The filter will perform a chip-by-chip comparison of the received signal against a known"Pilot" reference, to identify multiple copies of the same chip pattern.

After several iterations of the multiple paths have been accumulated, the time dispersion betweenthe two paths can be calculated and tracked, allowing the paths to be separated.



Pub-Date

Matched Filter Operation Version 1 Rev 0

Matched Filter Operation

RFFront EndCircuitry

MatchedFilter

Slot WiseAccumulation



4-43

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 The Rake Receiver

The Rake ReceiverThe Rake receiver performs a similar (but not identical) function to the equaliser in GSM.Instead of training bits, the pilot signals (all zeros) are used as a basis for the search for thebest path. The rake receiver then constructs its fingers to track the other multi-path rays bystepping through delays one chip at a time until it finds another, lower level pilot. It can thenuse the weightings to bring the rays into phase and constructive addition. Note that the differentrays are uncorrelated if the delay difference is greater than one chip.

The effect of the propagation environment on spread spectrum modulated signals is to producea series of signal components that have traversed differing paths. This is known as multipathinterference and, depending on whether or not there is a significant specula multipath component,the envelope of the multipath signal may be Rician or Rayleigh distributed.

Multipath results in two signal perturbations, known as Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) and fading.Both introduce severe degradation in the system performance. ISI creates signal components thatare delayed into the next signal period, making these signals overlap and therefore interfere withone another. Fading is caused by signals of opposite phase cancelling in the receiver. To combatthis, a RAKE receiver may be used. This is the type of receiver shown in the figure and containsmany signal paths, each with an individual delay. These delays are changed so that the total delayfrom the transmitter for all paths is the same and thus when combined they are in-phase.



Pub-Date

The Rake Receiver Version 1 Rev 0

The Rake Receiver

t1

t2

t3

D0

D1

D2

D3

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k



4-45

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 The Rake Receiver




Pub-Date

The Physical Layer Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 5

The Physical Layer



5-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 The Physical Layer




Pub-Date



• Describe the procedures performed by the Air Interface Physical Layer• Describe the UMTS Channel Structure.

◦ Logical Channels

◦ Transport Channels

◦ Physical Channels

• Describe the Downlink and Uplink Flow Processes.



5-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Layer Services

Physical Layer ServicesThe Physical Layer (L1) will be the main discussion in this section since this iswhere most of the air interface tasks are performed.

The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these servicesis through the use of transport channels via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expectedto perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service.

• Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution.• Error detection on transport channels and indication to higher layers.• FEC encoding/decoding of transport channels.• Multiplexing of transport channels and demultiplexing of coded composite

transport channels (CCTrCHs).• Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels.• Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels.• Power weighting and combining of physical channels.• Modulation and spreading/demodulation and despreading of physical channels.• Frequency and time (chip, bit, slot, frame) synchronisation.• Radio characteristics measurements including FER, SIR, Interference Power,

etc., and indication to higher layers.• Inner - loop power control.• RF processing.

When network elements (UEs and network) provide compatible service bearers (for examplesupport a speech bearer) they should be assured of successful interworking. Moreover,different implementation options of the same (optional) feature would lead to incompatibilitybetween UE and network. Therefore, this shall be avoided.



Pub-Date

Physical Layer Services Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Layer Services

Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution.Error detection on transport channels.FEC encoding & decoding of transport channels.Mux & Demux of transport channels and CCTrCHs.Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels.Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels.Power weighting and combining of physical channels.Modulation demodulation and spreading of physical channels.Frequency and time synchronisation.Radio characteristics measurements.Inner - loop power control.RF processing.



5-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 QPSK

QPSKThe modulation scheme used in W-CDMA is quadrature phase shift keying (PSK) whichallows 2 bits to be sent per symbol (I and Q). The reason for using QPSK is that it isfairly resilient to amplitude variations. The major problem with CDMA is that all users areon the same frequency and thus interfering with each other.



Pub-Date

QPSK Version 1 Rev 0

QPSK

QPSK

(0,0)

I

QQ

2 bits per symbol

(0,1)

(1,0)(1,1)



5-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Structure of Transmission

Structure of TransmissionThe physical layer receives information, on a transport channel, as Transport Blocks (or TransportBlock sets) from Layer 2. This information will consist of User Plane or Control Plane streams.In addition the physical layer will generate Layer 1 control information, used to maintain the radiobearer between the UE and the UTRAN. This layer 1 control information must be transmittedon the physical channel along with the transport channel information.

As previously discussed, even when FDD mode is in use, a radio frame/timeslot structure isobserved. (A 10 ms radio frame is divided into 15 timeslots). Though it is important to notethat any given radio bearer is able to use all timeslots in every radio frame.

Downlink TransmissionOn the downlink each timeslot will contain transport channel information and Layer 1 controlinformation in time-multiplex. Each timeslot will contain fields supporting transport block information,interspersed with Layer 1 control fields. The exact structure of the fields is dependent upon thetype of physical channel in use, and is described in detail later in this chapter.

Uplink TransmissionOn the Uplink a time-multiplex structure is not practical as Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)is frequently employed. The combination of DTX and Time-multiplex would result in a "Bursty"transmission, which would generate audio band noise perceptible to the other party in a voice call.

To overcome this problem, the transport channel information and Layer 1 control informationare I/Q code multiplexed within each timeslot, allowing them to be transmitted in parallel.This make the transmission of Layer 1 control information continuous and hence preventsbursty transmission, even when DTX is applied.



Pub-Date

Structure of Transmission Version 1 Rev 0

Structure of Transmission

Q

I



5-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Channel Locations

Channel LocationsThe radio interface is the section of the network between the UE and the Network. This section ofthe network is where the biggest limitation lies at the moment, it is the most vulnerable section andtherefore very complex methods have to be invented in order to transmit the required data at the highspeeds that is demanded of today’s networks. The radio interface is composed of Layers 1, 2 and 3.

The slide opposite shows the UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physicallayer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces with the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layerof Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3.

The physical layer offers different Transport channels to MAC. A transport channel is characterizedby how the information is transferred over the radio interface.

MAC offers different Logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer2. The type of information transferred characterizes a logical channel.

Physical channels are defined in the physical layer. In FDD mode, physical channels are defined by aspecific carrier frequency, scrambling code, channelization code (optional), time start and stop (givingduration) and, on the uplink, relative phase (0 or π/[Symbol_ps2]). In the TDD mode the physicalchannels is also characterized by the timeslot. The physical layer is controlled by RRC.



Pub-Date

Channel Locations Version 1 Rev 0

Channel Locations

Layer 2

Layer 1

Logical Channels

Transport Channels

Physical Channels

MAC

Physical Layer

UE

RLCLayer 2



5-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Channels on the Air Interface

Channels on the Air InterfaceThe diagram opposite shows the most common channels used on the air interface. Thechannels are divided horizontally into the Physical Channels (PCHs), the Transport Channels(TCHs) and the Logical Channels (LCHs). Vertically they are divided into 2 channel types,the Dedicated Channels and the Common Channels. Dedicated Channels are dedicated toone UE only and Common Channels can be shared by multiple UEs.



Pub-Date

Channels on the Air Interface Version 1 Rev 0

Channels on the Air InterfaceDCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH

PTM

LogicalChannels

CCH

BCH PCH FACH RACH

DCHTransportChannels

PDCH PCCH

DPDCH DPCCH

P-CCPCH S-CCPCH PRACH SCH CPICH AICHPICH

P-SCH S-SCH Primary Secondary

PhysicalChannels



5-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Logical Channels

Logical ChannelsThe MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels. A set of logical channeltypes is defined for different kinds of data transfer services as offered by MAC. Each logicalchannel type is defined by what type of information is transferred.

A general classification of logical channels is into two groups:

• Control Channels (for the transfer of control plane information).• Traffic Channels (for the transfer of user plane information).

Control Channels

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)

A downlink channel for broadcasting system control information.

Paging Control Channel (PCCH)

A downlink channel that transfers paging information. This channel is used whenthe network does not know the location cell of the UE, or, the UE is in the cellconnected state (utilising UE sleep mode procedures).

Common Control Channel (CCCH)

Bi-directional channel for transmitting control information between network and UEs. This channelis commonly used by the UEs having no RRC connection with the network and by the UEs usingcommon transport channels when accessing a new cell after cell reselection.

Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH)

A point-to-point bi-directional channel that transmits dedicated control information between a UEand the network. This channel is established through RRC connection set-up procedure.

Traffic Channels

Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH)

A Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) is a point-to-point channel, dedicated to one UE, for thetransfer of user information. A DTCH can exist in both uplink and downlink.

Common Traffic Channel (CTCH)

A point-to-multipoint unidirectional channel for transfer of dedicated user informationfor all or a group of specified UEs.



Pub-Date

Logical Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Logical Channels

DCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH

Between MAC and RLC

U-RNTI PTM



5-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Transport Channels

Transport ChannelsThe physical layer offers information transfer services to MAC and higher layers. Thephysical layer transport services are described by how and with what characteristics datais transferred over the radio interface. An adequate term for this is ’Transport Channel’. Ageneral classification of transport channels is into two groups:

• Common transport channels (where there is a need for inband identification ofthe UEs when particular UEs are addressed.

• Dedicated transport channels (where the UEs are identified by the physical channel, i.e. codeand frequency for FDD and code, time slot and frequency for TDD).

Random Access Channel (RACH)A contention based uplink channel used for transmission of relatively small amounts of data,e.g. for initial access or non-real-time dedicated control or traffic data.

Forward Access Channel (FACH)Common downlink channel without closed-loop power control used for transmissionof relatively small amount of data.

Broadcast Channel (BCH)A downlink channel used for broadcast of system information into an entire cell.

Paging Channel (PCH)A downlink channel used for broadcast of control information into an entire cell allowing efficientUE sleep mode procedures. Currently identified information types are paging and notification.Another use could be UTRAN notification of change of BCCH information.

Dedicated Channel (DCH)A channel dedicated to one UE used in uplink or downlink.



Pub-Date

Transport Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Transport ChannelsBetween the Physical Layer and MAC

CCH

BCH PCH FACH RACHDCH



5-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Channels

Physical Channels

Common Physical Channels (CPCHs)

P-SCH ;S-SCH

Primary Synchronisation Channel; Secondary SynchronisationChannel

Synchronisation to the network

P-CCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel

Cell Information and Frequency info

S-CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel

Paging Information and Transfer of small amounts of user data. Downlinkonly.

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel

Initial message when UE wants to gain access to the network; Transfer ofsmall amounts of data; Uplink only

PICH Paging Indicator Channel

Provides UEs with efficient sleep mode operation

AICH Acquisition Indicator Channel

Acknowledges an effective request for access after preamble has beensend up

P-CPICH;S-CPICH

Primary Common Pilot Indicator Channel; Secondary Pilot IndicatorChannel

Helps with channel estimation and shows the attractiveness of the cell

DPDCH/DPCCH Dedicated Physical Channels

Uplink and downlink control and data information; Dedicated to a singleuser



Pub-Date

Physical Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Channels

PDCH PCCH

DPDCH DPCCH

P-CCPCH S-CCPCH PRACH SCH CPICH AICHPICH

P-SCH S-SCH Primary Secondary



5-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Channel Mapping

Channel MappingThe diagram opposite summarises the mapping of logical channels onto transportchannels, and transport channels onto physical channels.

The DCHs are coded and multiplexed, as described later in this chapter, and the resulting datastream is mapped sequentially (first-in-first-mapped) directly to the physical channel(s).

The mapping of BCH and FACH/PCH is equally straightforward, where the data stream after codingand interleaving is mapped sequentially to the Primary and Secondary CCPCH respectively. Notethat the BCCH logical channel can be mapped to both BCH and FACH, so as to be available to idlemode and connected mode UEs respectively. Also for the RACH, the coded and interleaved bits aresequentially mapped to the physical channel, in this case the message part of the PRACH.

Physical signalsPhysical signals are entities with the same basic on-air attributes as physical channels but do nothave transport channels or indicators mapped to them. Physical signals may be associated withphysical channels in order to support the function of physical channels. SCH, CPICH, and AICHare classified as physical signals and hence are not shown on the diagram opposite.



Pub-Date

Channel Mapping Version 1 Rev 0

Channel Mapping

CTCHCCCHBCCHPCCHDCCHDTCH

DCCHDTCH

CCCH

FACHBCHPCH DCH

PrimaryCCPCH

SecCCPCH

DPDCHDPCCH

DPDCHDPCCH

PRACH

DCHRACH

Uplink Downlink

PagingControlChannel

BroadcastControChannel

CommonControlChannel

CommonTrafficChannel

DedicatedControl ChannelDedicatedTraffic Channel



5-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Generic Frame Structure

Generic Frame StructureThe diagram opposite illustrates the generic frame structure, use to delimit the transferof units of information on the UMTS air interface.

Radio FrameAs previously outlined the basic unit of the air interface is the radio frame. A radio frame is defined as ’aprocessing duration which consists of 15 timeslots’. The length of a radio frame corresponds to 38,400chips." With a system chip rate of 3.84 Mcps being employed, a radio frame thus has a duration of 10 ms.

System FrameSeveral physical layer procedures (e.g. Paging and Random Access) span more than a singleframe. To accommodate these procedures, a system frame is defined. The frame within thesystem frame structure is identified by a System Frame Number (SFN), which is a 12 bitbinary number, thus a System Frame can consist of 4096 frames.

TimeslotEach radio frame consists of 15 timeslots. A slot duration consists of fields containing bits.The length of the slot always corresponds to 2560 chips. The time duration of a timeslot isapproximately 666 µs. The number of fields within each timeslot is dependent upon the physicalchannel in use. Similarly the number of bits which can be accommodate by a timeslot isdependent upon the spreading factor in use for that physical channel.



Pub-Date

Generic Frame Structure Version 1 Rev 0

Generic Frame Structure

Time Slot = 2560 chips

TS0 TS1 TSn

Frame1

Framen

TS13 TS14

Frame4094

Frame4095

10ms

666μs

SLOT

FRAME

SYSTEM FRAME

40.96 secs



5-23

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

Synchronisation Channel (SCH)The Synchronisation Channel (SCH) is a downlink signal used for cell search. The SCHconsists of two sub channels, the Primary and Secondary SCH. The 10 ms radio frames ofthe Primary and Secondary SCH are divided into 15 slots, each of length 2560 chips. Thediagram opposite illustrates the structure of the SCH radio frame.

The Primary SCHThe Primary SCH consists of a modulated code of length 256 chips, the PrimarySynchronisation Code (PSC) denoted cp in the diagram, transmitted once every slot.The PSC is the same for every cell in the system.

The Secondary SCHThe Secondary SCH consists of repeatedly transmitting a length 15 sequence of modulated codesof length 256 chips, the Secondary Synchronisation Codes (SSC), transmitted in parallel withthe Primary SCH. The SSC is denoted cs

i,k in the diagram, where i = 0, 1, …, 63 is the numberof the scrambling code group, and k = 0, 1, …, 14 is the slot number. Each SSC is chosenfrom a set of 16 different codes of length 256. This sequence on the Secondary SCH indicateswhich of the code groups the cell’s downlink scrambling code belongs to.

Modulation Symbol "a"The primary and secondary synchronization codes are modulated by the symbol a shownin the diagram, which indicates the presence/ absence of Space Time Transmit Diversity(STTD) encoding on the P-CCPCH and is given by the following table:

P-CCPCH STTD encoded a = +1

P-CCPCH not STTD encoded a = -1



Pub-Date

Synchronisation Channel (SCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

acp

acsi,0

acp

acsi,1

acp

acsi,2

acp

acsi,3

acp

acsi,14

Tslot = 2560 chips

256 chips

PrimarySCH

SecondarySCH

One 10ms SCH radio frame



5-25

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

Synchronisation (Cell Search) ProcedureDuring the cell search, the UE searches for a cell and determines the downlink scrambling code andframe synchronisation of that cell. The cell search is typically carried out in three steps:

Step 1: Slot synchronisationDuring the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the SCH’s primary synchronisationcode to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell. This is typically done with a single matched filter (orany similar device) matched to the primary synchronisation code which is common to all cells. Theslot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the matched filter output.

Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identificationDuring the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the SCH’s secondary synchronisationcode to find frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the cell found in the first step.This is done by correlating the received signal with all possible secondary synchronisation codesequences, and identifying the maximum correlation value. Since the cyclic shifts of the sequencesare unique the code group as well as the frame synchronisation is determined.

Step 3: Scrambling-code identificationDuring the third and last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primaryscrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified throughsymbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group identified inthe second step. After the primary scrambling code has been identified, the Primary CCPCHcan be detected, and the system and cell specific BCH information can be read.

If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for,steps 2 and 3 above can be simplified.



Pub-Date

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

Synchronisation

ScramblingCodeGroup

slot number

#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14

Group 0 1 1 2 8 9 10 15 8 10 16 2 7 15 7 16

Group 1 1 1 5 16 7 3 14 16 3 10 5 12 14 12 10

Group 2 1 2 1 15 5 5 12 16 6 11 2 16 11 15 12

Group 3 1 2 3 1 8 6 5 2 5 8 4 4 6 3 7

Group 4 1 2 16 6 6 11 15 5 12 1 15 12 16 11 2

Group 5 1 3 4 7 4 1 5 5 3 6 2 8 7 6 8

Group 6 1 4 11 3 4 10 9 2 11 2 10 12 12 9 3

Group 7 1 5 6 6 14 9 10 2 13 9 2 5 14 1 13

Group 8 1 6 10 10 4 11 7 13 16 11 13 6 4 1 16

Group 9 1 6 13 2 14 2 6 5 5 13 10 9 1 14 10

Group 10 1 7 8 5 7 2 4 3 8 3 2 6 6 4 5

Group 11 1 7 10 9 16 7 9 15 1 8 16 8 15 2 2

Group 12 1 8 12 9 9 4 13 16 5 1 13 5 12 4 8

Group 13 1 8 14 10 14 1 15 15 8 5 11 4 10 5 4

Group 14 1 9 2 15 15 16 10 7 8 1 10 8 2 16 9

Group 15 1 9 15 6 16 2 13 14 10 11 7 4 5 12 3

Group 16 1 10 9 11 15 7 6 4 16 5 2 12 13 3 14

Group 17 1 11 14 4 13 2 9 10 12 16 8 5 3 15 6

Group 18 1 12 12 13 14 7 2 8 14 2 1 13 11 8 11

Group 19 1 12 15 5 4 14 3 16 7 8 6 2 10 11 13

Group 20 1 15 4 3 7 6 10 13 12 5 14 16 8 2 11

Group 21 1 16 3 12 11 9 13 5 8 2 14 7 4 10 15

Group 22 2 2 5 10 16 11 3 10 11 8 5 13 3 13 8

Group 23 2 2 12 3 15 5 8 3 5 14 12 9 8 9 14

Group 24 2 3 6 16 12 16 3 13 13 6 7 9 2 12 7

Group 25 2 3 8 2 9 15 14 3 14 9 5 5 15 8 12

Group 26 2 4 7 9 5 4 9 11 2 14 5 14 11 16 16

Group 27 2 4 13 12 12 7 15 10 5 2 15 5 13 7 4

Group 28 2 5 9 9 3 12 8 14 15 12 14 5 3 2 15

Group 29 2 5 11 7 2 11 9 4 16 7 16 9 14 14 4

Group 30 2 6 2 13 3 3 12 9 7 16 6 9 16 13 12

Group 31 2 6 9 7 7 16 13 3 12 2 13 12 9 16 6

Group 32 2 7 12 15 2 12 4 10 13 15 13 4 5 5 10



5-27

Pub-Date


Synchronisation (Cell Search) ProcedureScramblingCode

Groupslot number

#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14

Group 33 2 7 14 16 5 9 2 9 16 11 11 5 7 4 14

Group 34 2 8 5 12 5 2 14 14 8 15 3 9 12 15 9

Group 35 2 9 13 4 2 13 8 11 6 4 6 8 15 15 11

Group 36 2 10 3 2 13 16 8 10 8 13 11 11 16 3 5

Group 37 2 11 15 3 11 6 14 10 15 10 6 7 7 14 3

Group 38 2 16 4 5 16 14 7 11 4 11 14 9 9 7 5

Group 39 3 3 4 6 11 12 13 6 12 14 4 5 13 5 14

Group 40 3 3 6 5 16 9 15 5 9 10 6 4 15 4 10

Group 41 3 4 5 14 4 6 12 13 5 13 6 11 11 12 14

Group 42 3 4 9 16 10 4 16 15 3 5 10 5 15 6 6

Group 43 3 4 16 10 5 10 4 9 9 16 15 6 3 5 15

Group 44 3 5 12 11 14 5 11 13 3 6 14 6 13 4 4

Group 45 3 6 4 10 6 5 9 15 4 15 5 16 16 9 10

Group 46 3 7 8 8 16 11 12 4 15 11 4 7 16 3 15

Group 47 3 7 16 11 4 15 3 15 11 12 12 4 7 8 16

Group 48 3 8 7 15 4 8 15 12 3 16 4 16 12 11 11

Group 49 3 8 15 4 16 4 8 7 7 15 12 11 3 16 12

Group 50 3 10 10 15 16 5 4 6 16 4 3 15 9 6 9

Group 51 3 13 11 5 4 12 4 11 6 6 5 3 14 13 12

Group 52 3 14 7 9 14 10 13 8 7 8 10 4 4 13 9

Group 53 5 5 8 14 16 13 6 14 13 7 8 15 6 15 7

Group 54 5 6 11 7 10 8 5 8 7 12 12 10 6 9 11

Group 55 5 6 13 8 13 5 7 7 6 16 14 15 8 16 15

Group 56 5 7 9 10 7 11 6 12 9 12 11 8 8 6 10

Group 57 5 9 6 8 10 9 8 12 5 11 10 11 12 7 7

Group 58 5 10 10 12 8 11 9 7 8 9 5 12 6 7 6

Group 59 5 10 12 6 5 12 8 9 7 6 7 8 11 11 9

Group 60 5 13 15 15 14 8 6 7 16 8 7 13 14 5 16

Group 61 9 10 13 10 11 15 15 9 16 12 14 13 16 14 11

Group 62 9 11 12 15 12 9 13 13 11 14 10 16 15 14 16

Group 63 9 12 10 15 13 14 9 14 15 11 11 13 12 16 10



Pub-Date





5-29

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)The CPICH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channel that carries a pre-definedbit/symbol sequence. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the CPICH.

In case transmit diversity (open or closed loop) is used on any downlink channel in thecell, the CPICH shall be transmitted from both antennas using the same channelization andscrambling code. In this case, the pre-defined symbol sequence of the CPICH is different forAntenna 1 and Antenna 2, see lower diagram opposite. In case of no transmit diversity, thesymbol sequence of Antenna 1 in the lower diagram opposite is used.

There are two types of Common pilot channels, the Primary and Secondary CPICH. Theydiffer in their use and the limitations placed on their physical features.

Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)The Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) has the following characteristics:

• The same channelization code is always used for the P-CPICH (SF=256,0).• The P-CPICH is scrambled by the primary scrambling code.• There is one and only one P-CPICH per cell.• The P-CPICH is broadcast over the entire cell.

The Primary CPICH is the phase reference for the following downlink channels:SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH. The Primary CPICH is also the default phasereference for all other downlink physical channels.

Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)A Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) has the following characteristics:

An arbitrary channelization code of SF=256 is used for the S-CPICH.

A S-CPICH is scrambled by either the primary or a secondary scrambling code.

There may be zero, one, or several S-CPICH per cell.

A S-CPICH may be transmitted over the entire cell or only over a part of the cell.

A Secondary CPICH may be the reference for the Secondary CCPCH and the downlink DPCH.If this is the case, the UE is informed about this by higher-layer signalling.



Pub-Date

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) Version 1 Rev 0

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)Frame Structure

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Antenna 1

Antenna 2 -A -A -A A -A -A A -A A A-A -A AA-A -A A A -A -A A A -A

slot #14 slot #0 slot #1

Frame#iFrame Boundary

Frame#i+1

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

Pre-dened symbol sequence

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits = 10 symbols

1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms

Modulation Pattern for Common Pilot Channel



5-31

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 P-CCPCH Frame Structure

P-CCPCH Frame StructureThe Primary CCPCH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channels used to carry the BCH.

The frame structure of the Primary CCPCH is illustrated opposite.

The frame structure differs from the downlink DPCH in that no Transmit Power Control(TPC) commands, no Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) and no pilot bits aretransmitted The Primary CCPCH is not transmitted during the first 256 chips of each slot.Instead, Primary SCH and Secondary SCH are transmitted during this period.



Pub-Date

P-CCPCH Frame Structure Version 1 Rev 0

P-CCPCH Frame Structure


Data18 bits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits

Tf = 10ms

(Tx OFF)

256 chips



5-33

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 SCH and P-CCPCH

SCH and P-CCPCHThe diagram opposite shows the construction of the SCH and the P-CCPCH. It is thus clearthat different channels can be multiplexed onto one link. The structure of these 2 PhysicalChannels are very important to the synchronization process.



Pub-Date

SCH and P-CCPCH Version 1 Rev 0

SCH and P-CCPCH

Frame 0

Data on P-CCPCH

SCH

Frame 1

Data on P-CCPCH Data on P-CCPCH

Frame 2

SCHSCH



5-35

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

PICH Channel Structure.The Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channelused to carry the Paging Indicators (PI). The PICH is always associated with aS-CCPCH to which a PCH transport channel is mapped.



Pub-Date

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) Version 1 Rev 0


One radio frame (10ms)

288 bits for paging indication

b0

12 bits (transmission off)

b1 b287b288 b299



5-37

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)


Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICHThe PICH Channel is used to alert the mobile that a possible paging message will be broadcast toit on the PCH channel. Each mobile will calculate a paging occasion, which it listens to for suchan alert. In order to save on UE battery life the time between monitoring the paging occasions canbe altered, also the number of paging indicators per frame that carry the alerts may be configured.These settings are all broadcast in the cell system information messages.

The main parameters that determine the time between the UE monitoringits paging indicator are as follows:

DRX Cycle length.

The DRX Cycle Length is made up of a number of system Frames (each 10ms duration). It is thisperiod that determines how long the mobile is actually in DRX mode thus conserving battery power.The cycle is repeated continuously and the UE must only become active once during each cycle.The duration of the cycle is variable and maybe altered to suit network conditions.

Paging Occasion.

The Paging Occasion determines the frame number the UE becomes active in, during the DRX Cycle.

Paging Indicator.

The Paging Indicator is repeated multiple times per system frame. The UE calculates whichpaging indicator to listen to using network-determined parameters.

The mobile listens to the system information messages to obtain the parameters required for receivingpaging indicators in the selected cell. It then performs a standard calculation using the cell parametersand its IMSI. The result of this calculation is a single paging indicator during the DRX cycle time. Inother words the mobile must power up and listen to the calculated paging indicator (now know asits paging occasion) between a repetition period of 80ms to 5.12s (DRX Cycle Period).

The diagram opposite illustrates the frame structure of the PICH.



Pub-Date

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) Version 1 Rev 0


Frame. 10s

DRX Cycle, 80s to 5.12s

Paging Indicators 18,36,72 or 144 per 10msecs PICH Frame.

Calculated Paging OccasionUE is in DRX until this Paging Indicator



5-39

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)The Secondary CCPCH is used to carry the FACH and PCH. There are two types of SecondaryCCPCH: those that include TFCI and those that do not include TFCI. It is the UTRAN thatdetermines if a TFCI should be transmitted, hence making it mandatory for all UEs to support theuse of TFCI. The set of possible rates for the Secondary CCPCH is the same as for the downlinkDPCH. The frame structure of the Secondary CCPCH is shown opposite.

The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink Secondary CCPCHslot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 256/2k. The spreading factorrange is from 256 down to 4. The values for the number of bits per field are given in the table opposite.The channel bit and symbol rates given in the table are the rates immediately before spreading.

The FACH and PCH can be mapped to the same or to separate Secondary CCPCHs. If FACH andPCH are mapped to the same Secondary CCPCH, they can be mapped to the same frame.

The main difference between a CCPCH and a downlink dedicated physical channelis that a CCPCH is not inner-loop power controlled.

The main difference between the Primary and Secondary CCPCH is that the transport channelmapped to the Primary CCPCH (BCH) can only have a fixed predefined transport formatcombination, while the Secondary CCPCH support multiple transport format combinations usingTFCI. Furthermore, a Primary CCPCH is transmitted over the entire cell while a SecondaryCCPCH may be transmitted in a narrow lobe in the same way as a dedicated physicalchannel (only valid for a Secondary CCPCH carrying the FACH).

For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certaintransport format combination of the FACHs and/or PCHs currently in use. This correspondenceis (re-)negotiated at each FACH/PCH addition/removal.



Pub-Date

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)


DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2kbits (k = 0..6)

1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms

Secondary CCPCH Fields

SlotFormat

#i

ChannelBit Rate(kbps)

ChannelSymbol Rate

(ksps)

SF Bits/Frame

Bits/Slot

Ndata Npilot NTFCI

0 30 15 256 300 20 20 0 0

1 30 15 256 300 20 12 8 0

2 30 15 256 300 20 18 0 2

3 30 15 256 300 20 10 8 2

4 60 30 128 600 40 40 0 0

5 60 30 128 600 40 32 8 0

6 60 30 128 600 40 38 0 2

7 60 30 128 600 40 30 8 2

8 120 60 64 1200 80 72 0 8*

9 120 60 64 1200 80 64 8 8*

10 240 120 32 2400 160 152 0 8*

11 240 120 32 2400 160 144 8 8*

12 480 240 16 4800 320 312 0 8*

13 480 240 16 4800 320 296 16 8*

14 960 480 8 9600 640 632 0 8*

15 960 480 8 9600 640 616 16 8*

16 1920 960 4 19200 1280 1272 0 8*

17 1920 960 4 19200 1280 1256 16 8*

* If TFCI bits are not used, then DTX shall be used in TFCI field.



5-41

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Structure of the PRACHThe random-access transmission is based on a Slotted ALOHA approach with fast acquisition indication.The UE can start the random-access transmission at the beginning of a number of well-defined timeintervals, denoted access slots. There are 15 access slots per two frames and they are spaced 5120chips apart, see diagram opposite. Information on what access slots are available for random-accesstransmission is given by higher layers and is based upon the Access Service Class (ASC) of the UE

Random Access TransmissionThe structure of the random-access transmission is also shown opposite. Therandom-access transmission consists of one or several preambles of length 4096chips and a message of length 10ms or 20ms.

PRACH Pre-ambleEach preamble is of length 4096 chips and consists of 256 repetitions of a signature oflength 16 chips. There are a maximum of 16 available signatures



Pub-Date

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)RACH access slot numbers and their spacing

#0 #13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4#3#2#1 #14

5120chips

Access slot

radio frame: 10ms radio frame: 10ms

Random Access Transmission




Structure of the random-access transmission

Message part

10ms (one radio frame)

Message part

20ms (two radio frames)

PreamblePreamblePreamble

4096 chips

PreamblePreamblePreamble

4096 chips



5-43

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)


Structure of PRACH Message PartThe structure of the Random-access message part is shown opposite. The 10ms messageis split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips. Each slot consists of two parts,a data part that carries Layer 2 information and a control part that carries Layer 1 controlinformation. The data and control parts are transmitted in parallel.

The data part consists of 10*2k bits, where k=0,1,2,4. This corresponds to a spreadingfactor of 256, 128, 64, and 32 respectively for the message data part. The value for thenumber of bits in the data field are given in the table opposite.

The control part consists of 8 known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detectionand 2 TFCI bits. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256 for the message control part.The total number of TFCI bits in the random-access message is 15*2 = 30. The TFCI valuecorresponds to a certain transport format of the current Random-access message.

The Random Access Channel(s) (RACH) is characterised by:

• Existence in uplink only• Limited data field• Collision risk• Open loop power control



Pub-Date

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) Version 1 Rev 0



DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits


Message part radio frame TRACH = 10ms

Data

Control

Slot Format #i Channel BitRate (kbps)

ChannelSymbol Rate

(ksps)

SFBits/

FrameBits/Slot Ndata

0 15 15 256 1010150

1 30 30 128 2020300

2 60 60 64 4040600

3 120 120 32 80801200

Random-access message data fields



5-45

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)The Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carryAcquisition Indicators (AI). Acquisition Indicator AIs corresponds to signature s on the PRACH.

The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the AICH.

The AICH consists of a repeated sequence of 15 consecutive access slots (AS), each of length5120 chips. Each access slot consists of two parts, an Acquisition-Indicator (AI) part consistingof 32 real-valued symbols a0, …, a31 and a part of duration 1024 chips with no transmissionthat is not formally part of the AICH. The part of the slot with no transmission is reserved forpossible use by CSICH or possible future use by other physical channels.

The spreading factor (SF) used for channelization of the AICH is 256.

The phase reference for the AICH is the Primary CPICH.



Pub-Date

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) Version 1 Rev 0

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

AS # 14 AS # 0 AS # 1 AS # i AS # 14 AS # 0

20ms

a0 a31a30a2a1 Transmission Off

Al part = 4096 chips, 32 real-valued symbols 1024 chips



5-47

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Relationship Between PRACH and AICH

Relationship Between PRACH and AICHThe PRACH contains two sets of access slots as shown below. Access slot set 1 containsPRACH slots 0 - 7 and starts τp-a chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFNmod 2 = 0. Access slot set 2 contains PRACH slots 8 - 14 and starts (τp-a -2560) chipsbefore the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 1.



Pub-Date

Relationship Between PRACH and AICH Version 1 Rev 0

Relationship Between PRACH and AICHAICH accessslots

10ms

#0 #1 #2 #3 #14#13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4Tp-a

#0 #1 #2 #3 #14#13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4

PRACHaccess slots

SFN mod 2 = 0 SFN mod 2 = 1

10ms

Access slot set 1 Access slot set 2



5-49

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

DL-DPCH StructureThere is only one type of downlink dedicated physical channel, the DownlinkDedicated Physical Channel (Downlink DPCH).

Within one Downlink DPCH, dedicated data generated at Layer 2 and above, i.e. the DedicatedTransport Channel (DCH), is transmitted in time-multiplex with control information generated atLayer 1 (known pilot bits, TPC commands, and an optional TFCI). The downlink DPCH can thusbe seen as a time multiplex of a downlink DPDCH and a downlink DPCCH.

The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the downlink DPCH. Each frame of length10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one power-controlperiod. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink DPCHslot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 512/2k. The spreadingfactor may thus range from 512 down to 4. The exact number of bits of the different downlinkDPCH fields (Npilot, NTPC, NTFCI, Ndata1 and Ndata2) is dependent upon the SF. What slot format touse is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers.

There are basically two types of downlink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that includeTFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. forfixed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and itis mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the downlink.

The Pilot bits are provided to permit frame synchronisation and channel estimation at the receiving node.

TPC symbol will indicate a step increase or decrease of transmitter power by the receiving node.

TPC Bit Pattern Transmitter powercontrol command

NTPC = 2 NTPC = 4 NTPC = 8

1100

11110000

1111 111100000000

10



Pub-Date

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0



Data 1 TPC TFCI Data 2 Pilot

Npilot bits

DPDCH DPCCH DPDCH DPCCH

One radio frame = 10ms

Tslot = 2560 chips

K = 0.........7



5-51

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)


Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code TransmissionFor slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to acertain combination of bit rates of the DCHs currently in use. This correspondenceis re-negotiated at each DCH addition/removal.

When the total bit rate to be transmitted on one downlink CCTrCH exceeds the maximum bit ratefor a downlink physical channel, multicode transmission is employed, i.e. several parallel downlinkDPCHs are transmitted for one CCTrCH using the same spreading factor. In this case, the Layer 1control information is put on only the first downlink DPCH. The additional downlink DPCHs belongingto the CCTrCH do not transmit any data during the corresponding time period.

TFCI Transport Formation Combination Indicator

DCH Dedicated Channel

CCTrCH Coded Composite Transport Channel

DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel

TPC Transmit Power Control



Pub-Date

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0


TPC TFCI Pilot

DPDCHDPDCH

One Slot (2560 chips)

Physical Channel 1

Physical Channel L

Physical Channel 2

TransmissionPower

TransmissionPower

TransmissionPower



5-53

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)There are two types of uplink dedicated physical channels, the Uplink Dedicated Physical DataChannel (Uplink DPDCH) and the Uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (uplink DPCCH).

The DPDCH and the DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed within each radio frame.

The uplink DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. There may be zero,one, or several uplink DPDCHs on each radio link.

The uplink DPCCH is used to carry control information generated at Layer 1. The Layer 1 controlinformation consists of known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection,Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, Feedback Information (FBI), and an optionalTransport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI). The transport-format combination indicatorinforms the receiver about the instantaneous transport format combination of the transportchannels mapped to the simultaneously transmitted Uplink DPDCH radio frame.

There is one and only one Uplink DPCCH on each radio link.

The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the Uplink dedicated physicalchannels. Each radio frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot

= 2560 chips, corresponding to one TPC period.

The parameter k in the diagram determines the number of bits per uplink DPDCH slot. It is relatedto the spreading factor SF of the DPDCH as SF = 256/2k. The DPDCH spreading factor may rangefrom 256 down to 4, giving data rates between 15kbs and 960kbs The spreading factor of the uplinkDPCCH is always equal to 256, i.e. there are 10 bits per uplink DPCCH slot. What slot formatto use is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers.

The FBI bits are used to support techniques requiring feedback from the UE to the UTRAN Access Point,including closed loop mode transmit diversity and Site Selection Diversity Transmission (SSDT).

There are two types of Uplink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g.for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for fixed-rateservices). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it ismandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the uplink.

Multi-code operation is possible for the uplink Dedicated Physical Channels. When multi-codetransmission is used, several parallel DPDCH are transmitted using different channelizationcodes. However, there is only one DPCCH per radio link.



Pub-Date

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)


DPDCH

DPCCH

DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits

FBINFBIbits

TPCNTPCbits


Tf = 10ms

K = 0........7



5-55

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Flow Process

Downlink Flow ProcessThe downlink flow process consists of the following physical layer functions.

Data arrives to the coding/multiplexing unit in the form of transport block sets onceevery transmission time interval. The transmission time interval is transport-channelspecific from the set {10ms, 20ms, 40ms and 80ms}.

The following coding/multiplexing steps can be identified for downlink:

• Add CRC to each transport block• Transport block concatenation and code block segmentation• Channel coding• Rate matching• First insertion of discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication bits• First interleaving• Radio frame segmentation• Multiplexing of transport channels• Second insertion of DTX indication bits• Physical channel segmentation• Second interleaving• Mapping to physical channels

It should be noted that not every step is applicable to every data type.



Pub-Date

Downlink Flow Process Version 1 Rev 0

Downlink Flow Process

PhC

H#2

PhC

H#1

Rate matching

TrBk concatenation /Code block segmentation

1st insertion of DTXindication

CRC attachment

Channel coding

Rate matching

1st interleaving

Radio frame segmentation

2nd insertion of DTXindication

Physical channelsegmentation

2nd interleaving

Physical channel mapping

TrCH Multiplexing

CCTrCH



5-57

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Flow Process

Uplink Flow ProcessThe uplink flow process is largely the same as that for the downlink, and is illustrated in thediagram opposite. The differences in the individual process steps are as follows.

Radio Frame EqualisationRadio frame size equalisation is padding the input bit sequence in order to ensure that the output canbe segmented in data segments of equal size. Radio frame size equalisation is only performed in theUL (DL rate matching output block length is always an integer multiple of the frame length).

Rate MatchingThe rate matching operation in the uplink, is a much more dynamic process that may vary on aframe-by-frame basis. The rate matching operation needs to take into account the the number of bitscoming from all transport channels. When the data rate of one service, the dynamic rate matchingadjusts the rates of the remaining service as well so that all symbols in the radio frame will be used.

For example if with two transport channels, one has a momentary zero rate, rate matching used repetitionto increase the symbol rate for the other service sufficiently so that all uplink channel symbols are used.

DTXBecause Uplink rate matching ensures that all unused transport channel bits are filled, thereis no requirement for DTX indication bits to be inserted in the uplink flow



Pub-Date

Uplink Flow Process Version 1 Rev 0

Uplink Flow Process

TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation

1st interleaving

CRC attachment

Channel coding

Radio Frame equalisation

Radio frame segmentation

Rate matching

TrCH Multiplexing

Rate matching

PhC

H#1

PhC

H#2

Physical channel segmentation

2nd interleaving

Physical channel mapping

CCTrCH



5-59

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Flow Process




Pub-Date

MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRC Protocols and Procedures Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 6

MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRCProtocols and Procedures



6-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRC Protocols and Procedures




Pub-Date


Objectives• Describe the Radio Protocol Stack• Describe the MAC layer• Describe the RLC layer• Describe the PDCP protocol• Describe the BMC protocol• Describe the RRC protocol and its common procedures



6-3

Pub-Date


IntroductionIn this chapter we are going to look at the layer 2 protocols in more detail after being introducedto them in previous chapter in the shape of the MAC and RLC layers. The layer 3 protocolsare also going to be discussed and some of the more common procedures explored togain a better understanding of the essential functions of UMTS.

Layer 2 ProtocolsLayer 2 offers services of information transmission to layer 3 in the form of Radio Bearers (RB) fordata services and Signalling Radio Bearers (SRB) for control information originated either in theRadio Resource Control (RRC) protocol or in the Non Access Stratum (NAS). With respect tothe flow of control information, it goes through the RLC and MAC layers, while in the case of datainformation, depending on the specific service, there exist two additional sub-layers, namely the PacketData Convergence Protocol (PDCP) and the Broadcast Multicast Control (BMC).

Layer 3 ProtocolsWith respect to layer 3, only the lowest sub-layer, denoted as Radio Resource Control(RRC) terminates in the UTRAN control plane.

Each layer communicates with the same layer at the peer entity (e.g. the RRC layer at the UEcommunicates with the RRC at the RNC), and this communication is defined by the specific protocol ofeach layer. At the UTRAN side, the RLC and above radio protocols are located in the RNC. In turn,with respect to the MAC protocol, some of its functionalities are located in the Node B and othersin the RNC. The layered structure is constructed upon the assumption that each layer providesmessage transfer services to the upper layers. At one extreme network entity (e.g. UE or RNC),a given layer receives Service Data Units (SDUs) containing the messages from its upper layer,processes them adding the required headers and control elements and eventually delivers them inthe form of Protocol Data Units (PDUs) to its lower layer. Note that the PDU delivered by a givenlayer corresponds to the SDU seen by its lower layer. At the lowest layer, the information is finallytransferred through the channels existing in the physical layer (i.e. the specific code sequences, timeslots and frequency bands). At the other extreme network entity (e.g. RNC or UE), the informationis received at the physical layer and delivered to the upper layers until reaching the destinationlayer. Note that this transfer of information requires the definition of adequate interfaces betweenadjacent layers specifying the path that information follows depending on its nature.

Layer 2 offers to the upper layers the service of information transmission between the UE and theUTRAN by means of the Radio Bearers (RBs) and Signalling Radio Bearers (SRBs). The formerprovide the transmission of user data while the latter are intended to transfer control information thatcan be originated either in the RRC protocol or in upper layers. Whenever a service is provided toa given UE (e.g. a voice service, a videoconference service, an interactive web browsing service,etc.) it should be associated to a specific RB that specifies the configuration and the parametersof the sub-layers in layer 2 and the physical layer depending on the characteristics of the servicebeing provided. The information flow associated to a RB or a SRB is mapped into different typesof channels depending on the position in the layered protocol architecture.



Pub-Date


Introduction



6-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol

Medium Access Control (MAC) ProtocolThe MAC protocol exists in the lowest sub-layer of layer 2 protocol architecture of the radio interface. Itexists in the UE, the node B and the RNC entities. The MAC provides data transfer services to thelogical channels and it is serviced by the physical layer by means of the transport channels, so oneof the main functionalities of the MAC is the mapping between logical and transport channels.

The MAC layer at either the UTRAN or the UE receives MAC SDUs from the RLC and it isresponsible for transferring them to the corresponding peer MAC entity at the other side. A MACSDU is the minimum amount of information that can be transferred between the two sub-layersin a logical channel. This transfer service is done in unacknowledged mode, which means thatthe delivery to the other side is not guaranteed, so the RLC layer must have mechanisms todetect errors and losses of SDUs as well as perform retransmissions. Furthermore, the MACprotocol does not execute any type of segmentation of the MAC SDUs.

For each MAC SDU, a MAC header is added, whose length and contents depend on the specifictransport channels. The MAC header includes the C/T field that identifies the specific logicalchannel when several logical channels are multiplexed onto the same transport channel, as wellas fields to identify the specific UE in the case of common transport channels like RACH orFACH. It is also possible that the MAC header is empty. Typically, this would be the case of thetransfer of user information through a DCH transport channel that is not multiplexed with anyother channel at the MAC layer, and in which no UE identification is required.

The MAC layer functions (as well as the tasks discussed above and on the next page) also include:

• Priority handling of data flows• Priority handling between UEs by dynamic scheduling• Identity of UEs on common channels• Traffic volume monitoring• Dynamic transport channel switching• Ciphering for transport RLC mode• Access service class selection.



Pub-Date

Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Version 1 Rev 0

Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol

MAC-b

(NodeB)

MAC- hs

(NodeB)

MAC- e

(NodeB)

MAC-d

(RNC)

MAC- c/sh

(RNC)

MAC- es

(RNC)

BCCHMAC Control

MAC Control

MAC Control

MAC Control

MAC Control

MAC ControlBCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH DCCH DTCH

DCHDCHBCH BCH PCH FACH RACH RACHHS-DSCH HS-DSCH E-DCH



6-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Transport Formats

Transport FormatsThe combination of a MAC SDU and a MAC header is a MAC PDU, which corresponds to a TBtransferred to the physical layer through the corresponding transport channel. In each TransmissionTime Interval (TTI) the MAC layer selects a suitable Transport Format (TF) or a Transport FormatCombination (TFC), depending on the instantaneous source rate, the service characteristics andthe Transport Format Combination Set (TFCS). Each TF is related to a given instantaneousbit rate. Once the selection is done, the MAC layer delivers a set of TBs to the physical layer,denoted as the Transport Block Set (TBS). The transport blocks must be delivered in the sameorder in which the corresponding MAC SDUs were delivered by the RLC layer.

Transport Block (TB):Transport Block (TB) is the basic unit MAC transfers to L1 for L1 processing. ATB is equivalent to a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU). TB size indicates the number of bits in a TB

Transport Block Set (TBS):Transport Block Set (TBS) is a set of TBs MAC transferson a transport channel at one time to L1. A TBS is equivalent to a MAC PDU Set.TBS size indicates the number of bits in a TBS.

Transport Format (TF):Transport Format (TF) is a format L1 applies for transferring a TBSto MAC on a transport channel at a Transmission Time Interval (TTI). The TF consistsof two parts — a dynamic part and a semi-static part.

Transport Format Set (TFS):Transport Format Set (TFS) is a set of TFs. A TF represents a bitrate. A TFS consisting of multiple TFs may have multi rates. For example, a fixed-rate DCH hasonly a single TF. A variable-rate DCH has a TFS, with one TF for each rate.

Transport Format Combination (TFC):Transport Format Combination (TFC) is the combination ofcurrently valid TFs on all transport channels of a UE. It contains the TF from each transport channel.

Transport Format Combination Set (TFCS)Transport Format Combination Set(TFCS) is a set of TFCs of a UE.

Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI):Transport Format Combination Indicator(TFCI) is a label for a specific TFC within a TFCS.

Transport Format Identification (TFI)Transport Format Identification (TFI) is a label for aspecific TF within a TFS. is a label for a specific TF within a TFS.

Transport Block (TB)

Basic unit of the transport format – generated every 10ms or multiple of 10ms

Transport Block (TB)

Basic unit of the transport format – generated every 10ms or multiple of 10ms

Transport Block Size (TBS)

Size of the Transport Block in bits

Transport Block Size (TBS)

Size of the Transport Block in bits

0101010011110101001 (MAC PDU)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et (T

BS)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et (T

BS)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et S

ize (S

ize in

bits

)

Tran

smis

sion

Tim

e In

terv

al (T

TI)

10m

s, 2

0ms,

40m

s or

2m

s fo

r HSD

PATr

ansm

issi

on T

ime

Inte

rval

(TTI

)

10

ms,

20m

s, 4

0ms

or 2

ms

for H

SDPA

Physical Layer

Transport Channel (TrCH)

Transport Format

Indicator (TFI)

Transport Format

Indicator (TFI)



Pub-Date

Transport Formats Version 1 Rev 0

Transport Formats

168 bits168 bits

168 bits168 bits

0101010011110101001 (MAC PDU)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et (T

BS)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et (T

BS)

Tran

spor

t Blo

ck S

et S

ize

is 3

36 b

its

Tran

smis

sion

Tim

e In

terv

al (T

TI) =

10m

sTr

ansm

issi

on T

ime

Inte

rval

(TTI

) = 1

0ms

Transport Channel (TrCH)

Transport Format

Indicator (TFI)

Transport Format

Indicator (TFI)

Example Transport Format:

Dynamic part – 168 bit TB, 336 bit TBS

Semi- static – TTI 10ms, turbo coding, 1/3 rate conv coding, 16 crc

168 bits

168 bits

(TB

S)

TBS

siz

e is

336

bits

(TTI

) = 1

0ms

Transport Channel (TrCH2)

(TFI)

168 bits168 bits

168 bits168 bits

(TB

S)

(TB

S)

TBS

siz

e is

336

bits

(TTI

) = 1

0ms

(TTI

) = 1

0ms


(TFI)(TFI)

168 bits

168 bits

(TB

S)

TBS

siz

e is

336

bits

(TTI

) = 1

0ms


(TFI)

168 bits168 bits

168 bits168 bits

(TB

S)

(TB

S)

TBS

siz

e is

336

bits

(TTI

) = 1

0ms

(TTI

) = 1

0ms


(TFI)(TFI)

Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH)Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH)Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH)Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH)

DPCCH DPDCH



6-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol

Radio Link Control (RLC) ProtocolThe RLC sub-layer is located in both the UE and the RNC immediately above the MAC sub-layeraccording to the radio interface protocol architecture. In the control plane, it provides servicesdirectly to layer 3, while in the user plane it may also provide services to the PDCP and BMCsub-layers. In turn, it receives information transfer services from the MAC layer by means of thelogical channels.The RLC protocol receives from the upper layer RLC SDUs

The RLC protocol receives from the upper layer RLC SDUs and transmits RLC PDUs to theMAC layer (note that the RLC PDUs are the same as the MAC SDUs).

Essentially, the RLC provides three types of data transfer services corresponding to the three modesof operation: Transparent Mode (TM); Unacknowledged Mode (UM); and Acknowledged Mode(AM). Each mode is associated with a different Service Access Point (SAP) for upper layers,denoted as TM-SAP, UM-SAP and AM-SAP, respectively, and with different RLC entities,

Transparent Mode (TM)The features of TM are defined by a no delay, no overhead and no assured delivery of data.

The transparent mode can be used by any of the logical channels except the CTCH, andit is the only mode that can be used by the BCCH and PCCH for the transfer of broadcastand paging messages. It is the mode typically used by the streaming service class inthe case of dedicated channels and CS voice services.

Unacknowledged Mode (UM)The features of UM are defined by low delay, lower transmission efficiency caused by having aUM header and no assured delivery of data. Unlike TM the segmentation of RLC PDUs is allowedand is taken care of by the UM header when re-segmentation takes place.

UM can be used by CCCH, CTCH, DTCH and DCCH logical channels, and it is normally used by someRRC control procedures, in which there exist specific RRC acknowledgement messages, so thatacknowledgement at the RLC layer is not necessary. Voice over IP services may also use this mode.

Acknowledged Mode (AM)The features of AM are defined by high delay caused by having assured delivery of data,low transmission efficiency caused by having a large AM header.

Services (web browsing, FTP download) with the following features:

• Not insensitive to delay• High or very high requirement for transmission quality



Pub-Date

Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol



6-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)

Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)The PDCP only exists in the user plane and is specifically for PS services. Its main functionalityis to improve the efficiency in the radio transmission by means of executing header compressionof the IP data packets coming from upper layers. It receives PDCP SDUs from upper layers anddelivers to the RLC sub-layer different PDCP PDUs. The types of PDCP PDUs:

• PDCP Data PDU, which contains a PDCP SDU, either compressed or uncompressed,or header compression related control signalling. The type of informationcontained is indicated in a one-byte header;

• PDCP-No-Header PDU, which contains an uncompressed PDCP SDUwithout adding any type of header;

• PDCP SeqNum PDU, which, apart from containing a compressed or uncompressedPDCP SDU, also includes a PDCP SDU sequence number.

The specific header compression protocol depends on the particular upper layer protocols that form theincoming PDCP SDU and on the configuration of the PDCP sub-layer by upper layers. For TCP/IPpackets, the IP header compression mechanism described in IETF RFC 2507 is used, which isessentially based on providing a variable length TCP/IP header whose contents are specified by thebits of the first byte. The amount of information in the header is reduced by sending only the changesfrom one packet to the next. In this way, it is possible to reduce the TCP/IP header from the usual valueof 40 bytes down to 4 or 5 bytes. Note that when such a TCP/IP compressed packet is lost due toerrors in the lower layers, the incremental condition of the header compression mechanism makes it nolonger possible to decode the headers of the subsequent packets. Consequently, in such cases it isnecessary to send sporadic uncompressed TCP/IP segments. Different types of compressed headersare accepted by the protocol. The type of compression is indicated in the PDCP Data PDU header.

For RTP/UDP/IP packets, in which certain time constraints must be met, the Robust HeaderCompression (ROHC) method defined in IETF RFC 3095 is used. This protocol supportssegmentation of packets and can transmit information packets from several contexts, distinguishedby the Context Identifier (CID), which is included either in the PDCP header or in the upper layerpacket. The ROHC protocol involves some signalling parameters that must be exchanged betweenthe compressor and the decompressor entities at the transmitter and the receiver sides.

The PDCP protocol may operate with any of the three RLC modes (i.e. transparent,unacknowledged and acknowledged), and the selection will depend on the specific servicecharacteristics. When operating with acknowledged RLC mode configured with in-sequencedelivery, the PDCP with ROHC protocol also provides support for a lossless SRNSrelocation procedure by means of PDCP sequence numbering.



Pub-Date

Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Version 1 Rev 0

Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)

Applic ations

Data protocols IP P P P F T P etc

P DC P

R L C

MAC

P HY S

• Header de/c ompres s ion

• T rans fer of us er data

• F orwarding of P DC P S DUs and as s oc iated s equence numbers

• Header de/c ompres s ion

• T rans fer of us er data

• F orwarding of P DC P S DUs and as s oc iated s equence numbers



6-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol

Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) ProtocolLike the PDCP, the BMC protocol only exists in the user plane, and provides a broadcast/multicasttransmission service operating in RLC unacknowledged mode.

The BMC entity at the UTRAN side is located in the RNC and its functions include the storage ofCell Broadcast Messages, which are transmitted in a given cell to certain UEs that support theSMS Cell Broadcast Service. These messages, which carry information that depends on thegeographical area, are transmitted by means of the CTCH logical channel and the mobile shouldbe able to receive them in idle mode as well as in the rest of RRC states. The stored messagesare scheduled by the BMC in order to decide the appropriate instant for their transmission. Thespecific scheduling algorithm is implementation dependent. At the UE side, the BMC entitydelivers the received cell broadcast messages to the upper layers.

Traffic volume monitoring is done by the BMC – by making predictions on the expected amountof capacity in terms of bit rate that is needed for the transmission of cell broadcast messages– and indicates it to the RRC entity, so that it can act accordingly.



Pub-Date

Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol Version 1 Rev 0

Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol

Applic ations

Data protoc ols IP P P P F T P etc

P DC P

R L C

MAC

P HY S

B MC

• S torage of cell broadc as t mes s ages

• T raffic volume -monitoring and radio res ourc e reques ts for C B S

• S c heduling of cell broadc as t ms gs

• T rans mis s ion of cell broadc as t ms gs

• S toring of ms g IDs and s erial numbers of rx ’dC B S ms gs in UE s

• Delivery of cell broadc as t mes s ages to upper layers (NAS )



6-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Resource Control (RRC)

Radio Resource Control (RRC)According to the radio interface protocol architecture that was shown in the first slide of this chapter,the RRC protocol only exists in the control plane and occupies the lowest sub-layer of layer 3while, at the same time, being the highest layer of the Radio Access Network (i.e. the UTRANpart) protocol stack. Although layer 3 is partitioned in other sub-layers above RRC, they belongto the Non Access Stratum (NAS) and are specified between the UE and the Core Networkparts of the UMTS architecture. Some examples of control protocols above the RRC includeSession Management (SM), Connection Management (CM), Mobility Management (MM) orGPRS Mobility Management (GMM). Supplementary Services (SS), Short Message Servicesor GPRS Short Message Services (GSMS) and Connection Control (CC)

The RRC protocol provides the service of transferring signalling information to the NAS upperlayer entities. Besides, RRC handles the control plane signalling between the UE and the UTRANthrough Signalling Radio Bearers. This includes procedures specific of the Access Stratum(AS) that allow the appropriate configuration of the lower layers in both control and user planestaking into account the network status. Therefore, these signalling procedures provide the supportfor the execution of the Radio Resource Management (RRM) strategies.

The RRC functions include:

• Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum (Core Network)• Broadcast of information related to the access stratum• Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN• Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers• Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection• RRC connection mobility functions• Control of requested QoS• UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting• Outer loop power control• Control of ciphering• Paging.• Initial cell selection and cell re-selection;• Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH;• RRC message integrity protection;• CBS control



Pub-Date

Radio Resource Control (RRC) Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Resource Control (RRC)



6-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC Procedures

RRC ProceduresIn this part of the course some of the more important RRC procedures will be discussed to allowunderstanding of the signalling that must take place to allow UMTS to operate.

Broadcast of System Information.This procedure allows the broadcasting of system information messages from the UTRAN tothe terminals of a given cell. These messages are organised into System Information Blocks(SIBs), ranging from 1 to 18, which are sent periodically on the BCCH. A System Block (SB)is a block of SIBs. There exists a Master Information Block (MIB) that includes the referenceinformation to decode the rest of the SIBs and which is the first block that the mobile should readwhen it selects a new cell. Additionally, it contains a tag that allows the detection of changes incertain SIBs whose information does not change frequently, so that the terminals do not need todecode continuously all the broadcast messages. In the case of important changes in the SIBs,the network may notify these to the mobiles in Cell_PCH and URA_PCH states through a PagingType 1 message in the PCH channel, while the mobiles in Cell_FACH are informed through theFACH channel by means of the System Information Change Indication message.

Supported System Information Block Types

The list below shows the SIBs that are currently supported. The missing onesare for UMTS TDD mode of working.

A normally running RNC cell broadcasts SIB1/3/5/7/11 and optionally SIB2/18. Configurationof system information blocks (SIBs) are shown in the table opposite.

• SIB 1 — Contains NAS system information as well as UE timers and counters tobe used in idle mode and in connected mode.

• SIB 2 — Contains the URA identification.• SIB 3 — Contains parameters for cell selection and reselection.• SIB 5— Contains parameters for the configuration of the common physical channels in a cell

e.g., power offset of AICH and PICH, SCCPCH information and PRACH information.• SIB 7— Contains the fast changing parameters e.g., UL interference and dynamic persistence level.• SIB 11 — Contains measurement control information to be used in a cell e.g.,

FACH measurement occasion information, measurement control system informationand neighbouring cell measurement information.

• SIB 18 — Contains PLMN identities of neighbouring cells to be consideredin idle mode as well as in connected mode.



Pub-Date

RRC Procedures Version 1 Rev 0

RRC Procedures

R NCR NC

Iu

Iub

B C H

C ore Network

S B

S C C P C H and P R AC H information

S IB 5

S B


S BS B


S IB 5

S IB 3

S IB 1Non ac ces s s tratum s ys info + UE timers and c ounter

C ell s ys tem info i.e cell s elec tion and res elec tion info

S IB 3

S IB 1Non ac ces s s tratum s ys info + UE timers and c ounter

C ell s ys tem info i.e cell s elec tion and res elec tion infoMIB E xample onlyMIBMIB E xample only

NodeB



6-19

Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

Cell Selection/Re-selectionThe goal of the cell selection procedures is to fast find a cell to camp on. To speed upthis process, at "power up" or when returning from "out of coverage", the UE shall startwith the stored information from previous network contacts. If the UE is unable to findany of those cells the initial cell search will be initiated.

If it is not possible to find a cell from a valid PLMN the UE will choose a cell in a forbidden PLMNand enter a "limited service state". In this state the UE regularly attempt to find a suitable cellon a valid PLMN. If a better cell is found the UE has to read the system information for that cell.The cell to camp on is chosen by the UE on link quality basis. However, the network can set cellre-selection thresholds in order to take other criteria into account, such as, for example:

• available services;• cell load;• UE speed.

In CDMA, it is important to minimise the UE output power, and also to minimise the power consumptionin the UE. In order to achieve that, an ’Immediate Cell Evaluation Procedure’ at call set up canensure that the UE transmits with the best cell, while keeping the power consumption low.

Cell Re-selection

The cell reselection procedure is a procedure to check the best cell to camp on. The evaluation ofthe measurements for this procedure is always active, in idle mode, after the cell selection procedurehas been completed and the first cell has been chosen. The goal of the procedure is to alwayscamp on a cell with good enough quality even if it is not the optimal cell all the time.

It is also possible to have a "time to trigger" and hysteresis criteria in the cell reselection to control thenumber of cell reselections. The parameters needed for the cell reselection procedure (e.g., theoffset value and the hysteresis) are unique on a cell to neighbour cell relation basis. These havetherefore to be distributed, together with time to trigger value, in system information in the servingcell. This implies that the UE does not need to read the system information in the neighbouringcells before the cell reselection procedure finds a neighbouring cell with better quality.



Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

Campednormally

NASregistration

rejected

nosuitable

cellfound

InitialCell Selection

CellReselection

Cell Selectionwhen leaving

connectedmode

StoredInformation

Cell Selection

ConnectedMode

1

go here whenevera new PLMNis selected

cell informationstored for the PLMN

no cell informationstored for the PLMN

no suitablecell found

no suitablecell found

suitable cell found

no suitable cell found

suitable cell found

suitablecell selected

trigger

suitablecell found

return toidle mode

leaveidle mode

Camped onAny Cell

suitablecell found

Any CellReselection

Cell Selectionwhen leaving

connectedmode

ConnectedMode

(Emergencycalls only)

1 USIM inserted

no acceptable cell found

no acceptable cell found

an acceptable cell found

acceptablecell selected

trigger

acceptablecell found

return toidle mode

leaveidle mode

Any CellSelection

1

go here when no USIM in the UE



6-21

Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

UE State Transition AlgorithmAfter the RRC connection is set up, the RNC observes UE activity and uses the UEstate transition algorithm to transit the UE state.

UE State Transition Algorithm

The figure opposite shows the RRC states in UTRA RRC Connected Mode, including transitionsbetween UTRA RRC connected mode and GSM connected mode for CS domain services,and between UTRA RRC connected mode and GSM/GPRS packet modes for PS domainservices. It also shows the transitions between Idle Mode and UTRA RRC Connected Modeand furthermore the transitions within UTRA RRC connected mode. In our algorithm, weonly care for the state transition in the UTRAN connected mode.

The principle of UE state transition is that:

• The state of the UE transits from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH or from CELL_FACHto CELL_PCH/URA_PCH if the activity of UE decreases.

• The state of the UE transits from CELL_PCH/URA_PCH to CELL_FACH or fromCELL_FACH to CELL_DCH if the activity of UE increases.

Paging

This procedure is used to transmit paging information to selected UEs that are in idle mode or inCell_PCH and URA_PCH states. It makes use of the Paging Type 1 message. The reasons for apaging message can be the establishment of a network originated call or session set-up, the requestto trigger a cell update procedure, the change to Cell_FACH state because of downlink packet dataactivity, the request to start the release of an RRC connection and the request to read updated systeminformation in the broadcast channel. A similar procedure exists for paging mobiles in Cell_DCH andCell_FACH states, but in this case a Paging Type 2 message is sent through the DCCH.



Pub-Date


RRC ProceduresUE State Transition and Status of the RRC Connection

Idle Mode

UTRAN Connected Mode

Camped on a UTRAN Cell Camped on a GSM/GPRS Cell

URA_PCHCELL_PCH

CELL_DCH (with HS-DSCH)

CELL_FACH

CELL_DCH

GSM Connected

Mode

GPRS Packet Transfer

ModeCell

Reselection

UTRAN Inter-RAT Handover

GSM Handover

Establish RR Connection

Release RR Connection

Release of temporary block flow

Initiation of temporary block flowRelease RRC

connection

Release RRC connection

Establish RRC connection

Establish RRC connection



6-23

Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

RRC connection establishmentUEs in idle mode that require the initiation of a signalling connection make use of the RRC connectionestablishment procedure. The procedure starts with a RRC Connection Request message mappedto the CCCH logical channel and transmitted through the RACH. The mobile identifies itself bymeans of NAS identifiers like the IMSI or the TMSI and it includes the establishment cause. Thereexist several causes including the registration, the establishment of originating calls for each of thefour possible service classes (conversational, streaming, interactive and background) or the transferof higher layer signalling. Upon receipt of this message, the network may either accept or reject therequest by means of a RRC Connection Setup or a RRC Connection Reject message, respectively,which is mapped to the CCCH logical channel and the FACH transport channel. In the case ofacceptance, the RRC Connection Setup message includes the Radio Network Terminal Identifier(RNTI) for the mobile and the indication about whether to pass to Cell_DCH or to Cell_FACH. It alsoincludes the characterisation of the allocated dedicated radio channel in terms of code sequenceand TFCS in both the uplink and downlink direction, when the user is moved to the Cell_DCH. Inany case, the mobile terminal is now in connected mode and there is a DCCH logical channelallocated to it that includes SRB#1, SRB#2, SRB#3 and optionally SRB#4. The procedure completeswhen the mobile sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message through DCCH and eitherDCH or RACH transport channel, thus acknowledging the correct reception and configurationof the allocated channel. Only one RRC connection may exist for a given mobile.

Establishment of signalling connections between the UE and the Core Network anddirect transfer of signalling messages.

These procedures are intended to establish and release NAS signalling connections between theterminal and the different core network domains (i.e. CS and PS domains). This allows the directtransfer of signalling messages between the upper layer entities of mobiles that have previouslyestablished a RRC connection. The term ‘direct transfer’ refers to the transmission of signalling NASmessages through the RRC layer either in the uplink or in the downlink direction.

The establishment of the signalling connection is done by means of the Initial Direct Transferprocedure, which is initiated by the NAS of the UE. In this case, the RRC layer of the UE sends anInitial Direct Transfer message to the peer entity at the SRNC that includes the message denoted asInitial UE Message (which belongs to the RANAP protocol defined between RNC and CN and thatcontains a NAS message) and some information about the core network domain (i.e. CS or PS) towhich the NAS message should be delivered. Once the signalling connection has been establishedwith the Initial Direct Transfer message, subsequent NAS messages corresponding to this connectionare transmitted with the Uplink Direct Transfer and Downlink Direct Transfer messages betweenRRC entities. Some examples of NAS messages that can be exchanged could be, for example,a CM Service Request in order to start a call, a MM Location Updating Request, etc.



Pub-Date


RRC ProceduresS R NC C NUE

RRC Message (Logical Channel) RANAP Message

RRC Connection Request (CCCH)

RRC Connection Setup (CCCH)

RRC Connection Complete (DCCH)

Initial Direct Transfer (DCCH) Initial UE Message

UL/DL Direct Transfer Messages

RAB Assignment Request Message

Radio Bearer Setup (DCCH)

Radio Bearer Setup Complete (DCCH)

RRC connection

establishment (UE-UTRAN)

Signalling connection

establishment (UE-CN)

Service establishment

(UE-CN)

Establish radio resource at the Node B for SRB (NBAP Signalling)

Establish radio resource at the Node B for RB (NBAP Signalling)

Establish resources at the Iuinterface



6-25

Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

Radio bearer establishmentThe radio bearer establishment is a procedure initiated by the upper layers of the network side inorder to request the allocation of radio resources to a mobile terminal that previously has establisheda RRC connection. The establishment of a RRC connection involves the establishment of differentSRBs by means of the allocation of the required radio resources to allow the transfer of signallingmessages between the UE and the network. At a given instant during the RRC connection, theupper layer signalling messages exchanged by the UE and the Core Network may request theinitiation of a user service belonging to a certain service class and with different requirements (e.g.a circuit switched call by means of a CC Setup message or a packet transfer by means of a SMActivate PDP Context Request). This user service requires the extension of the radio resourceallocation to the corresponding user taking into consideration the service requirements. Then, afterthe acceptance of the new service by the admission control, the RRC of the SRNC will receive fromthe core network (i.e. from the MSC for CS services or from the SGSN for PS services) the order toallocate the corresponding radio resources to the terminal. This will initiate the establishment of a radiobearer through the corresponding RRC procedure, which starts with the transmission of a RadioBearer Setup message from the RRC at the SRNC to the peer entity at the UE side. This messageincludes all the parameters to configure the RLC/MAC/PHY layers according to the transport andphysical channels that are being assigned for both the uplink and downlink direction (e.g. transportchannel type, code sequence, TFCS, RLC mode, etc.). Note that depending on the service nature(i.e. CS or PS) and the specific service requirements, this procedure may or may not involve theestablishment of a dedicated channel. Similarly, and in the case when previous physical dedicatedchannels are already allocated to the user, the procedure may involve the modification of the physicalchannel characteristics. When the transport and physical channels allocated in the radio bearerare successfully established, the RRC at the UE side will issue a Radio Bearer Setup Completemessage. In the case of failure, it will issue a Radio Bearer Setup Failure message.



Pub-Date


RRC ProceduresS R NC C NUE

RRC Message (Logical Channel) RANAP Message

RRC Connection Request (CCCH)

RRC Connection Setup (CCCH)

RRC Connection Complete (DCCH)

Initial Direct Transfer (DCCH) Initial UE Message

UL/DL Direct Transfer Messages

RAB Assignment Request Message

Radio Bearer Setup (DCCH)

Radio Bearer Setup Complete (DCCH)

RRC connection

establishment (UE-UTRAN)

Signalling connection

establishment (UE-CN)

Service establishment

(UE-CN)

Establish radio resource at the Node B for SRB (NBAP Signalling)

Establish radio resource at the Node B for RB (NBAP Signalling)

Establish resources at the Iuinterface



6-27

Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

Measurement ProceduresThese procedures allow the mobile terminals to provide the network with different measurementreports that will be used by the radio resource management strategies to take the appropriatedecisions that maintain the required QoS for the accepted mobiles.

The network configures the measurements that should be provided by the mobile terminal by indicatingthe objects to be measured (i.e. the cells, the transport channels and the physical channels), thecriteria to be used (i.e. periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting when certain events aredetected at the UE) and the RLC mode to be used (i.e. acknowledged or unacknowledged). Thisconfiguration is done by means of the Measurement Control message. Measurements are requiredonly by terminals in Cell_DCH and Cell_FACH states, although in some cases such as trafficvolume monitoring, terminals in Cell_PCH may also send measurement reports.

The Measurement Reports provided by the terminals include several types of measurements,which are classified into the following groups:

• Intra-frequency measurements - These correspond to downlink physical channels in the cells withthe same frequency as the cells from the Active Set. The measured cells belong to the MonitoredSet, which is broadcast in the cell where the mobile is allocated. These measurements include:

◦ Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel, which is equivalent to the ratio between the powerof the pilot channel and the total received power at the antenna connector.

◦ Downlink path loss — which can be measured as the difference between the transmittedand the received CPICH power. The transmitted CPICH power is broadcast by the network.

◦ Downlink Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) for the primary CPICH, correspondingto the power measured at the code of the primary CPICH.

◦ Measured time difference between P-CCPCH frames of the different cells.

• Inter-frequency measurements — These are done over downlink physical channels of cellswith a different frequency to that of the cells in the active set. The measurements included inthis group are essentially the same as in the intra-frequency measurements.

• Inter-RAT measurements — These are done over cells from other RATs, like GSM/GPRS, and willbe required to decide the execution of inter-RAT handovers. The measured quantities for GSM cellsinclude the GSM carrier RSSI, BSIC and the observed time difference with respect to the GSM cell.

• Traffic volume measurements — These include uplink measurements of the RLC bufferoccupancy, providing instantaneous and average values as well as the measured variance.

• Quality measurements — These report downlink quality parameters, such as thetransport block error rate for specific transport channels.

• UE internal measurements — These measurements include the UE transmission power,the UE received RSSI and the observed difference between reception and transmissiontimes (i.e. the difference between the start of the uplink DPCCH/DPDCH transmissionand the reception of the first path of the downlink DPCH).



Pub-Date


RRC Procedures

R NCR NC

Iu

Iub

C ore Network

NodeB

Intra-frequency measurements• Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel

• Downlink path loss

• RSCP for the primary CPICH

Inter-frequency measurements

• Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel

• Downlink path loss

• RSCP for the primary CPICH

Inter-RAT measurements• GSM RSSI

• BSIC

Traffic volume measurements• RLC buffer occupancy

Quality measurements• transport block error rate

UE internal measurements• UE transmission power• UE received RSSI

Neighbour Cells



6-29

Pub-Date





Pub-Date

Radio Resource Management Functions Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 7

Radio Resource ManagementFunctions



7-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Resource Management Functions




Pub-Date



• Describe basic Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions.• Describe handover control• Describe compressed mode• Describe macro diversity• Describe SRNS relocation• Describe power control• Describe DCCC• Describe load control



7-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Resource Management Overview

Radio Resource Management Overview

Introduction to Radio Resource ManagementRadio Resource Management (RRM) consists of a series of procedures designed to achieve themost efficient utilisation of the air interface (Uu). The purpose of RRM is to:

• Guarantee Quality of Service• Maintain planned coverage• Offer high capacity

To achieve this end, the objectives of RRM can be summarises as:

• Power Control - Minimise User/Network transmission power, whilst maintaining requested Qualityof Service, to reduce interference on the system, thus increasing capacity and coverage.

• Admission and Load Control - To maintain the load of the entire system at a steady, manageable level• Handover Control - maintain QoS, even when the UE moves to other cells or systems



Pub-Date

Radio Resource Management Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Resource Management Overview

Coverage

Capacity

Qua

lity

of S

ervi

ce (Q

oS)

Power Control

Admission and Load Control

Handover Control



7-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Handover Control

Handover ControlThe handover function in UTRAN manages the mobility of the UE and the radio interface. It is based onradio measurements and cell topology and it is used to maintain the Quality of Service requested bythe Core Network regardless of UE mobility. The RNC supports the following handover types:

• Intra-frequency soft, softer and hard handover,• Inter-frequency hard handover• Inter-RAT hard handover in both CS and PS domains.

In addition, the procedures may be intra-RNC or inter-RNC and may requirethe performance of SRNS relocation.

The decision on what handover type needs to be performed depends on a number of conditionsand parameters that are presented in the following sections. In general, soft/softer handover hashigher priority than intra-frequency hard handover and inter-frequency and inter-RAT HHO only occursin border cells that have inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighbouring cells set accordingly.

Three different handover causes are supported in the RNC:

• Handover due to poor radio link quality• Handover due to radio interface overload• Operator forced handover.



Pub-Date

Handover Control Version 1 Rev 0

Handover Control



7-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Measurement Control

Measurement ControlThe handover algorithm also controls the measurement reporting performed by the UEin CELL_DCH state for handover purposes. The MEASUREMENT CONTROL messageis used to set up and modify the way measurements are taken by the UE. The contentsand frequency of the MEASUREMENT REPORT messages from the UE depends on themeasurement type, the UE state and its measurement capability.

The list of cells that the UE must monitor is divided into three different categories.

• Active Set: Group of UTRAN cells which the UE has a radio link established to, i.e. itis in soft/softer handover with. The Active Set contains only UTRAN cells that operateon the same UMTS frequency. In USR3.0 the maximum number of cells in the ActiveSet is fixed to 3. This is a hard coded parameter in USR3.0.

• Monitored Set: Cells that are not currently in the Active Set, but the UE is monitoring forhandover according to a neighbour list assigned by UTRAN (stored as CELL_INFO_LISTin the UE). The Monitored Set may contain UTRAN and GSM cells and the UTRAN cellsmay be under different UMTS frequencies. The maximum number of cells to measure inUSR3.0 is: 32 intra-frequency, 32 inter-frequency and 32 inter-RAT cells.

• Detected Set: Cells that are not included in the neighbour list to monitor but are detected by theUE on its own. The UE only reports detected UTRAN cells that are under the same frequencyas the active cells and only when in CELL_DCH state. The purpose is to provide informationto the network operator for manually updating the neighbour cell list of cells.

Monitored List DeterminationThe best cell in the active set to control the monitored list. The strategy is as follows:

• If there is only one cell in the active set, use its neighbour list to build the monitored set list.• If there is more than one cell in the active set use the neighbour list of the

best cell to build the monitored set list.• If a 1D event is received, indicating a new best cell, use the neighbour list of the

new best cell to build the monitored set list.• If the best cell is removed, use the neighbour list of the best cell amongst those left in

the active set at that time in order to build the new monitored list.



Pub-Date

Measurement Control Version 1 Rev 0

Measurement Control

Monitored Set

Detected Set

Detected Set

Detected Set

Detected Set

Active Set

Active Set

Active Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set

Monitored Set



7-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Intra-frequency Handover

Intra-frequency Handover

Algorithm DescriptionThe figure opposite shows the scenario where a mobile moves from one cell to another. It can beseen that in CDMA there is blur zone where the mobile can be connected to both cells, maximizingthe quality of service. This is often referred to as Soft or Softer Handover.

The handover control function for soft handover is responsible of the following tasks.

• Determining whether a soft handover is necessary.• Receiving intra-frequency measurement reports from UEs (intra-frequency measurement

results and information about intra-frequency events that triggered the measurement report),which may refer to Node Bs under the same or different RNCs.

• Deciding whether to add any of these reported cells to the active set or drop any of thecells from the active set (adding or deleting the radio links)

• When radio links are added, splitting/combining or splitting/selection functions in the appropriatenetwork elements are also instructed to begin diversity processing with the new radio link.

Intra-frequency Event Driven Reporting

Event Event Description

Event 1a A Primary CPICH enters the Reporting Range.

Event 1b A Primary CPICH leaves the Reporting Range.

Event 1c A Non-active Primary CPICH becomes better than an active Primary CPICH

Event 1d Change of best cell

Event 1f Absolute value of a Primary CPICH becomes worse than a threshold(Used to trigger interFreq Ho)



Pub-Date

Intra-frequency Handover Version 1 Rev 0


Cell CCell A

• The UE has a radio connection with cell A• The UE has a radio connection with cell A

Cell B

• When the UE established an additional radio connection with Cell B this is called a softer handover

• When the UE established an additional radio connection with Cell B this is called a softer handover

• When the UE establishes an additional radio connection with Cell C this is a soft handover even when Cell C is located under a different RNC

• When the UE establishes an additional radio connection with Cell C this is a soft handover even when Cell C is located under a different RNC



7-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Intra-frequency Handover


Intra-frequency Hard HandoverAlthough soft/softer handover is the preferred procedure to handle RRC connection mobility,there are times when only a hard handover can be performed. The hard handover procedureremoves all the RL(s) in the active set and establishes new RL(s). An intra-frequency hardhandover is only performed when one of the following conditions apply.

• There is no Iur interface between the source and target RNC.• The UE is using a PS RAB at a bit rate above a preset threshold.



Pub-Date

Intra-frequency Handover Version 1 Rev 0


• A hard handover occurs when the UE has to release the old radio links before it establishes a radio connection with a new cell

Cell A

Cell BCell B

Occurs on 1D (change of best cell) event when:

1. There is no Iur interface between the source and target RNC2. The UE is using a BE PS RAB at a bit rate above a preset threshold



7-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Inter-frequency Hard Handover

Inter-frequency Hard Handover

Overview of Inter-Frequency Hard HandoverBased on handover triggering causes, inter-frequency handover includes the following types:

• Inter-frequency handover based on coverage The UE might leave the coverage of thecurrent frequency during the movement of the UE. In this case, the RNC needs to triggeran inter-frequency handover based on coverage to avoid call drop.

• Inter-frequency handover based on load To balance the loads between inter-frequencyconcentric cells, the RNC would choose some UEs to do inter-frequency handoveraccording to user and service priorities.

• Inter-frequency handover based on speed When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) isused, cells are divided into different layers according to their coverage. Marco cell correspondsto large coverage and low priority and Micro cell corresponds to small coverage and highpriority. Inter-frequency handover can be triggered by UE speed estimation algorithm ofthe HCS. The UE with high speed is handed over to a cell with larger coverage to reducethe frequency of handover, while the UE with low speed is handed over to a cell withsmaller coverage and larger capacity to improve the system capacity.

Handover Triggering Conditions

The inter-frequency handover triggering conditions are as follows:

Inter-frequency Handover Type Triggering Conditions

Handover based on coverage UE Reporting of event 2D orperiodically measurement reporting.When receiving event 1F, the RNC will decideto try a blind handover to inter-frequency cell ifa blind handover neighboring cell is available.Note: Blind handovers only used in specificstrategic areas.

Handover based on load Load could be shared by inter-frequency cells.Estimation decision from Load Reshuffling(LDR) Algorithm Module.

Handover based on estimation decision of theUE speed in HCS

Estimation decision of the UE speed in HCS



Pub-Date

Inter-frequency Hard Handover Version 1 Rev 0


f1 f2

• Handover based on coverage

• Handover based on load

• Handover based on speed



7-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Inter-frequency Hard Handover


Handover ProcedureInter-frequency handover procedure includes the following three phases:

1. Handover measurement2. Handover decision3. Handover execution

Phase Inter-FrequencyHandover Based onCoverage

Inter-FrequencyHandover Based onLoad

Inter-FrequencyHandover Based onSpeed

Handovermeasurement

The UE reportsevent 2D. Then theRNC enables thecompressed mode andstarts inter-frequencymeasurement.Periodical reportingmode or event reportingmode can be used.When receiving event1F, the RNC will decideto try a blind handover.

The HCS speedestimation algorithminitiates a handoverprocedure. If thehandover is froma micro cell toanother macro cell,and blind handovercondition is fulfilled,the RNC performsblind handover to thetarget cell. Otherwise,the RNC enables thecompressed mode andstarts inter-frequencymeasurement.

Handover decision After UE reportsevent 2B, the RNCperforms handoverdecision. Or the UEperiodically reportsthe inter-frequencymeasurement report,and the RNC decidesthe handover afterevaluation.

The RNC performs loadreshuffling algorithmand then performs blindhandover decision.

The UE reports event2C. Then the RNCperforms handoverdecision.

Handover execution The RNC initiates ahandover procedure.

The RNC initiates ablind handover to thetarget cell.

The RNC initiates ahandover procedure.



Pub-Date

Inter-frequency Hard Handover Version 1 Rev 0




7-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Inter-RAT Hard Handover

Inter-RAT Hard HandoverThe purpose of the inter-RAT handover procedure is to, under the control of the network, transfer a UEconnection from one radio access technology (e.g. UTRAN) to another (e.g. GSM). The RNC supportsboth, handover from GSM to UTRAN and, handover from UTRAN to GSM on CS and PS domains (CellChange Order), but not simultaneously. This section covers only handover from UTRAN to GSM.

Algorithm OverviewIn order to offer worldwide coverage, the handover from UTRAN to GSM is a key feature, especiallyduring early deployment stages where islands of UMTS coverage are envisaged. The procedureis initiated from UTRAN with a RRC message HANDOVER FROM UTRAN COMMAND. Then theUE must establish the connection to GSM and release all UMTS radio resources.

When the UE works in CELL_DCH state, the UMTS GSM handover is the procedure during which theWCDMA RAN initiates handover (for CS services) or cell reselection (for PS services) to the GSM.

Based on triggering causes, UMTS to GSM handover includes:

• UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover. The coverage of UMTS s usually discontinuousat the very beginning of the network rollout. On the border, if the signal quality ofUMTS rather than GSM is poor and if all services of the UE are supported by GSM,UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover is triggered.

• UMTS to GSM load-based handover. If the load of UMTS rather than GSM is heavy and allservices of the UE are supported by GSM, UMTS GSM load-based handover is triggered.

• UMTS GSM service-based handover. Based on layered services, traffic of different classesis handed over to different systems. For example, when an Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR)speech service is requested, this call could be handed over to GSM.

UMTS to GSM Handover Triggering Conditions

• UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover. The CPICH Ec/N0 or CPICH RSCP of the UMTScell to which the UE connects is lower than the corresponding threshold. In addition, there isa GSM cell whose GSM carrier RSSI is higher than the preset threshold.

• UMTS to GSM load-based handover. The load of the UMTS cell to whichthe UE connects is higher than the threshold.

• UMTS to GSM service-based handover. When a service is established, the CoreNetwork (CN) requests a handover of the service to GSM.



Pub-Date

Inter-RAT Hard Handover Version 1 Rev 0

Inter-RAT Hard Handover

UMTS GSM

• UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover

• UMTS to GSM Load-based handover

• UMTS to GSM Service-based handover



7-19

Pub-Date



Preconditions for UMTS to GSM Handover

Overview of Preconditions

Before the UMTS GSM handover is performed, the following preconditions must be taken into account:

• Service handover indicators. The indicators are configured by CN and indicateCN policy for service handover to GSM.

• GSM cell capability. The capability, Inter-RAT cell type, of each GSM cell must beconfigured at the RNC. The parameter indicates whether the cell supports GSM, GPRS, orEDGE. It also indicates that the cell may not be supported by 2G.

• Service capability. The required 2G Capability, of each service must be configured atthe RNC. The parameter indicates whether the service is supported by GSM, GPRS, orEDGE. It also indicates that the service may not be supported by 2G.

• UE capability. The RNC obtains the capability information of a UE according to the UECAPABILITY INFORMATION reported by the UE. The information indicates whether the UEsupports GSM, GPRS, or EDGE. It also indicates that the UE may not be supported by 2G.

Service Handover Indicators

Among the four preconditions, service handover indicators are taken into account firstly. Anindicator is contained in the RAB assignment signalling that is delivered by the CN. Based on theindicators, the other three preconditions, and the handover types (UMTS to GSM handover basedon coverage/load/service), the RNC decides whether to perform inter-RAT handover.

There are the following service handover indicators:

• Handover to GSM should be performed• Handover to GSM should not be performed• Handover to GSM shall not be performed

By default, the RNC does the following:

• For a UE with a single signalling RAB, the handover to GSM is not allowed.• For the UE accessing combined services (with CS services), the RNC sets the service

handover indicator of the UE to that of the CS service because the CS servicehas the highest Quality of Service (QoS) priority.

• For the UE accessing combined services (with only PS services), the RNC sets the servicehandover indicator of the UE to that of the PS service who has the highest QoS priority.



Pub-Date





7-21

Pub-Date


Inter-RAT Hard HandoverGSM Cell Capability

With the Inter-RAT cell type capability, the RNC decides whether to start inter-RAT measurement.

Service Capability

For combined services, the RNC selects the Required 2G Capability parameterrequired by the RAB that has the highest priority.

UE Capability

With the UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION, the RNC decides whether to start inter-RAT measurement.



Pub-Date



RNCRNCCNCN

Iu

Iub

RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

• Handover indicators (last slide)

UE Capabilities

Service Capabilities configured at the RNC

GSM Cell capabilities

i.e. supports GPRS/EDGE?



7-23

Pub-Date



Handover Procedures for UMTS to GSMThe UMTS to GSM handover includes the following four phases:

• Handover triggering• Handover measurement• Handover decision• Handover execution

Non coverage-based handover has two cases:

• UMTS to GSM handover based on load• UMTS to GSM handover based on service

When the UE works in CELL_FACH or CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state, the inter-RAT handover isinitiated by the UE. In this situation, the handover is the procedure for inter-RAT cell reselection.During cell reselection, the UE evaluates the quality of the existing cell on which it is camped,starts inter-RAT measurement, selects a best cell in another system according to the cellreselection criteria, and then initiates the access to GSM/GPRS/EDGE.



Pub-Date





7-25

Pub-Date



UMTS to GSM Handover Measurement

UMTS GSM handover based on coverage

After receiving a 2D event report message, the RNC performs the following:1) Decides an inter-RAT handover measurement based on coverage.2) Starts periodic controlling or 3A event triggered measurement reporting.The Inter-RAT report mode can be set to Periodic reporting or Event trigger.3) Decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover based on measurement reports from the UE. If a2F event is received, the RNC will stop inter-RAT handover measurement.

UMTS GSM handover based on load

After receiving a 3C event report message, the RNC decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover.



Pub-Date





7-27

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Hierarchical Cell Structure

Hierarchical Cell StructureIn a 3G network, the so-called hot spots in radio communications may appear with an increase ofsubscribers and traffic. This requires more cells to increase the network capacity. More cells andsmaller cell radius indicate that more frequent handovers of UEs take place. For a UE in fast speed,frequent handovers reduce call quality, increase uplink interference, and increase signaling load.

In this situation, Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is required to divide cells intodifferent hierarchies. The RNC supports the HCS with eight hierarches, typically thereare three Macro Cells, Micro Cells and Pico Cells.

The features of different cells are as follows:

Macro Cell:

• Large coverage• Continuous coverage networking• Low requirement on capacity• Fast-moving environment

Micro cell:

• Densely populated areas• High requirement on capacity• Slow-moving environment

Pico cell:

• Indoor coverage• Outdoor dead-area coverage.

Where, the pico cell has the highest priority and the macro cell has the lowest priority.



Pub-Date

Hierarchical Cell Structure Version 1 Rev 0

Hierarchical Cell Structure

Mac ro C ell

Mic ro C ell

P ic o C ell

Large coverage

Low capacity

F ast moving

Densely populated areas

High capacity

S low moving

Indoor C overage

Outdoor dead area coverage



7-29

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Hierarchical Cell Structure


HCS Handover OverviewThe HCS handover is divided into the following two phases.

Speed Estimation

The speed estimation on each hierarchy of an HCS cell falls into one of the following types:

• Fast speed• Normal speed• Slow speed

According to the number of changes of the best cell within a given time unit, the speed estimationalgorithm estimates the moving speed of the UEs. See details as follows:

• If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is above the fast-speed threshold,this UE is calculated to be in fast speed;

• If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is below the slow-speed threshold,this UE is calculated to be in slow speed;

• If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is between fast-speed threshold andslow-speed threshold, this UE is calculated to be in normal speed.

HCS Handover Based on Speed Estimation

After the moving speed of the UE is estimated, inter-hierarchy handover algorithm initiatesthe corresponding handover based on this speed decision.

According to the results of speed estimation:

• The UE in fast speed is handed over to the cell of lower priority;• The UE in slow speed is handed over to the cell of higher priority;• The UE in normal speed is not required to be handed over to any cell.



Pub-Date

Hierarchical Cell Structure Version 1 Rev 0


T he change of best cell (E vent 1D) is monitored for a time period and if there has been no change of best cell with that time then handover to micro cell and vice versa.



7-31

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Compressed Mode Control

Compressed Mode Control

Algorithm OverviewCompressed mode is used to allow UEs to perform inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements.The prerequisite is that the UE supports the functionality. The RNC supports compressed modein uplink, downlink and combined uplink + downlink, according to UE capabilities.

Compressed Mode (CM) operation is used when a dual mode UE (UMTS + GSM and/or DCS1800) ora dual band UE (UMTS + UMTS) nears the limit of coverage in a UMTS system that borders a GSM,DCS1800, or another UMTS system on a different frequency. The CM algorithm creates a “hole"or gap in the transmitted DL and/or UL radio frame, allowing the UE receiver to change frequencyand monitor the adjacent GSM or DCS1800 system (for inter-RAT handover) or UMTS system (forinter-frequency handover). Even though there is a gap in the transmitted frame no data is lost. All ofthe data that would normally have been sent in the frame is compressed to fit into fewer slots.

The process for compressing the data to fit into fewer than the normal 15 slots is called “timecompression". Several time compression methods are available: spreading factor reduction by2 (SF/2), puncturing (rate matching), and higher layer scheduling. Puncturing refers to applyingrate matching techniques for creating a transmission gap in a radio frame. SF/2 consists ofreducing the spreading factor by 2 during one compressed radio frame to enable transmission of theinformation bits in half of the radio frame (7.5 slots). And in the higher layer scheduling method,only a subset of the allowed TFCs are used in the compressed mode frame.

The UE can be configured with a single compressed mode pattern sequence for eachmeasurement purpose. These settings are currently established using Motorola InternalMML commands and, include the following patterns:

• For inter-frequency measurements

◦ FDD measurement

• For inter-RAT measurements

◦ GSM carrier RSSI measurement

◦ Initial BSIC identification

◦ BSIC confirmation

Depending on whether the UE needs to perform FDD measurements only, GSM measurements onlyor both, the RNC activates the appropriate gap patterns. For FDD operation only, a single “FDDmeasurement” gap is activated. For GSM operation only, three simultaneous gap patterns are activated(RSSI, BSIC_ID, and BSIC_confirmation). For combined FDD and GSM operation, three simultaneousgap patterns are used (RSSI, BSIC_ID and FDD measurement). The BSIC re-confirmation gap patternis not used when the UE needs to measure simultaneously inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboursin order to decrease the impact of compressed mode operation on quality and performance.

The compressed mode procedure is initiated by the CRNC by sending a RADIO LINKRECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the Node B with a modification of theTransmission Gap Pattern Sequence Code Information radio link parameters. On the otherhand, deactivation is achieved via the COMPRESS MODE COMMAND.



Pub-Date

Compressed Mode Control Version 1 Rev 0

Compressed Mode Control

UMTS Source Cell

UMTS Interfreq Cell

FDD Measurement Gap activated

GSM Cell

RSSI

BSIC_ID

BSIC_re-confirm

Combined

RSSI

BSIC_ID

FDD Measurement

10ms

Transmission gap available for inter-frequency measurements



7-33

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Macro Diversity

Macro DiversityMacrodiversity provides an improved error correction capability through the use of combining/splittingat the RNC and Node B. Communications will be sent via the Iur interface from the RNC in theD-RNS to the RNC in the S-RNS and on to the Iu to the core network.

This function controls the duplication/ replication of information streams to receive/ transmit the sameinformation through multiple physical channels from/ towards a single mobile terminal.

This function also controls the combining of information streams generated by a single source (diversitylink), but conveyed via several parallel physical channels (diversity sub-links). Macrodiversity controlshould interact with channel coding control in order to reduce the BER when combining the differentinformation streams. In some cases, depending on physical network configuration, there may beseveral entities that combine the different information streams, i.e. there may be combining/splittingat the S-RNC, D-RNC or Node B level. This function is located in the UTRAN.



Pub-Date

Macro Diversity Version 1 Rev 0

Macro Diversity

D-RNS

UTRAN

D-RNS

lu

RNC RNC RNC

S-RNS

Iur Iur



7-35

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 SRNS Relocation

SRNS Relocation

SRNS Relocation OverviewThe Serving RNS (SRNS) manages the connection between the UE and the UTRAN andcan be relocated. The SRNS relocation is of three types:

• Static relocation (UE not involved)• Relocation due to hard handover (UE involved)• Relocation due to cell or URA update (UE involved)

If no Iur interface exists, the relocation can be triggered only by the hard handover or cell/URA update.

Purposes

The main benefits of SRNS relocation are as follows:

When the Iur interface is involved

Relocating the SRNC to the DRNC can avoid data forwarding on the Iur interface. Thus it can reducethe bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface and the transmission delay of user plane. When theSRNC and the DRNC become independent of each other, the data of cell radio resource managementalgorithms cannot be transmitted over the Iur interface. Thus the algorithms cannot be optimized. Thisproblem can be solved by initiating the static relocation to relocate the SRNC to the CRNC.

When the Iur interface is not involved

SRNS relocation can ensure communications not interrupted when the UE movesto the coverage area of another RNC.

Static RelocationWhen the Iur interface exists, the UE may use the radio resources of one RNCand connects to the CN through another RNC.

After SRNS relocation, the Iur resources for the UE are released. The target RNC not onlyprovides radio resources for the UE but also connects the UE to the CN.

The purposes of the static SRNS relocation are as follows:

• To reduce the bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface• To reduce the transmission delay of user plane• To get the parameters of cell-level algorithms to optimize the performance



Pub-Date

SRNS Relocation Version 1 Rev 0

SRNS Relocation



7-37

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 SRNS Relocation

SRNS Relocation

Relocation Due to Hard HandoverThe relocation happens when the UE is in CELL_DCH state and moves from one RNC toanother RNC with no Iur interface connecting the two RNCs.

Relocation Due to Cell or URA UpdateThe relocation happens when the UE reselects a cell that belongs to another RNC.



Pub-Date

SRNS Relocation Version 1 Rev 0

SRNS Relocation



7-39

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Power Control

Power ControlThe power control mechanism is an essential part of cellular systems using the spread spectrumtechnique of medium access. There are important functions of power control.

First, is to support high system capacity, which is basically achieved in CDMA-based systemsby reducing the level of adverse interference. The major contribution to system interferencelevel, in uplink and downlink direction respectively, comes from simultaneous RF signaltransmissions by many UEs and adjacent Node Bs on the same frequency.

The second function of power control procedures is to preserve required radio communicationquality regardless of dynamic changes in the propagation environment resulting from themobility of UEs, the changing number of active users in the system, and the ever propagationcharacteristics of and radio channel. The quality may be defined here as low delay anderror-free transmission of digitised user data through radio channel.

One of the ways to obtain, at the same time, large system capacity and high service quality isto keep UE and Node B RF signals transmission power at the lowest possible level and adjustit dynamically upon variations of propagation conditions. The more accurate are UE and NodeB power control mechanisms to follow real dynamic structure of RF environment, the highersystem capacity and service quality performance may be achieved.

The goal of power control in WCDMA system is thus dynamic interference control,rather than wide coverage area support.

The UE and UTRAN power control procedures use different sources of feedback information on temporalpropagation channel condition in the process of adjusting their transmitted signals power levels.



Pub-Date

Power Control Version 1 Rev 0

Power ControlPower Control Concept

• To Support High System Capacity by reducing the level of Interference.• To Preserve The Required Radio Communication Quality Resulting From:

◦ Changes to the Propagating Environment due to UE Mobility

◦ Changes to the number of active users

◦ Changes to the Propagating Characteristics of the Radio Channel

Three Types of Power Control

• Open Loop Power Control• Inner Closed Loop Power Control• Outer Closed Loop Power Control



7-41

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Open Loop Power Control

Open Loop Power ControlIn UTRAN, open loop power control is applied only immediately prior toinitiating a transmission on the PRACH.

The UE determines an estimation of the downlink pathloss between the base station and theUE by measuring the UTRA carrier received signal strength at the mobile. Through the mediumof the System Information messages on the P-CCPCH, the UE will also have access to certaincell parameters, such as Cell ERP, Cell size, receiver sensitivity, etc.

Form this information the UE will calculate the required mean output power level required toachieve the access requirements of the cell it wishes to connect to. The UE will now send itsfirst RACH Pre-amble at this calculated value. If no positive or negative acquisition indicatoris detected, the UE will increase its power by the required power-ramping factor, (cell definedparameter), and send a second RACH Pre-amble. This process will be repeated until anacknowledgement is received, or the max retries value is exceeded.

If a positive Ack is received, the UE will again adjust its output power, according to an offset valuenotified by the cell, and transmit the RACH message part. On receipt of the RACH Message part, theUTRAN can accurately calculate the uplink path loss and initiate the use of closed loop power control.



Pub-Date

Open Loop Power Control Version 1 Rev 0

Open Loop Power Control

UE monitors Common Pilotand Broadcast information, and calculates DL path Loss

Only used prior to initial transmission on PRACH

Using DL path loss as"perceived" UL pathloss, UE calculates TXpower O/P requiredaccess network



7-43

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)The objective of Closed loop power control is to maintain the the received signal strength, at thebase station, for all UEs at the same average level. As all UEs in a cell transmit on the samefrequency, a single overpowered mobile could block a whole cell to other users.

The uplink inner-loop power control adjusts the UE transmit power in order to keep the receiveduplink Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIR) at a given SIR Target (SIRtarget). The serving cells(cells in the active set) should Estimate Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIRest) of the uplink,using the received pilot symbols in each uplink uplink timeslot.

The serving cells should then generate TPC commands and transmit the commands once perslot, using the TPC symbols in each time slot, according to the following rule: if SIRest > SIRtarget

then the TPC command to transmit is "0", while if SIRest < SIRtarget then the TPC commandto transmit is "1". The UE uses this information to derive TPC_cmd.

After deriving of the TPC_cmd, the UE shall adjust the transmit power of the uplinkwith a step Δ (in dB) which is given by:

D = DTPC × TPC_cmd.

The step size ΔTPC is a layer 1 parameter which is derived from the UE-specific higher-layerparameter "TPC-StepSize" which is under the control of the UTRAN. If "TPC-StepSize" has thevalue "dB1", then the layer 1 parameter ΔTPC shall take the value 1dB and if "TPC-StepSize"has the value "dB2", then ΔTPC shall take the value 2dB.

A similar process is used in the downlink, to control the relative power weighting tobe applied to each downlink dedicated channel.



Pub-Date

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) Version 1 Rev 0

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

UE monitors DL Signal toInterference Ratio (SIR)And compares againstTarget SIR level

Inner Loop Power Control command rate is 1500Hz

UE sends Transmit Power Control (TPC)information to Node B, adjusting Node Btransmit power output in an attempt toacheive target SIR



7-45

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Directed Retry

Directed RetryThe Directed Retry Decision (DRD) algorithm includes three components:

• RRC Retry Decision algorithm• Redirection algorithm• RAB Retry Decision algorithm

Within the UTRAN, a UE can take on one of two connection modes: namely, RRC connectedmode and idle mode. When a UE wants to establish an RRC connection it must first send an RRCCONNECTION SETUP REQUEST message to the UTRAN (RNC). At this stage of the call set-upprocess, the objective of the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST is to establish an SRB on a DCH. Toinvoke the DRD algorithm, the UE should include a RACH measurement report (containing the CPICHEcNo measurements of several neighbour/candidate cells). This list of candidate cells is then ranked indescending order, based on the EcNo measurements. If the UE cannot establish an RRC connectionwith its preferred cell, the candidate list is then sequentially examined in a top-down manner until asuitable cell is obtained. If none of the cells in the list satisfy the criteria of the RRC Retry Decisionalgorithm, the UE fails in its attempt to establish an RRC connection and the Redirection algorithmis invoked. If on the other hand the UE is successful in its attempt to establish the requested RRCconnection, the CN then initiates the RAB assignment procedure. If the assignment procedure isnot successful, the RAB Retry Decision algorithm is invoked. The DRD algorithm can be triggeredby both UE originating and terminating calls. The Figure opposite illustrates the RRC and RABestablishment procedures incorporating the three components of the DRD algorithm.



Pub-Date

Directed Retry Version 1 Rev 0

Directed Retry

UE RNC

RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

(Containing RACH Measurement Report)

RRC CONNECTION SETUP

(Containing (New) Cell Information)

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

CN

RRC DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE

RRC Retry

Decision Algorithm

RAB Retry

Decision Algorithm

Redirection Algorithm

UE RNC

RRC CONNECTION REQUEST

(Containing RACH Measurement Report)

RRC CONNECTION SETUP

(Containing (New) Cell Information)

RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE

CN

RRC DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP DIRECT TRANSFER

RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST

RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE

RRC Retry

Decision Algorithm

RRC Retry

Decision Algorithm

RAB Retry

Decision Algorithm

RAB Retry

Decision Algorithm

Redirection Algorithm



7-47

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC)

Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC)Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) includes the following two parts.

Rate Re-allocationUpsize and downsize the data rate of the Best Effort (BE) services, (i.e. interactiveand background) in the CELL_DCH RRC state.

Dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH)according to the traffic volume which reflects the state of data transmission.

Dynamically adjust the bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH) according tothe quality of radio link due to coverage.

Dynamically adjust the bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH) according to the load congestion.This part of the algorithm works in conjunction with the load control mechanism.

UE State TransitionSwitch the UE state to the CELL_FACH and CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state when theUE inactivity is detected, and back to CELL_DCH state when the UE activity isdetected because there is data to be transmitted.

MeasurementsThe traffic volume measurement executed by UEs are used in the uplink bandwidth re-allocationprocess and the UE state transition to improve the resource utilization.

The downlink Transmitted Code Power (TCP) measurements executed by NodeBs areused in the downlink rate re-allocation to keep the link stability.

The Traffic Volume Measurements (TVMs) executed by RNC are used in the downlink bandwidthre-allocation process and the UE state transition to improve the resource utilization.

PurposeThe DCCC is to improve the performance of the network resource utilization and to keepthe link stability. This is done in three keys ways as listed below:

• In the downlink and uplink, the DCCC re-allocates the bandwidth based on the trafficvolume measurement. In this way, the DCCC algorithm makes efficient use of the resourcesuch as the OVSF code resources, the Channel Element (CE) resources of the NodeBand the transmission resources on the Iub and the Iur interfaces.

• In the downlink, the DCCC downgrades the data rate if the link quality deteriorates,in order to prevent the call drop.

• The state of the UE can transit from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH, or from CELL_FACHto CELL_PCH/URA_PCH. In the state of CELL_FACH or the CELL_PCH/URA_PCH,the resources of the network and the UE battery can be saved.



Pub-Date

Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) Version 1 Rev 0

Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC)

Rate Re-allocation

• Control of BE services

• Adjust DCH rate based on data throughput

• Adjust DCH rate based on link quality

• Adjust DCH rate based on congestion

UE State Transition

Switch the UE state based on activity

UL TVM taken in

UE

RNC

NodeB

DL TCP Taken in NodeB

DL TVM taken in the

RNC



7-49

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Load Control

Load ControlThe WCDMA system is a self interference system. With the load of the system increasing,the interference rises. If the interference is high enough, it affects the coverage and QoSof established services. Therefore, capacity, coverage and Quality of Service (QoS) ofthe WCDMA system are mutually affected. The purpose of load control is to maximizesystem capacity while ensuring the coverage and QoS.

In different phases of UE access as shown in the diagram below, different loadcontrol algorithms are used as follows:

• Before UE access: Potential User Control (PUC) and Cell Breathing• During UE access: Call Admission Control (CAC) and Intelligent Access Control (IAC)• After UE access: Load Reshuffling (LDR), and Overload Control (OLC).

In addition, functional load control algorithms vary according to the load levels ofthe cell, as shown in the slide opposite.



Pub-Date

Load Control Version 1 Rev 0

Load Control

1. Before UE access 2. During UE access 3. After UE access

PUC CAC

IAC

LDR

OLC

time

CELL BREATHING



7-51

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Overview of Load Control

Overview of Load ControlThe load control algorithm is built into the RNC. The input of load control comes fromthe measurement information taken from the NodeB.

Load control has the following sub-features:

• PUC — The function of PUC is to balance traffic load among inter-frequency cells. Bymodifying cell selection and reselection parameters and broadcasting them throughsystem information, PUC leads UEs to cells with light load. The UEs may be in idlemode, CELL_FACH state, CELL_PCH state, or URA_PCH state.

• Cell Breathing — This feature is also know as intra-frequency load balancing. Thetechnique alters the power level of the CPICH to either capture more traffic is theloading is light or push traffic away if the loading is high.

• CAC — The function of CAC is to decide on resource requests from UEs, such as access,reconfiguration, and handover requests, according to the resource status of the cell.

• IAC — The purpose of IAC is to increase the access success rate with the current QoSassured through rate negotiation, queuing, pre-emption, and DRD.

• LDR — The function of LDR is to reduce the load of a cell when the availableresource of the cell reaches the specified alarm threshold. The purpose of LDR is toincrease the access success rate in the following ways:

◦ Inter-frequency load handover

◦ BE service rate reduction

◦ AMR voice service rate reduction

◦ Uncontrolled realtime traffic QoS renegotiation

◦ CS inter-system load handover

◦ PS inter-system load handover

• OLC — The function of OLC is to reduce the cell load rapidly by restricting the TransportFormat (TF) of the BE service or releasing UEs when the cell is overloaded. The purposeof OLC is to ensure the stability of the system and the QoS of most UEs.



Pub-Date

Overview of Load Control Version 1 Rev 0

Overview of Load ControlNodeB transmit power (noise)

Cell Load (number of subscribers)

PUC starts: to enable UEs in idle mode to camp on cells with light load Cell breathing starts: to switch loads of hot spot cells to othe r cells LDR starts: to check and release initial congestion in cells

Load control is unneeded

CAC: to prevent new calls into cells with heavy loadDRD starts: to enable rejected UEs toretry neighbouring cells or GSM cells

OLC starts: to reduce the TFs of BEsubscribers, and release some UEs forcibly



7-53

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Overview of Load Control




Pub-Date

HSDPA Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 8

HSDPA Overview



8-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Overview




Pub-Date


ObjectivesOn completion of this chapter the Student will be able to:

• Describe the important changes and characteristics of HSDPA• State the new channels of HSDPA and how they operate in principle• Describe the extended UTRAN protocol stack with HSDPA• State the advantages and disadvantages of HSDPA and future enhancements



8-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMAHSDPA considers the trend that the volume of IP-based traffic has already exceeded that forcircuit-switched traffic in most fixed networks. The same change can be anticipated in mobile networksbecause of new IP-based mobile services becoming available and are used by increasing number ofpeople in their daily communication. Current estimates show that in advanced mobile communicationmarkets, packet-switched traffic will overtake circuit-switched traffic in the near future. Deliveryof digital content over mobile networks will generate additional traffic and revenue.

Feature StudyThe HSDPA feature in 3GPP Release 5 is the result of a study carried out in the Release 4time frame. This study considered a number of techniques in order to provide instantaneoushigh speed data in the downlink. Some of the considerations and goals taken intoaccount in the evaluation of the different techniques were:

• To focus on the streaming, interactive and background services: services whichrequire a constant and/high throughput or low error rate.

• To prioritise urban environments and then indoor deployments (but not limited tothese environments and supporting full mobility).

• To enable compatibility with advanced antenna and receiver techniques: transmit andreceive diversity methods are used and might be enhanced

• To take into account User Equipment processing time and memory requirements:UE’s limitations are taken into account by the network

• To minimize changes on existing techniques and architecture: modest changesto NodeB hardware and UTRAN software

Compatibility with Release ‘99HSDPA is designed to co-exist on the same carrier as the current Release ’99 WCDMA services,enabling a smooth and cost-efficient introduction of HSDPA into existing WCDMA networks.

Demand for Packet Switched TrafficThe increasing demand for capacity in order to provide high data rate multimedia services inwireless environments necessitates enhanced radio transmission techniques and network protocolfunctionality. Such techniques have to be added to already existing mobile cellular networks. For3rd generation UMTS networks based on WCDMA, the HSDPA is being introduced to meet thisdemand and improve spectral efficiency by higher order modulation using 16-QAM.

Note: HSDPA achieves gross data rates in downlink up to 14 Mbit/s under idealconditions. The reverse link (uplink) may remain on 64 kbit/s unless the operator decidesto use High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA).



Pub-Date

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA



8-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Targets

HSDPA Targets

Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background ServicesHSDPA is a feature based on a downlink shared channel that allows user net-data rates of up to10 Mbit/s. It is designed to support services that require instantaneous high rates in the downlinkand lower rates on the uplink. This feature also decreases the level of retransmissions (at theradio link and hence higher layers), in turn allowing the reduction of delivery time. Examples ofend-user services targeted by HSDPA are internet browsing and video on demand.

Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory RequirementsHSDPA takes UE limitations like available physical memory for transmission and especially forretransmission into account. Also the physical channel processing capability is considered.(Examples: Minimum inter-TTI interval, transport channel bits per TTI)

Higher Spectrum EfficiencyWith 16-QAM applied in downlink, throughput rates can be doubled compared to QPSK whichis used for Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 physical channels. The amount of bits/Hz is increased with16-QAM as one modulation symbol corresponds to 4 chips whereas in QPSK one modulationsymbol represents 2 chips. Even when HSDPA is using QPSK modulation the spectrum efficiencyincreases as HSDPA exploits good C/I conditions. This is achieved by reducing the protection(increasing the code rate) and thus having more capacity for the application data.

Small Changes to existing Techniques and ArchitecturesHSDPA minimizes the necessary upgrades and changes in UTRAN and UE.Nevertheless some protocol additions are necessary in NodeB and UE as well someenhancements of existing procedures and protocols.

Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among UsersHSDPA introduces a new transport channel type that makes efficient use of valuable radio frequencyresources. Beside this, it takes into account the bursty nature of packet switched data by sharingthe channelization codes, transmission power and infrastructure hardware among users.



Pub-Date

HSDPA Targets Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA Targets



8-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Characteristics

HSDPA CharacteristicsHigh Speed Downlink Packet Access comes with certain characteristics whichdistinguishes it clearly from Rel. ’99 UTRAN.

Modulation TypesQPSK is already known from Rel. ’99 UTRAN. Besides QPSK, HSDPA incorporates the16-QAM modulation to increase the peak data rates for users served under favorable radioconditions. Support for QPSK is mandatory, though the support for 16-QAM is optional for thenetwork and UE. 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) was newly introduced in Rel .5with HSDPA. It is a so called higher order modulation which basically doubles the data rate ingood radio conditions. Thus it increases the spectrum efficiency of WCDMA.

Higher Throughput RatesHDSPA supports peak throughput rates far beyond 2 Mbit/s when radio conditions are suitable andtherefore it satisfies the demand for instantaneous high throughput of packet switched services e.g.streaming or interactive traffic class. Theoretically, under optimum condition (Code Rate of 1:1) thefollowing maximum throughput can be achieved: (with 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)and 15 channelization codes simultaneously used) 960kbit/s x 15 = 14.4 Mbit/s

AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding)AMC is a key feature of HSDPA allowing adjustment of modulation between QPSK and 16-QAMaccording to radio conditions and retransmission ratio. In addition a variable code rate is used toflexibly adapt the data rate to the physical channel capacity depending on the UE’s downlink C/I..

Hybrid ARQHARQ functionality combines retransmission with the original transmissions. There a twodifferent ways for HARQ to operate. Either identical retransmission of the data block are sentor retransmission are not identical and differ in data and parity bits compared to the originaltransmission. The first method is known as chase combining and, the latter as incrementalredundancy . HARQ operates on an N-channel Stop and Wait principle.

Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeBAll Rel. ’99 transport channels are terminated at the RNC, except BCH; hence the retransmissionprocedure for packet data is located in the serving RNC. In order to maximize throughput and reducedelays when retransmitting, additional intelligence is put into the NodeB. In this way, retransmissionis controlled by the NodeB, leading to faster retransmission and therefore shorter delay for packetdata services. A scheduler in NodeB evaluates for different users what the radio channel conditionsare, how much data is pending for each user, how much time has passed since a particular userwas last served, for which user retransmission are pending etc. From this input data the schedulerin NodeB may derive a decision how to assign resources to certain users.



Pub-Date

HSDPA Characteristics Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA Characteristics



8-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation

QPSK versus 16-QAM ModulationThe figure illustrates the I/Q Plane for QPSK and 16-QAM modulation technique.

QPSKEach symbol corresponds to 2 consecutive input bits. The four symbols are representedby different phase shifts in the I/Q plane.

16–QAMEach symbol corresponds to four consecutive input bits. Thus the data rate can be doubled with16-QAM compared to QPSK. The 16 symbols are represented in the I/Q plane by different phaseshifts and amplitudes. In 16-QAM modulation the symbol value is determined by phase andamplitude. Compared to that, in QPSK the phase is only modulated and variation in amplitudehave only minor influence on the decision space in the I/Q diagram. However with 16-QAM thedecision space is heavily influenced by amplitude variations, thus higher constraints are put onthe transmitter linearity. Note, a more accurate phase estimate is necessary with 16-QAM sinceconstellation points have smaller differences in phase domain compared to QPSK.

Note: The number of constellation points in the I/Q-diagram can be calculated with 2m,where m represents the number of bits or chips per modulation symbol. QPSK modulationhas four constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 4 ⇔ m = 2. 16-QAM modulationhas 16 constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 16 ⇔ m = 4



Pub-Date

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation Version 1 Rev 0

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation



8-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Maximum Throughput Rates

Maximum Throughput RatesThe formulas opposite consider the physical maximum throughput rates available in FDD modeof WCDMA according to releases and modulation. In Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 only QPSK is usedwhereas Rel. 5 allows also to user higher order modulation scheme 16-QAM. The standard chiprate is 3.84 Mchips/s across all releases. The slot duration is in all releases 0.67ms correspondingto 2560 chips. Note that the physical maximum chip rate achievable with 3.84 Mchips/s andQPSK modulation is: 2 chips/symbol x 3.84 Mchips/s = 7.68 Mchips/s

UMTS Rel’. 99 / Rel. 4Downlink:

⇒ In the downlink, the DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed onto I and Q plane so theDPDCH data rate also depends on the DPCCH data rate. The physical maximum bit rate(ignoring losses due to DPCCH) using spreading factor ‘4’ is 5.76 Mbit/s.

⇒ The downlink slot format # 16 allows for 1248 DPDCH bits/slot and per physical channel.

⇒ The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 3 spreading codes @ sf4 is: 1248bits/slot x 15 slots x (3 OVSF’s) = 5.616 Mbit/s

Uplink:

⇒ In the uplink each channel DPDCH and DPCCH is assigned an orthogonal channelizationcode. As both physical channels are I/Q multiplexed, (i.e. separated onto I and Q phases),the maximum physical data rate has to be calculated with 1 bit/symbol.

⇒ The uplink slot format # 6 allows for 640 bits/slot.

⇒ The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 6 spreading codes @ sf4 is therefore: 5.76 Mbit/s.

HSDPA – Rel. 5In HSDPA the spreading factor for the user plane is fixed to ‘16’. Thus up to 15 physicalchannels can be allocated at maximum per UE.

⇒ QPSK:

⇒ The downlink slot format # 0 allows for 320 bits/slot and per physical channel.This results in 960 bits/ 2 ms subframe.

⇒ The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 7.2 Mbit/s.

16-QAM

⇒ The downlink slot format #1 allows for 640 bits/slot and per physical channel.This results in 1920 bits/ 2 ms subframe.

⇒ The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 14.4 Mbit/s.



Pub-Date

Maximum Throughput Rates Version 1 Rev 0

Maximum Throughput Rates

UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel 4

Downlink

2 bits/symbol x [3.84 Mcps / (4 chips/symbol)] x (3 OVSF's) = 5.76 Mbits/S

Uplink


HSDPA Rel. 5

QPSK


16-QAM




8-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Important Changes for HSDPA

Important Changes for HSDPAHSDPA involves significant changes in the UTRAN providing a high flexibility to reactto changing air-interface conditions or variable user QoS.

New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPAThe TTI (Transmission Time Interval) in HSDPA has been reduced to 2 ms in order to be fasterin retransmitting erroneous data blocks compared to the minimum TTI of 10 ms in UTRA-FDD.Another advantage of the shorter TTI in HSDPA is that NodeB can adapt literally every datablock to fast changing radio conditions by the means of AMC. Thus it is possible to counteractfading on the air-interface by adjusting modulation and coding every 2 ms.

New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPANew channels are introduced for HSDPA: HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, HS-DPCCH and HS-DSCH.

No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading FactorWith HSDPA, two of the most fundamental features of WCDMA, fast power control and variablespreading factor are disabled and replaced by AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding). Note:AMC uses multicode operation (the UE can use more than one channelization code in parallel)in order to increase the data rate for a certain user and adapts the code rate to the air-interfacequality. By these means AMC is able to improve the user throughput or at least keep it constanteven the downlink channel quality deteriorates between subsequent transmissions.

New UE Capabilities / CategoriesThe HSDPA feature is optional for both UE and network in Rel. 5. The UE indicates itsHSDPA support and its HS-DSCH physical layer category within the radio access capabilityparameter.. The physical layer category defines among other parameters the maximumnumber of channelization codes the UE supports in parallel for multicode operation. A UEmay support up to 5, 10 or 15 channelization codes in parallel.

New MAC-hs in NodeB and UEThe implementation of Medium Access Control (MAC-hs) in NodeB and UE is a pre-requisitefor allowing the NodeB to schedule transmissions and retransmission, to maintain the HSDPAspecific channels and to operate with AMC and Hybrid ARQ.

Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol ProcedureNBAP procedures need to support HSDPA capability and HSDPA related parameters. The increasedbandwidth needs to be supported by the frame protocol. Among other parameters the frame protocolneeds to cater for HSDPA flow control information, priority queue handling and UE capability information.



Pub-Date

Important Changes for HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

Important Changes for HSDPA



8-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 New Channels with HSDPA

New Channels with HSDPAThe support of HSDPA is based on several new physical channels and one new transport channel.

Transport Channel:

HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel)

The HS-DSCH is the actual transport resource carrying the packet data of the user applications.As it also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms, it allows for short round trip delay in theoperation between NodeB and UE. The 2 ms TTI is short when compared to 10, 20, 40 or80 ms TTI’s supported by Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 transport channels. HS-DSCH describes thephysical layer processing by MAC-hs of a HSDPA transport block.

⇒ Dynamic part: TB size = TBS size {1 to 200 000 bits with 8 bit granularity}; modulationscheme {QPSK, 16-QAM}; redundancy / constellation version {1 … 8}.

⇒ Static part: TTI {2 ms for FDD}; type of channel coding {turbo coding}; mothercode rate {1/3}, CRC size {24 bits}

⇒ No semi-static attributes are defined for HS-DSCH.

Physical Channels

High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)

The HS-SCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘128’ and is configured only in the downlinkdirection. It also adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. In theory, up to 127 HS-SCCH’s can be configuredin a cell. However, the UE is required only to be able to listen to up to four HS-SCCH in parallel.The HS-SCCH allows the efficient sharing of one or more HS-PDSCH’s among different users.Nevertheless every UE needs to be informed on the DCCH via RRC messages about the specificHS-SCCH-set that it shall monitor in order to receive data via the HS-PDSCH’s.

High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH)

The HS-PDSCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘16’. Thus, it provides for multicode operationusing up to 15 channelization codes in parallel. Of course the UE must support the use of up to 15channelization codes which depends on its category. The HS-PDSCH adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms.

Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH Transmission (Uplink HS-DPCCH).

The HS-DPCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘256’ and is only configured in uplink direction.The HS-DPCCH also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Its purpose is to provide feedbackinformation about the downlink receive quality and whether the packet data received by the UEare error-free or need to be retransmitted. Thus the NodeB is quickly notified of unsuccessfultransmissions and/or changing radio conditions in downlink direction.



Pub-Date

New Channels with HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

New Channels with HSDPA

Transport Channels

Physical Channels



8-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Future Enhancements of HSDPA

Future Enhancements of HSDPAUMTS UTRA FDD aims to support a variety of multiple antenna transmission techniques inorder to enhance coverage, system throughput and spectral efficiency of HSDPA. A majoraim of using multiple antenna transmission in macro-cellular environments is to increase thecoverage ratio at medium and higher data rates, let’s say 2 Mbit/s and beyond. In a typicaldeployment, two to four or more transmit antennas might be used per sector.

BeamformingBeamforming makes use of adaptive antennas and can therefore provide a better C/I to UEs inthe downlink. At the same time beamforming allows re-use of scarce downlink channelizationcodes as the individual UEs are separated in space and possibly through different downlinkscrambling codes, thus making use of secondary scrambling codes. The signals toward differentUEs from the same cell are typically transmitted under the same primary scrambling code andseparated by means of orthogonal channelization codes. However, some of the beams may betransmitted under a secondary scrambling code with its associated channelization code tree, therebyincreasing the resources in the cell. Note that the loss of the reduced orthogonality betweenprimary and secondary scrambling code can be partly mitigated in the case of beamforming bysplitting the cell into multiple scrambling code regions, so the spatial isolation between beamsusing different scrambling codes helps to compensate the lack of orthogonality.

Transmit DiversityThe downlink capacity could be improved by using receive antenna diversity in the UE. However forsmall and cheap mobiles it is not feasible to use two antennas and receiver chains. Therefore, theWCDMA standard already supports the use of base station transmit diversity in Rel. ’99. There aretwo modes: open loop (TSTD and STTD) and closed loop mode (mode1 with phase adjustment onlyand mode 2 with phase and amplitude adjustment). The open loop mode simply transmits the codedinformation from two antennas, but on the diversity antenna the bits are time reversed and complexconjugated. The STTD method provides two kinds of diversity. The physical separation of the antennasprovides space diversity and the time difference derived from a bit-reversing process provides for timediversity, thus the decoding in the receiver becomes more reliable. The closed loop mode can only beapplied to the downlink channel, if there is an associated uplink channel. Thus this mode can only beused with dedicated channels (DPCH, PDSCH or HS-PDSCH with an associated uplink DPCCH).

MIMOWith MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) at the transmitter, x independent data streams are transmittedout of the x antennas on the same frequency band. At the receiver, each antenna receives all of thetransmitted sub-streams superimposed, not separately. If multipath scattering is sufficient, these x datastreams have different spatial signatures to each of the e.g. p receive antennas and they are separable,the signals arrive with different phases. When a transmitter has x antennas and the receiver has pantennas, the link speed increases linearly with min (x,p) given the same power and bandwidth budget.



Pub-Date

Future Enhancements of HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

Future Enhancements of HSDPA



8-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Future Enhancements of HSDPA




Pub-Date

HSUPA Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 9

HSUPA Overview



9-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSUPA Overview




Pub-Date

Chapter Objectives Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter Objectives• Describe the key technologies used in HSUPA• Describe the RAN architecture impacts• Describe the HSUPA transport and physical channels• Describe the different TTIs available for HSUPA



9-3

Pub-Date


IntroductionAfter the first release of HSDPA in 3GPP R5 in mid 2002 work started on the High SpeedUplink Packet Access (HSUPA) and over the course of the next 3 years the conceptmaterialized into the specifications and was realized in 3GPP R6.

HSUPA vs R99 DCHHSUPA is not a standalone feature, but uses the basic features of R99 to operate. Cell selection,randon access and basic mobility features etc are used and remain unchanged with HSUPA operation.The change occurs in the way the user data is delivered from the UE to the NodeB on the uplink.

HSUPA provides a flexible path beyond the 384 kbps uplink which is the realistic maximum beforeHSUPA. A similar technology to that of HSDPA is being used by introducing fast uplink HARQ,NodeB based uplink scheduling and easier multicode transmission than that of R99.

Key TechnologiesThe new uplink transport channel Enhanced DCH (E-DCH) brings some of the same features to theuplink as the HSDPA with its new transport channel HS-DSCH to the downlink. The E-DCH supportsfast NodeB based scheduling,fast physical layer HARQ with incremental redundancy and at USR7a shorter 2ms TTI. E-DCH is not a shared channel like HSDPA, but it is in fact a dedicated channeland can therefore support technologies like fast power control, variable SFand soft handovers.

Uplink Scheduling

The uplink scheduling mechanism is of central importance for HSUPA. The uplink scheduler islocated in the Node B close to the air interface in a similar way as HSDPA.

Task of the uplink scheduler is to control the uplink resources the UEs in the cell are using. Thescheduler therefore grants maximum allowed transmit power ratios to each UE. This effectivelylimits the transport block size the UE can select and thus the uplink data rate.

The scheduling mechanism is based on absolute and relative grants. The absolute grants are used toinitialize the scheduling process and provide absolute transmit power ratios to the UE, whereas therelative grants are used for incremental up- or downgrades of the allowed transmit power.

Note that one UE has to evaluate scheduling commands possibly from different radio links.This is due to the fact that uplink macro diversity is used in HSUPA.

Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ)

The HARQ protocol is a retransmission protocol improving robustness against link adaptationerrors. The Node B can request retransmissions of erroneously received data packets and willsend for each packet either an Acknowledgement (ACK) or a Negative Acknowledgement(NACK) to the UE. Furthermore, the Node B can do soft combining, i.e. combine theretransmissions with the original transmissions in the receiver.

Due to uplink macro diversity, one UE has to evaluate ACK/NACK information for thesame packet possibly from different radio links.

Reduction of Transmission Time Interval

To accelerate packet scheduling and reduce latency, HSUPA allows for a reduced TTI of 2 mscorresponding to 3 timeslots. A WCDMA radio frame of 10 ms therefore consists of 5 subframes.

Unlike HSDPA, however, the support of this 2 ms TTI in the UE is not mandatory.Instead, it is a UE capability. It is configured at call setup whether 2 ms TTI or 10ms TTI is to be used for HSUPA transmission.



Pub-Date


Introduction

RNCRNCCNCN

Iu

Iub

NodeB

• Variable SF

• HARQ

• BTS Based Scheduling

• Fast Power Control

• Soft Handover

• TTI Length of 2 (USR7) and 10ms

20 Users Per Cell

1.44 Mbps Per UserUSR 6 60 Users Per Cell

5.76 Mbps Per UserUSR 7



9-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture

Impact on Radio Access Network ArchitectureBoth the uplink scheduling and the HARQ protocol are located in the Node B, in order to moveprocessing closer to air interface and be able to react faster on the radio link situation.

Macro diversity is exploited for HSUPA, i.e. the uplink data packets can be received by more than 1cell. There is one serving cell controlling the serving radio link assigned to the UE. The serving cell ishaving full control of the scheduling process and is providing the absolute grant to the UE. The servingradio link set is a set of cells contains at least the serving cell and possibly additional radio links fromthe same Node B. The UE can receive and combine one relative grant from the serving radio link set.

There can also be additional non-serving radio links at other Node Bs. The UE can have zero, oneor several non-serving radio links and receive one relative grant from each of them.

Different Node Bs will deliver correctly received data packets to the RNC. Therefore someselective combining functionality is needed in the RNC to sort out duplicates.

CN

UTRAN Radio Network Controller (RNC)

• Selective Combining

Node B (of serving radio link set):

• Scheduling: absolute/relative grants;

• HARQ: Soft-combining, generation of ACK/NACK

Node B (of non-serving radio link set):

• Scheduling: absolute/relative grants;

• HARQ: Soft-combining, generation of ACK/NACK

HSUPA Protocol ArchitectureThe HSUPA related functionalities in Node B and RNC are also reflected in the protocolarchitecture as shown in the slide opposite (Serving and Controlling RNC are the same).New protocol entities are highlighted by shading).

Node B contains a new MAC entity called MAC-e, and the RNC contains a new MAC entity calledMAC-es. Both MAC-e and MAC-es entities terminate within the MAC layer of the UE.



Pub-Date

Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture



9-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 HSUPA Channels

HSUPA ChannelsAs said before, HSUPA is a new uplink transport channel, E-DCH, which supports enhancedfeatures to those of the uplink transport channels of R99. Uplink transport channel processingfor E-DCH is similar to the processing of the uplink DCH with two exceptions. There can be onlyone E-DCH transport channel in the UE, unlike DCHs that are multiplexed together to a SingleCoded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH) of DCH type. Nevertheless, the MAC layer canmultiplex multiple parallel services to the single E-DCH. The other significant difference is HARQsupport for the E-DCH which is provided in the transport channel processing chain.

After transport channel processing, the E-DCH maps to one or multiple parallel new dedicated physicaldata channels – E-DPDCHs – for physical layer transmission. This is completely parallel to uplink DCHprocessing chain and physical channels, so both E-DCH and DCH can coexist in the same UE with therestriction that the maximum DCH data rate is 64 kbps when the E-DCH is configured.

Using E-DPDCH transmissions a simultaneous and parallel control channel is sent a separatecode channel – E-DPCCH. This E-DPCCH transmits all the necessary information about theE-DPDCH that is needed in order to know how to receive the data channel.

In the downlink, 3 new channels are introduced for control purposes:

• E-AGCH: E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel carrying absolute grants;• E-RGCH: E-DCH Relative Grant Channel carrying relative grants;• E-HICH: E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel carrying ACK/NACK.

E-AGCH is only transmitted from the serving cell. E-RGCH and E-HICH are transmitted from radiolinks that are part of the serving radio link set and from non-serving radio links.

Note that HSUPA channels are added on top of uplink / downlink dedicated channels. EachUE therefore additionally carries an uplink and downlink Dedicated Physical Channel (DPCH).In the downlink, a Fractional Dedicated Channel (F-DPCH) can be used alternatively. TheF-DPCH has been introduced in 3GPP release 6 in order to optimize the downlink channelizationcode usage. With this concept, several UEs can share one downlink channelization code of SF256. For this purpose, the F-DPCH uses a new slot format only containing the Transmit PowerControl (TPC) bits. Unlike the regular downlink DPCH slot formats, no pilot or data fields arepresent. By assigning a UE specific timing offset, it is possible to multiplex up to 10 UEs ontoone channelization code for FDPCH. The F-DPCH is available in USR7.



Pub-Date

HSUPA Channels Version 1 Rev 0

HSUPA Channels

Node B withnon-serving E-DCH radio link

Node B withserving E-DCH radio link set

E-DCH Relative Grant Channel – Relative grants

E-DCH Relative Grant Channel – Relative grants

E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel – ACK/NACK

E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel – ACK/NACK

E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel – Absolute grants

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel – Uplink data

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel – Uplink data

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel – Uplink RSN, E-TFCI, Happy Bit

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel – Uplink RSN, E-TFCI, Happy Bit



9-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E-DCH Transport Channel Processing

E-DCH Transport Channel ProcessingTransport channel processing is the functionality that transforms the transport blocks delivered by theMAC layer to bits transmitted on physical channels. The diagram below shows the overview of DCHand E-DCH transport channel processing from the MAC layer to the physical channels.

A single E-DCH transport channel processing chain always gets one transport block to process fortransmission in one TTI, because – for the DCH – a set of transport blocks for each configuredDCH will be delivered to the processing chain. In the slide opposite the differences between theelements of transport channel processing chains for the E-DCH and DCH are illustrated:

• CRC attachment for the E-DCH always attaches a 24-bit CRC to the transportblock received fromthe MAC layer. In comparison, the CRC length for the DCH isconfigurable and can be 0, 8, 12, 16, or 24 bits.

• Code block segmentation for the E-DCH splits its input into equal size code blocks so that thelength of the block does not exceed 5114 bits. For the DCH the same block first concatenates thetransport block set to a single block of data before splitting. Also the size of the maximum code blockwith the DCH depends on the coding in use (5114 for turbo-coding and 504 for convolutional coding).

• Channel coding for the E-DCH is always turbo-coding with a code rate of 1/3. DCH channel codingmay be either convolutional coding with code rates 1/2 or 1/3 or turbocoding with a code rate of 1/3.

• Physical layer HARQ funtionality/rate matching for the E-DCH matches the channelcodes output bits to the available physical channel bits and produces the differentredundancy versions needed for incremental redundancy HARQ.

• Physical channel segmentation for the E-DCH distributes the channel bits among themultiple E-DPDCHs if more than one E-DPDCH is needed. The functionality is also thesame in the corresponding block in the DCH processing chain.

• Interleaving and physical channel mapping for the E-DCH, as well as for theDCH, interleaves the bits in the radio frame and maps the bits to be transmittedto their final positions in the physical channel.



Pub-Date

E-DCH Transport Channel Processing Version 1 Rev 0

E-DCH Transport Channel Processing



9-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH)

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH)The E-DPDCH has a very similar structure to the DPDCH of R99 with a few exceptions.They both support OVSFs to adjust the number of channel bits to the amount of dataactually being transmitted. They both could go beyond the data rate that one physicaldata channel can support by transmitting multiple channels in parallel. They both useBPSK modulation and follow the same fast power control loop.

The main difference are; the E-DPDCH supports fast physical layer level HARQ and fast Node B basedscheduling. However, these are not really properties of the physical data channel as such, but theHARQ is visible in the transport channel processing chain and the scheduling is visible in the MAC layer.

The biggest difference for E-DPDCH is the support of a SF of 2, which allows deliveringtwice as many channel bits per code than the minimum spreading factor of 4 that the DPDCHsupports. The maximum possible data rate of 5.76 Mbps is achieved by allocating 2*SF2 and2*SF4. The same result could be achieved by using 6 SF4 codes with DPDCH, but the powerefficiency of the UE would be reduced in comparison to using SF2.

An E-DCH transport block with user data is mapped onto one sub-frame of 2 ms in case a TTI of 2 mshas been configured, or onto one radio frame of 10 ms in case a TTI of 10 ms has been configured.

The amount of data bits that can be carried within one timeslot depends on the selected slotformat. The slot format determines the Spreading Factor (SF) and therefore the amountof bits per slot. The slot format is shown in the table below.

The E-DPDCH is time aligned with the uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH).



Pub-Date

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH) Version 1 Rev 0

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH)



9-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)The E-DPCCH is a new uplink physical channel used for transmitting out-of-band informationabout E-DPDCH transmission from the mobile to the base station.

The E-DPCCH has only one possible slot format, which uses a spreading factor of 256 with achannelization code of 1 and is capable of delivering 30 channel bits in a 2-ms sub-frame. It isdesigned to deliver 10 bits of information for each E-DPDCH TTI transmitted. The E-DPCCH usesthe same (30, 10) second-order Reed–Muller coding as used for TFCI coding in the DPCCH. Thismeans that the 10 information bits result in 30 bits to be transmitted in the physical channel. Thisnumber of bits can be carried by the E-DPCCH in 2 ms sub frames. If the TTI length of the E-DPDCHis 10 ms, then the 30-bit E-DPCCH sub-frame is repeated five times allowing reduced power level.With this procedure the same E-DPCCH structure can be employed regardless of the TTI usedfor E-DPDCH transmission. The E-DPCCH frame structure is illustrated opposite.

The 10 information bits on the E-DPCCH consist of three different segments::

• The Retransmission Sequence Number (RSN) the retransmission sequence number of 2 bitsinforming the HARQ sequence number of the transport block currently being sent on E-DPDCHs.The initial transmission of a transport block is sent with RSN = 0, the first retransmission with RSN= 1, the second retransmission with RSN = 2, and all subsequent transmissions with RSN = 3.;

• An E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator (E-TFCI) 7 bits indicating the transportformat being transmitted simultaneously on E-DPDCHs. In essence, the E-TFCI tells the receiverthe transport block size coded on the E-DPDCH. From this information the receiver can derivehow many E-DPDCHs are transmitted in parallel and what spreading factor is used;

• Happy bit – as inferred from the name – is 1 bit only. It indicates whether the UE iscontent with the current data rate (or relative power allowed to be used for E-DPDCHs)or whether it could use higher power allocation.

The E-DPCCH is time aligned with the uplink DPCCH.

All channels transmitted in uplink (E-DPDCH, E-DPCCH, HS-DPCCH, DPCCH,possibly DPDCH) are IQ multiplexed.



Pub-Date

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) Version 1 Rev 0

E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)

• Retransmission Sequence Number (RSN) – 2 bits

• E-DCH Transport Format Indicator (E-TFCI) – 7 bits

• Happy Bit - 1 bit



9-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH)

E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH)The E-HICH is a new downlink physical channel used for transmitting positive and negativeacknowledgements for uplink packet transmission. If the Node B received the transmitted E-DPDCHTTI correctly it will respond with a positive Acknowledgement (ACK) and if it received the TTIincorrectly it will respond with a Negative Acknowledgement (NACK).

E-HICH information is BPSK-modulated with on/off keying and the modulation depends on which cell istransmitting the E-HICH. If the E-HICH is coming from the radio link set contained in the serving E-DCHradio link (transmitted from the base station that has the serving E-DCH cell), then both ACKs andNACKs are transmitted. The E-HICHs transmitted by Node Bs that do not contain the serving E-DCHcell only transmit ACKs. If such a cell does not receive the E-DPDCH TTI correctly, then it doesnothing. The UE will continue retransmitting until at least one cell responds with an ACK.

The purpose of this arrangement is to save downlink transmission power. The assumption behindthe different modulations is that those Node Bs that do not have the serving E-DCH cell aretypically the ones that do not have the best connection to the UE and are more likely not to receivethe E-DPDCH TTI correctly and have a significantly larger portion of NACKs than ACKs to betransmitted. In this way only the ACKs actually consume downlink capacity. As for the servingE-DCH radio link set the assumption is that typically more ACKs than NACKs are transmitted. Whenboth ACK and NACK actually result in BPSK bit transmission (+1 and –1, respectively) the peakpower required to transmit a reliable ACK is smaller when the receiver needs to separate +1 from–1 than would be the case if it needed to separate +1 from 0 (as no transmission).

All the cells in the same Node B are assumed to receive uplink E-DPDCH transmission in cooperationand, thus, even if there are multiple cells in the Node B participating in a softer handover the TTIreception either succeeds or fails only once, not separately in all the cells. Due to this all E-HICHstransmitted from the Node B containing the serving E-DCH cell transmit both ACKs and NACKs,effectively enabling the UE to combine the radio links for more reliable ACK/NACK detection.

E-HICH and E-RGCH channel structures are exactly the same and are shown opposite. Each delivers1 bit of information in three slots. In the case of a 10-ms TTI the three slots are repeated fourtimes resulting in an 8-ms-long message. The exception is the E-RGCH transmitted from cells notbelonging to the serving E-DCH radio link set. That channel always – regardless of the E-DCH TTI– transmits a 10-ms-long message (i.e., the three slots are always repeated five times).

The E-HICH/E-RGCH basic building block is a 40-bit-long orthogonal sequence which allows theorthogonal multiplexing of 40 bits in one slot on a single spreading factor 128-code channel. The sameE-HICH/E-RGCH bit is repeated three times over three slots, but uses a different signature in each ofthe three slots following a deterministic code hopping pattern. This is because different signature pairshave different isolations in a real radio environment and, thus, the effect is averaged this way.

E-HICHs and E-RGCHs utilize 40-bit-long orthogonal sequences for multiplexing multiple E-HICHsand E-RGCHs (40 in total) to a single downlink code channel of spreading factor 128.

One cell can use multiple channelization codes to exceed the limit of 40 signatures (e.g., 20E-HICHs and 20 E-RGCHs in a code) with the constraint that the E-HICH and E-RGCH intendedfor the same UE must be transmitted with the same channelization code.



Pub-Date

E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH) Version 1 Rev 0

E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH)



9-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH)

E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH)The E-AGCH is a downlink physical channel used for transmitting an absolute value ofthe Node B scheduler’s decision that lets the UE know the relative transmission powerit is allowed to use for data channel transmission (E-DPDCH), thus effectively tellingthe UE the maximum transmission data rate it may use.

The E-AGCH delivers 5 bits to the UE for the absolute grant value, indicating the exact powerlevel the E-DPDCH may use in relation to the DPCCH. In addition, the E-AGCH carries a 1-bitindication for the absolute grant scope. With this bit the Node B scheduler can allow/disallowUE transmission in a particular HARQ process. This bit is only applicable for 2-ms TTI E-DCHoperation. In addition to this the E-AGCH uses a primary and a secondary UE-id for identifyingthe intended receiver and delivering one additional bit of information.

The E-AGCH uses a fixed spreading factor of 256 and QPSK modulation.

The absolute grant consists of a 5 bit grant value according to the table below and 1 bit indicatingthe scope of the grant. The scope of the absolute grant tells the UE whether the absolutegrant is valid for a specific HARQ process or for all HARQ processes.

The absolute grant is channel coded with convolutional coding of code rate 1/3. The resulting 60 bits aretransmitted in a 2 ms sub-frame in case of 2 ms TTI, or repeated in all 5 sub-frames in case of 10 ms TTI.

Absolute grant value — is a 5-bit integer number ranging from 0 to 31 that has a specific mapping(as shown below) to the E-DPDCH/DPCCH power ratio the UE may use.

Absolute grant scope — can be used to activate/de-activate a particular HARQprocess (identified by the E-AGCH timing) or all HARQ processes. The absolute grantscope can only be used with a 2-ms E-DCH TTI.

Primary/Secondary UE-id or primary/secondary E-RNTI — is used to mask the CRC of the E-AGCH.Each UE may have up to two UE-ids which it checks from each E-AGCH and if it detects one or theother as matching the transmission it knows that the E-AGCH transmission was destined for it.

The structure of an E-AGCH is very similar to an HS-SCCH for HSDPA. A 16-bit CRC is calculatedover the 6 information bits and masked with either a primary or a secondary UE-id.With these idsthe UE knows whether the E-AGCH transmission was meant for it or not. The package is thencoded and rate-matched to fit the three-slot-long (2-ms) SF 256 channel. If a 10-ms E-DCH TTIis used the three slots are repeated five times to fill the whole radio frame.

For both 2 ms and 10 ms TTI, the E-AGCH timing is 5120 chips offset from P-CCPCH frame timing.



Pub-Date

E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH) Version 1 Rev 0

E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH)



9-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs

Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIsWhile HSDPA only supports a single TTI (2 ms), with HSUPA there are two TTI lengths – 2 and10 ms – that can be chosen. The motivation for the 2-ms length was the potential delay benefitwhile 10 ms was needed for range purposes to ensure cell edge operation.

A potential delay benefit could be obtained if there are not too many retransmissions using a 2-msTTI, as the delay between retransmissions is shorter compared with the 10- ms case. A problemoccurs when approaching the cell edge where signalling using a 2-ms period starts to consume a lot oftransmission power, especially at the Node B. The difference from HSDPA is that now potentially amuch larger number of users are expected to be active simultaneously and, thus, aiming to also providedownlink signalling to such a large number of users using a 2-ms period would become impossible.

With data rates below 2Mbps there are no major differences from the capacity point of view regardlessof the TTI used. When going above 2 Mbps per user, then the block size using 10 ms would get toobig and, thus, data rates above 2 Mbps are only provided using a 2-ms TTI. As with macro-cells,practical data rates in the uplink have limitations due to transmission power limitations. This meansthe 10-ms TTI is expected as the starting value for system deployment; this has also been reflectedin terminal capabilities (where a 2-ms TTI is optional for most categories).



Pub-Date

Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs Version 1 Rev 0

Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs

NodeB

E-DCH/HSDPA Serving Cell

E-DCH Control

DCH/HSDPA

E-DCH/DCH

Area where only a 10ms TTI is acceptable

Area where both a 2ms and a 10ms TTI is acceptable



9-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs




Pub-Date

UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 10

UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols



10-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols




Pub-Date



• Describe the General Protocol Model for UMTS.• Describe the Interface specific protocol structure for the following interfaces:

◦ luCS

◦ luPS

◦ lub

◦ lu r



10-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces

Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial InterfacesWithin the UTRAN there are a number of four terrestrial interfaces that are implemented by existingtransmission techniques. The four, namely IuCS, IuPS, Iub and Iur are discussed in this chapter. Thedifferent transmission techniques that can be employed for each interface defines the protocol stack thatis used. The slide opposite shows the different options for each interface currently. However it should benoted that the complete IP RAN will be available in the near future to give all the interfaces the IP option.

The air interface and its protocol stack is covered in other parts of the manual.



Pub-Date

Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces Version 1 Rev 0

Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces

RNCRNC

NodeBNodeB

NodeBNodeB

E1 ATM

SDH ATM

E1 IP

FE IP

MSCu

SGSNSGSN

SDHATM

IP RAN

Uu

Uu

Iub

Iub

IuCS

IuPS



10-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction to UMTS Protocols

Introduction to UMTS ProtocolsAs has been outlined in previous chapters, one of the underlying principles in the design anddevelopment of UMTS is to prepare a universal infrastructure able to carry both existing and futureservices. All design work should be such that technological and evolution changes in one part of thenetwork should have no (or at least minimal impact) on other network components or services.

From a protocol perspective, this is acheived by confining , as far as is reasonably practicable,protocol functions and services within one or several physical domains. To this end, the3G protocol architecture can be divided into two strata.

• Access Stratum• Non-Access Stratum

Access StratumThe Access Stratum (AS) is a functional entity that encompasses radio protocols betweenthe UE and the UTRAN and, terrestrial interface (Iu) protocols between the UTRAN and theCore Network (CN). These protocols all terminate within the UTRAN.

Non-Access StratumThe Non-access Stratum (NAS) includes CN protocols that form a direct connectionbetween the UE and the CN itself. The NAS is transparent to the UTRAN and thusthese protocols do not terminate in the UTRAN.

The NAS protocols encompass functions such as; Mobility Management (MM), Call Control(CC), Short Message Services (SMS) and Suplementary Services (SS) associated withthe circuit switched CN and, GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Session Managment(SM) and GPRS SMS assocoiated with the packet switched CN.

The NAS tries to remain independent of the underlying radio technology. Thus the NAS protocols canremain unchanged regardless of the Radio Access Network (RAN) that carries them.



Pub-Date

Introduction to UMTS Protocols Version 1 Rev 0

Introduction to UMTS ProtocolsUMTS Protocol Architecture

CoreNetworkProtocols

CoreNetworkProtocols

RadioProtocols

RadioProtocols

IuProtocols

IuProtocols

Access Stratum

Non-Access Stratum

UE UTRAN Core Network

Uu-Interface Iu-Interface



10-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 General Protocol Model

General Protocol ModelThe protocols in the UTRAN are designed according to a set protocol model. The structureconsists of Layers (Horizontal) and Planes (Vertical). All these entities are independent of eachother and can be changed at any time. It is also important to note that these protocol stacks arenot developed for specific entities e.g. RNC or Node-B etc, but rather for the interfaces betweenthese different entities. Let’s have a closer look at the Layers and Planes.

Horizontal LayersThe General protocol stack only consists of two layers, the Transport Network Layer and the RadioNetwork Layer. From the bottom, the Physical layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) will providethe physical medium for transmission. Above the Physical layer is the Transport layer (Part of theTransport Network Layer) which contains the transport protocols. These protocols are not definedwithin the UMTS specifications. The Transport Network Protocol proposed for UMTS is ATM. The toplayer is called the Radio Network layer, this is the layer responsible for all UTRAN related tasks.The tasks performed on Radio Network Layer are transparent to Transport Network Layer.

Vertical Planes

Control Plane

The Control plane only exists on L3 of the Horizontal planes and is responsible for all UMTS specificsignalling. The protocols used for the control plane are the RANAP protocol for the Iu interface, theRNSAP protocol for the Iur interface and the NBAP protocol for the Iub interface. These are alltermed Application protocols and will be used for tasks like setting up bearers to the UE. Operation& Maintenance actions will always set up the signalling Bearers for the Application protocol.

User Plane

This plane is being used for transfer of all kinds of information e.g. multimedia, e-mail, speechetc. The User Plane consists of the Data Stream that will be transported on the Data Bearer.Each data stream is identified and characterised by one or more frame protocols.

Transport Network Control Plane

This plane is used for all signalling that must be transferred in the Transport Layer and does notinclude any Radio Network Layer information. The protocol used for the Control Plane is calledAccess Link Control Application Protocol (ALCAP). This protocol will handle the setting up ofData Bearers for the User Plane of the Transport layer. The introduction of the ALCAP protocolmade it possible for the Application Protocols to run with complete independence of the databearing technology. It should be noted that we shall not use the ALCAP protocol in the settingup of the Signalling Bearers for the Application Protocols or for ALCAP.

Transport Network User Plane

Both the Signalling Bearer (for Application Protocol) in the Control Plane and the Data Bearer in the UserPlane belong to the Transport Network Layer. The Data bearers in the Transport Network User Planeare directly controlled by the Transport Network Control Plane during real time operations. The control ofthe Signalling Bearer(s) for Application Protocol are considered Operations and Maintenance functions.



Pub-Date

General Protocol Model Version 1 Rev 0

General Protocol Model

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Control Plane

Application Protocol

Signalling Bearer(s)


ALCAP(S)

Signalling Bearer(s)

User Plane

Data Stream(s)

Data Bearer(s)

Physical Layer





10-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview

IU-CS Interface Protocols OverviewThe Iu—CS interface is the logical interface between the RNC and the Circuit Switched Core Network.The diagram opposite shows the Iu—CS protocol stack, which consists of the following planes:

• Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A)• Transport Network Layer Control plane (section B)• Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C)

As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-upconfiguration principle should be followed for the configuration of section A, section B and sectionC. Therefore, the Iu—CS interface should be considered in the following sequence:

• All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using STM-1bearers) and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics.

• In the radio network and transport network control planes, an SAAL NNI layeris used to provide signalling bearers.

• An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B.• An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A• The signalling application in section A is RANAP.• The signalling application in section B, is Q.AAL2.• The user plane bearer of section C, is provided by an AAL2 path.

NOTE On the Iu-CS, a single SAAL NNI link can share the transport ofboth RANAP and ALCAP signalling.



Pub-Date

IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview Version 1 Rev 0

IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview

Control Plane

Control Plane

User planeRadioNetwork

Layer

Q.AAL2Q.2630.1

Q.2150.1

SAAL NNIAAL2 PATH

ATM

Physical Layer

User PlaneTransport Network Layer

User Plane

SAAL NNI

A

B CSCCP

MTP3-B

RANAP Iu UP

MTP3-B



10-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview

IU-PS Interface Protocols OverviewThe Iu—PS interface is the logical interface between the RNC and the Packet Switched Core Network.The diagram opposite shows the Iu—PS protocol stack, which consists of the following planes:





• An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B.• An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A• The signalling application in section A is RANAP.• Tthe user plane bearer in section C, is provided by an IPoA path leading to SGSN.



Pub-Date

IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview Version 1 Rev 0

IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview

Control Plane

Control Plane

User planeRadioNetwork

Layer

SAAL NNI

User PlaneTransport Network Layer

User Plane

A CSCCP

MTP3-B

RANAP Iu UP

GTP-U

UDP

IP

AAL Type 5

ATM

Physical LayerATM

Physical Layer

B



10-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview

Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols OverviewThe Iub (ATM) interface is the logical interface between the RNC and Node B. The diagramopposite shows the Iub protocol stack, which consists of the following planes:


As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-upconfiguration principle should be followed for the configuration of section A, section B and sectionC. Therefore, the Iub interface should be considered in the following sequence:

• All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using E1 links)and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics.

• In the radio network and Transport network control planes, an SAAL UNI layeris used to provide signalling bearers.

• The signalling application in section A is NBAP, which in turn comprises two different signalling porttypes, namely, Iub ports Node B Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port(s) (CCP)).

• The signalling application in section B is Q.AAL2.• Add the user plane data bearer in section C is provided by an AAL2 path.



Pub-Date

Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview



10-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview

Iub Interface (IP) Protocols OverviewThe Iub (IP) interface is the logical interface between the RNC and Node B. The diagramopposite shows the Iub protocol stack, which consists of the following planes:

• Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) carrying Radio Network Layer Control Plane.• Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) carrying Radio Network Layer User Plane.

The concepts of the IP transport protocols on the Iub interface are described below.

Data Link Layer — The data link layer protocols related to IP transport. The protocols consistof Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Multipoint Protocol (MP).

Internet Protocol (IP) — The IP provides a connectionless service between networks. It defines the rulesand details for data communication. It is used along with the TCP to provide guaranteed data transfer.

Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) — The SCTP is mainly used for reliablytransmitting datagrams through an unreliable network.

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) — UDP does not guarantee reliability or ordering. Datagramsmay arrive out of order, appear duplicated, or go missing without notice. Avoiding theoverhead of checking whether every packet actually arrived makes UDP faster and moreefficient for applications that do not need guaranteed delivery.



Pub-Date

Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview



10-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack

ATM/IP Dual Protocol StackThe development of data services and the introduction of HSDPA and HSUPA are posing higherand higher requirements for Iub bandwidth. The transmission of ATM over E1 is quite expensiveand the efficiency of data services per bit is getting lower. In this situation, operators need low-costIub transmission solutions. A good solution to Iub transmission is IP transport because of its lowercost and multiple access modes. Operators who have existing ATM-based networks hope to protecttheir current investment and reduce the impact of IP transport on the existing services.

In hybrid ATM&IP transport mode, data streams over two different paths reach the same NodeB: oneover ATM (for realtime data streams) and the other over IP (for non-realtime data streams).



Pub-Date

ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack Version 1 Rev 0

ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack

Radio Network Layer

Transport Network Layer


NBAP

ATM Data Link Layer

AAL5 IP

SAAL SCTP

ATM

AAL5

SAAL

ATM

AAL2Data Link Layer

IP

UDP


Control Plane

DC

H FP

RA

CH

FP

FAC

H FP

PC

H FP

HS

DS

CH

FP


Physical Layer

ALCAP

User Plane



10-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Iur Interface Protocols Overview

Iur Interface Protocols OverviewThe Iur interface is the logical interface between two RNC's. The diagram opposite showsthe Iur protocol stack, which consists of the following planes:





• An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B.• An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A• The signalling application in section A is RNSAP.• The signalling application in section B, is Q.AAL2.• The user plane bearer of section C, is provided by an AAL2 path.



Pub-Date

Iur Interface Protocols Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Iur Interface Protocols Overview

Control Plane

Control Plane

User planeRadio

Network

Layer

Q.AAL2

Q.2630.1

Q.2150.1

SAAL NNI

AAL2 PATH

ATM

Physical Layer

User PlaneTransport

Network

Layer

User Plane

SAAL NNI

A

B CSCCP

MTP3-B

RNSAP Iu UP

MTP3-B



10-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Iur Interface Protocols Overview




Pub-Date

UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link Layer Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 11

UMTS Terrestrial Physical and DataLink Layer



11-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link Layer




Pub-Date



• State the transport mechanisms used for the UMTS transport network.• Describe the basic principles of ATM.• Describe the use of PDH and SDH bearers for UMTS.



11-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview

Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer OverviewOne very important aspect that is sometimes overlooked is the transport medium requiredbetween the different entities. In the case of UMTS the Network Operator will run into problemsif the wrong links are utilised. Speed of transfer and cost will be two of the major determiningfactors when planning the UMTS network. Other issues that need to be addressed are thetypes of converting equipment used between the different types of terrestrial interfaces. Inthe following pages a closer look will be taken at these aspects.

It should also be mentioned that as data rates increase the use of E1/T1 systems become moredifficult. ATM was preferred transport mechanism on the CN. Voice and IP over ATM is conductedusing ATM adaptation layers. Recently there has been a move towards using IP as the maintransport mechanism, firstly on the Iub and then in later releases on the Iu.



Pub-Date

Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview

RNCRNC

NodeBNodeB

NodeBNodeB

E1 ATM

SDH ATM

E1 IP

FE IP

MSCu

SGSNSGSN

SDHATM

IP RAN

Uu

Uu

Iub

Iub

IuCS

IuPS



11-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Principles

ATM PrinciplesATM is used to transfer different types of information with different rates over one or morecommon links with a high bit rate. This properties makes ATM an extremely useful systemwhen it comes to wideband or broadband data transfer.

ATM is a cell-switching and multiplexing technology that combines the benefits of circuitswitching (guaranteed capacity and constant transmission delay) with those of packet switching(flexibility and efficiency for intermittent traffic). It provides scalable bandwidth from a fewMbps to many Gbps. Because of its asynchronous nature, ATM is more efficient thansynchronous technologies, such as Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM).

With TDM, each user is assigned to a time slot, and no other station can send in that time slot. If astation has much data to send, it can send only when its time slot comes up, even if all other time slotsare empty. However, if a station has nothing to transmit when its time slot comes up, the time slot issent empty and is wasted. Because ATM is asynchronous, time slots are available on demand withinformation identifying the source of the transmission contained in the header of each ATM cell.



Pub-Date

ATM Principles Version 1 Rev 0

ATM PrinciplesFixed Bit Stream

Variable Bit Stream

DiscontinuesBit Stream



11-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Concepts of ATM Protocol

Concepts of ATM ProtocolATM protocol reference model consists of three planes: control plane, user plane, and managementplane, and three function layers: physical layer, ATM layer, and ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL).

Plane Function

User plane Transfers user data such as protocol data and voice data

Control plane Transfers signaling control data such as connection setup signalingand connection release signaling

Management plane Transfers the OM data of the network. The management planeis divided into layer management part and plane managementpart that manage the data at each layer and the inter-layer datarespectively.

The physical layer is provided by E1 or optical SDH.

The ATM physical layer has four functions: Cells are converted into a bitstream, the transmissionand receipt of bits on the physical medium are controlled, ATM cell boundaries are tracked, andcells are packaged into the appropriate types of frames for the physical medium. For example,cells are packaged differently for SONET than for other media types.



Pub-Date

Concepts of ATM Protocol Version 1 Rev 0

Concepts of ATM Protocol

Higher Layer

ATM Adaptation Layer

ATM Layer

Physical Layer

Control Plane User Plane Plane M

anagement

Management Plane

Layer Managem

ent



11-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Layer

ATM LayerATM switching is a fast packet switching technology. In ATM switching, each packetthat consists of 53 bytes is called a cell. Based on the physical layer, the ATM layercommunicates with the peer layer through ATM cells.

Structure of an ATM CellOne ATM cell consists of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. This partdescribes the structure of the cell header.

Type of ATM Cell Header

Cell headers are categorized into User to Network Interface (UNI) cell header andNetwork to Network Interface (NNI) cell header:

• UNI cell headers apply to communications between ATM users and ATM networknodes, for example, between a NodeB and an RNC.

• NNI cell headers apply to communications between two ATM network nodes,for example, between an RNC and a CN.

Format of an ATM Cell

As shown in the slide opposite, an ATM cell header consists of Generic Flow Control (GFC),Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI), Virtual Path Identifier (VPI), Payload Type (PT), Cell LossPriority (CLP), and Header Error Control (HEC). This is expanded below:

• The GFC field is occasionally used only by UNI cells. It is there to provide localfunctions, such as identifying multiple stations that share a single ATM interface. TheGFC field is typically not used and is set to a default value.

• VPI and VCI: One VCI occupies 16 bits, one VPI of a UNI cell 8 bits, and one VPI ofan NNI cell 12 bits. VPI and VCI are valid only on the link level.

• The PT field occupies 3 bits. The first bit indicates whether the cell contains user data or controldata. If the cell contains user data, the second bit indicates congestion, and the third bit indicateswhether the cell is the last in a series of cells that represent a single AAL5 frame.

• CLP: When the traffic is heavy, CLP determines the cells to be discarded (CLP =1) and the cells not to be discarded (CLP = 0).

• The HEC field protects the information of the cell header and delimits cells.



Pub-Date

ATM Layer Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Layer



11-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Virtual Channels and Paths

Virtual Channels and PathsOn a physical level ATM connects via the specification of Virtual Paths (VPs) and Virtual Channels(VCs). A Virtual Channel will be located inside a Virtual Path. A Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) willidentify the Virtual Channel and the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) will identify the Virtual Path (VP).

In total we could have up to 256 addresses for a VP User to Network Interface(UNI) and 4096 for a VP Network to Network Interface (NNI). When VCIs are used,up to 216 channels per path can be addressed.

Use of Virtual Channels and PathsA virtual channel provides an end-to-end connection, referred to as a Virtual ChannelConnection. This connection in turn may consist of a number of VC and VP components.These components are illustrated opposite and are defined as follows:

Virtual Channel Link

A virtual channel link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutiveATM entities where a VCI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, betweenan ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches.

Virtual Channel Connection

A virtual channel connection is a concatenation of virtual channel connections.

Virtual Path Link

A virtual path link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutiveATM entities where a VPI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, betweenan ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches.

Virtual Path Connection

A virtual path connection is a concatenation of virtual path connections.



Pub-Date

Virtual Channels and Paths Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Channels and Paths

ATM Path

Virtual Path (VP)

Virtual Channel (VC)

Each VP within the physical layer has a different VPI value

Each VC within a VP has a different VCI value

Use of Virtual Channels and PathsVirtual Channel Connection Endpoints

Virtual Channel Connection

Virtual Channel Link Virtual Channel Link

Virtual Path Link Virtual Path LinkVC Switch - VCI and VPI

values change

Virtual Path Connection

Virtual Path Connection Endpoints

VP Switch VC SwitchATMEND

SYSTEM

ATMEND

SYSTEM



11-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection SwitchingWhen addressing is carried out on VP level only a VP address would be needed since all the VCs areinside the VP. Therefore we would only switch on VP level like illustrated in the diagram. If howeverVCs need to be switched a VP Switch combined with a VC Switch would be needed.

The switching in ATM could get complicated at times therefore special tools havebeen developed to help with this aspect.



Pub-Date

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection SwitchingVC Switch

VP Switch VP Switch

Endpointof VPC

Representation of VC and VP SwitchingRepresentation of VP Switching



11-15

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)

ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)This part describes the functions and services of ATM adaptation layer, and theservice functions of the SAAL and Q.AAL2.

Functions of the ATM Adaptation LayerThe ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) is right above the ATM layer. The AAL adaptshigher layer applications to the ATM layer.

For various types of service, the AAL performs the adaptation in different ways. It segments data fromthe upper layer into Service Date Units SDUs. Each SDU has 48 bytes. The AAL reassemblesand restores the SDUs from the ATM layer, and then transfers them to the upper layer.

To increase the ATM switching rate, the AAL performs all QoS related functions suchas cell loss handling, misdelivery, delay, and variation.

Types of Services at the ATM Adaptation LayerDifferent services have different requirements for the timing of, the bit rates of, and the connectionmode for the source and the sink. According to these requirements, ITU-T classifies services into fourcategories: A, B, C, and D and defines them as AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, and AAL5 respectively.

AAL1

AAL1, a connection-oriented service, is suitable for handling Constant Bit Rate (CBR) sources ,such as voice and videoconferencing. ATM transports CBR traffic using circuit-emulation services.AAL1 requires timing synchronization between the source and the destination. For this reason,AAL1 depends on a medium, such as SONET, that supports clocking.

AAL2

Another traffic type has timing requirements like CBR but tends to be bursty in nature. This is calledVariable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic. This typically includes services characterized as packetized voice orvideo that do not have a constant data transmission speed but that do have requirements similar toconstant bit rate services. AAL2 is suitable for VBR traffic. The AAL2 process uses 44 bytes of thecell payload for user data and reserves 4 bytes of the payload to support the AAL2 processes.

VBR traffic is characterized as either real-time (VBR-RT) or as non-real-time (VBR-NRT).AAL2 supports both types of VBR traffic.

AAL3/4

AAL3/4 supports both connection-oriented and connectionless data. It was designed for networkservice providers and is closely aligned with Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS).AAL3/4 is used to transmit SMDS packets over an ATM network.

AAL5

AAL5 is the primary AAL for data and supports both connection-oriented and connectionless data.It is used to transfer most non-SMDS data, such as classical IP over ATM and LAN Emulation(LANE). AAL5 also is known as the Simple and Efficient Adaptation Layer (SEAL).



Pub-Date

ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)Class A Class B Class C Class D

Timing Relation Required Not Required

Bit Rate

Connection Rate

Examples

Service Typeto be used

Constant Variable

ConnectionOrientated

ConnectionLess

Emulationof Circuits

CPCM

Variable BitRate Video

ConnectionOrientated Data

Transmission

ConnectionLess Data

Transmission

AAL 1 AAL 2AAL 3/4 or

AAL 5

Available Unspecified



11-17

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Service Characteristics

ATM Service CharacteristicsBelow is the description of ATM services, which are used for configuration of the ATMlayer, including CBR, RTVBR, NRTVBR and UBR.

• Constant Bit Rate (CBR): A service that does not implement error check,flow control or other processing.

• Variable Bit Rate (VBR): This service is sub-classified into realtime transmission (RT-VBR)and non-realtime transmission (NRT-VBR). RT-VBR is used to describe a service featuringvariable data streams and strict realtime requirement, (e.g. interactive compressedvideo such as video conference). NRT-VBR is used on the communication occasionsrequiring timing transmission. In such cases, some delays and variations, e.g., thosein E-mail transmission, can be accepted by the application.

• Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR): This is a service that does not make any commitment orfeedback to congestion. It is suitable for transmitting IP datagrams. In case of congestion,UBR cells will be discarded. However, neither relevant feedback nor the request forslowing down the transmission speed will be returned to the sender. The RNC5000 alsosupports UBR+, which guarantees a the minimum cell rate.



Pub-Date

ATM Service Characteristics Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Service Characteristics

NNNNFeedback on congestion

YYNNApplicable to burst communication

NNYYApplicable to realtimecommunication

NYYYGuaranteed bandwidth

UBRNRT-VBRRT-VBRCBRService characteristic

NNNNFeedback on congestion

YYNNApplicable to burst communication

NNYYApplicable to realtimecommunication

NYYYGuaranteed bandwidth

UBRNRT-VBRRT-VBRCBRService characteristic



11-19

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM QoS

ATM QoSATM supports QoS guarantees comprising traffic contract, traffic shaping, and traffic policing.

A traffic contract specifies an envelope that describes the intended data flow. This envelope specifiesvalues for peak bandwidth, average sustained bandwidth, and burst size, among others. When an ATMend system connects to an ATM network, it enters a contract with the network, based on QoS parameters.

Traffic shaping is the use of queues to constrain data bursts, limit peak data rate, and smooth jittersso that traffic will fit within the promised envelope. ATM devices are responsible for adhering to thecontract by means of traffic shaping. ATM switches can use traffic policing to enforce the contract. Theswitch can measure the actual traffic flow and compare it against the agreed-upon traffic envelope. Ifthe switch finds that traffic is outside of the agreed-upon parameters, it can set the Cell Loss Priority(CLP) bit of the offending cells. Setting the CLP bit makes the cell discard eligible, which meansthat any switch handling the cell is allowed to drop the cell during periods of congestion.



Pub-Date

ATM QoS Version 1 Rev 0

ATM QoS

Minimum cell transmission rateMCRMinimum cell rate

Tagging the cells with CLP=0TAGGINGTag

Indicating which cells can be discarded (CLP=1), and which cells had better not be discarded (CLP=0) when congestion occurs to the network

CLPCell loss priority

Max. tolerable cell jitter (0.1µs)CDVTCell delay variation tolerance

Long-term average cell transmission rate (cell/s)SCRSustainable cell rate

Max. cell transmission rate (cell/s)PCRPeak cell rate

MeaningAbbreviationsParameter

Minimum cell transmission rateMCRMinimum cell rate

Tagging the cells with CLP=0TAGGINGTag

Indicating which cells can be discarded (CLP=1), and which cells had better not be discarded (CLP=0) when congestion occurs to the network

CLPCell loss priority

Max. tolerable cell jitter (0.1µs)CDVTCell delay variation tolerance

Long-term average cell transmission rate (cell/s)SCRSustainable cell rate

Max. cell transmission rate (cell/s)PCRPeak cell rate

MeaningAbbreviationsParameter



11-21

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E1/T1 Architecture

E1/T1 Architecture

Logical LinksWe have seen some of the mediums over which the data is transmitted, now let us considerthe format of the data that is carried over these mediums.

In GSM all the data is in digital form, and the path that the data takes is called a logical link. The format ofthe data is dependent on where in the system the data is and what sort of data needs to be transferred.

E1In the European GSM system the basic building block of data that gets carried around thenetwork is based around the multiplexed 2.048 Mbit/s frame.

This frame contains 32 channels of 64 Kbit/s. 30 are used for user information. Channel 0 isreserved for timing and synchronisation and channel 16 is used for signalling.

E1 also specifies the sampling rate, frequency bandwidth, bits per sample, time slots per frame,output bit rate, encoding law and the dedicated signalling and synchronisation channels.

T1T1 is the American version of E1.

There are significant differences in the make up of the TDM frame.

T1 uses 24 time slots per frame, with 24 PCM channels per frame. The output bit rate is 1.544 Mbit/sand the signalling used in the frame is only used once every 6th frame, instead of every frame in E1.



Pub-Date

E1/T1 Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

E1/T1 Architecture

T1/DS1

E1

Frequency

Sampling Rate

Bits per Sample

Bits per Frame

PCM Channels per Frame

Output Bit Rate

Encoding Law

Signalling Capabilities

300 - 3400Hz

8000Hz

8

193

24

1.544 Mbps

μ Law

1st bit in frame - Sync

1 bit in timeslots 6 and 12

Frequency Range

Sample Rate

Bits per Sample

Time Slots per Frame

Output Bit Rate

Encoding Law

Signalling Capabilities

300 - 3400Hz

8000Hz

8

32

2.048 Mbps

A LAW

TS16 Signalling

TS0 Sync



11-23

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping

ATM Cell to E1 Cell MappingThe ATM cell is mapped into bits 9 to 128 and bits 137 to 256 (i.e. time slots 1 to 15 and time slots 17to 31) of the 2048 kbit/s frame as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.704[2] and as shown in theFigure opposite. The ATM cell octet structure shall be aligned with the octet structure of the frame.

There shall be no relationship between the beginning of an ATM cell and the beginning of an2048 kbit/s transmission frame. Since the frame payload capacity (30 octets) is not an integermultiple of cell length (53 octets), ATM cells will cross the E1 frame boundary.



Pub-Date

ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Cell to E1 Cell MappingTS0

SynchTS16Sig

ATM Mapping Field15 Octets

ATM Mapping Field15 Octets

125 µs E1 frames - 256 bits per frame



11-25

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 E1 Link Multiplexing

E1 Link MultiplexingThe standard E1 and T1 streams can be further multiplexed to put morechannels over one transmission path.



Pub-Date

E1 Link Multiplexing Version 1 Rev 0

E1 Link MultiplexingE1 Series Hierarchies

E1

2.048 Mb/s

E2

8.448 Mb/s

E3

34.368 Mb/s

E4

139.264 Mb/s

E5

564.992 Mb/s

x 4

x 4

x 4

x 4

30 TCH

120 TCH

480 TCH

1,920 TCH7,680 TCH



11-27

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a methodology which provides a modular bandwidth,for user access to ATM networks and for connection between ATM network elements, at ratesbetween the traditional order multiplex level. An example is to achieve rates between theDS1/E1 and DS3/E3 levels in the asynchronous digital hierarchies. DS2/E2 physical links arenot necessarily readily available throughout a given network. Therefore the introduction of ATMInverse Multiplexers provides an effective method of combining the transport bandwidths of multiplelinks (e.g., DS1/E1 links) grouped to collectively provide higher intermediate rates.

The ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing ofATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical linkwhose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.The figure opposite provides a simple illustration of the ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique inone direction. The same technique applies in the opposite direction.

IMA groups terminate at each end of the IMA virtual link. In the transmit direction, the ATM cell streamreceived from the ATM layer is distributed on a cell by cell basis, across the multiple links within the IMAgroup. At the far-end, the receiving IMA unit recombines the cells from each link, on a cell by cell basis,recreating the original ATM cell stream. The aggregate cell stream is then passed to the ATM layer.

The IMA interface periodically transmits special cells that contain information that permitreconstruction of the ATM cell stream at the receiving end of the IMA virtual link. The receiverend reconstructs the ATM cell stream after accounting for the link differential delays, smoothingCDV introduced by the control cells, etc. These cells, defined as IMA Control Protocol (ICP)cells, provide the definition of an IMA frame. The transmitter must align the transmission ofIMA frames on all links. This allows the receiver to adjust for differential link delays among theconstituent physical links. Based on this required behavior, the receiver can detect the differentialdelays by measuring the arrival times of the IMA frames on each link.

At the transmitting end, the cells are transmitted continuously. If there are no ATM layer cells to besent between ICP cells within an IMA frame, then the IMA transmitter sends filler cells to maintaina continuous stream of cells at the physical layer. The insertion of Filler cells provides cell ratedecoupling at the IMA sublayer. The Filler cells should be discarded by the IMA receiver.



Pub-Date

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Version 1 Rev 0

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)Inverse Multiplexing and De-multiplexing of ATM cells

PHY

PHY

PHY

IMA GroupIMA Group

PHY

PHY

PHY

Physical Link #0

Physical Link #1

Physical Link #2

Original ATM CellStream to ATM Layer

Single ATM CellStreamfrom ATM Layer

Tx direction: cells distributed across links in round robin sequenceRx direction: cells recombined into single ATM stream

IMA Frames

ATM FATM ICP2ATM F FATM ICP0ATMF FATM ICP1F Link 0

ICP2 FATM FF ICP0 FATM FATMICP1 ATMATM ATMATM Link 1

ATM ICP2ATM FF F ICP0ATM ATMATMF ICP1ATM ATMATM Link 2

IMA Frame 2 IMA Frame 1 IMA Frame 0

M-1 23 1 0 M-1 23 1 0M-1 23 1 0

ICP1 ICP Cell in Frame # 1 F Filler Cell ATM ATM Layer Cell

Time



11-29

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)With the advent of fully digital and synchronous networks the CCITT defined a newmultiplexing hierarchy called Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). In the USA is calledSynchronous Optical Network (SONET) with the two major differences being terminologyand the basic line rates used (SONET - 51.84 Mbps).

SDH uses a basic transmission rate of 155.52 Mbps (abbreviated to 155 Mbps) and multiples of 4n.

This basic rate is known as a Synchronous Transport Module level 1 (STM-1),higher rates are STM-4 and STM-16.

As with PDH, the signal is repetitive frames with a repeat period of 125µs. Any ofthe PDH rates can be multiplexed into the STM-1.

The main advantages of SDH are:

• It allows direct access to tributary signals without demultiplexing the composite signal.• It supports advance operations, administration and maintenance by dedicating channels for this

purpose. The network can therefore be reconfigured under software control from remote terminals.• Overhead bytes have been preserved for growth to support services and technologies of the future.



Pub-Date

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)SDH Bit Rates

Synchronous TransportModule

TransmissionRate

STM - 1

STM - 4

STM - 16

STM - N

155.52 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

2,488.32 Mbps

N x 155.52 Mbps



11-31

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Drop and InsertSDH overcomes the limitations of plesiochronous networks, and will allow transmission networksto evolve to meet the demands of emerging broadband services.

Network SimplificationSynchronous transmission equipment eliminates the multiplexer mountain, leading to lower equipmentand maintenance costs, and improved service provisioning. The diagram shows how 2Mbps channelscan be dropped and inserted from a Synchronous Transfer Module, Type 1 (STM-1) by meansof remote commands at a network management station. The flexibility of SDH transmission isattractive to carriers because it offers the potential of generating new revenues.

SurvivabilitySDH includes overheads for end-to-end monitoring and maintenance of transmission equipment;the network management station can immediately identify the failure of links and equipment.Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, an SDH network can be constructed with a self-healingring architecture that automatically reroutes traffic until the faulty segment is repaired; there will beno disruption of service to the end user, allowing carriers to guarantee service levels.

Software ControlSDH also includes overheads for management channels; these are used for performancemonitoring, equipment configuration, resource management, network security, inventorymanagement, network planning and network design. Since all of these managementoperations can be performed remotely, SDH offers the possibility of centralised networkmanagement and provisioning, with associated cost savings.

Bandwidth on DemandThe flexibility of SDH allows carriers to allocate network capacity dynamically in that users will be able tosubscribe at very short notice to large bandwidth services e.g. video-conferencing. This feature opensup the possibility of providing new services e.g. high-speed LAN interconnection and High Definition TV.



Pub-Date

SDH Drop and Insert Version 1 Rev 0

SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

1 632

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

155Mbps alternate routingusing ring topology

Management of2Mbps traffic

SDH Drop and Insert

155Mb/s

155Mbps

155Mbps



11-33

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Principles of SDH

Principles of SDHAlthough a full description of SDH is beyond the scope of this course, thissection will cover the main principles.

The diagram shows the SDH multiplex structure, indicating how an STM is formed from various PDHtraffic rates. The following terms are used in the diagram, and further explained below:

• C - Container• VC - Virtual Container• TU - Tributary Units• TUG - Tributary Unit Group• AU - Administrative Unit• AUG - Administrative Unit Group• STM - Synchronous Transfer Module

The following table lists the container size suffices used when referring to equivalentPDH traffic rates within SDH signals:

Container Suffix Bit rate kbps

0 64

11 1,554

12 2,048

21 6,312

22 8,448

31 34,368

32 44,736

4 139,264



Pub-Date

Principles of SDH Version 1 Rev 0

Principles of SDH

STM-N AUG AU-4

TU-3

VC-4

VC-3

VC-11

VC-12

VC-2

VC-3

C-11

C-12

C-2

C-3

C-4

SDH Multiplex Structure

140 Mbit/s

45 Mbit/ s34 Mbit/ s

6 Mbit/ s

2 Mbit/ s

1.5 Mbit/sTU-11

TU-12

TU-2TUG-2

AU-3

x1

x3

x3

TUG-3x1

x7

x7 x1

x3

x4



11-35

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network

Typical UMTS ATM Transport NetworkThe diagram opposite shows a typical implementation of an ATM transport network tosupport the UMTS interfaces. The UMTS nodes as shown are connected to a single SDHring, whereas there may actually be several rings involved depending on the networkproviders configuration and may include PDH interfaces as well.

Node Bs use E1 physical interfaces and in the case where multiple E1’s are used IMA is utilised bythe Node B. The ATM Mux shown in the figure is expected to provide E1 (VC-12) to STM-1 (VC-4)mapping and vice versa in addition to providing IMA and reverse IMA capability. For a large numberof Node B’s, the transport network will have to provide a significant number of E1 interfaces.

The ATM switch will be utilised for VP and VC switching and will be expected to provide aggregation oflogical interfaces to physical interfaces via VP and VC switching. The ATM network is also expected tobe configurable to limit the throughput of a given physical interface. For example, the RNC STM-1physical interfaces need to be limited to a bandwidth of 100Mbps due to the hardware limitations.

Daisy ChainingFrom USR 2.0 it will be possible to configure Node B’s in a daisy chain. All typesof daisy chain are supported with the exception of closed loop. Up to 3 Node B’s(4 including hub node B) can be daisy chained.

Circuit EmulationFrom USR 2.0 the node B has the ability to terminate an ATM AAL1 connection and generatea circuit data stream for use by another piece of network equipment connected to the NodeB. Using circuit emulation, the E1 connections are routed first through the UMTS base stationwhere it uses its ATM data, and converts the ATM AAL1 data to circuit data. The resultingcircuit data is sent out another E1 connection to the attached network equipment. This islikely to be a BTS as operators move from GSM to UMTS.

ATM Protection SwitchFrom USR 2.0 this feature provides higher availability radio network system, especially improvedavailability, when it is used in addition to a lower layer protection (e.g. SDH). This is doneby providing 1:1 redundancy for important Permanent Virtual Circuits(PVCs), these areNCP PVC, ALCAP PVC, NodeB OM PVC, it is set by configuration.

The system switches from the primary PVCs to the secondary ones automaticallyunder the following conditions:

• Detection of signal failure of the primary PVCs• Detection of signal degradation of the primary PVCs• OAM command from operator• Others scenarios specified in I.630 not covered in this course.

To determine that a PVC is not functioning properly, the equipment collects PM statisticson quality of the PVC (lost packets, buffer overflow, etc), in order to indicate to theOAM that a switch to the secondary PVC is needed.



Pub-Date

Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network Version 1 Rev 0

Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network

Node B

SGSN

MSCu

RNC

RNC

RNC

Node BNode B

Node BNode B

ATM Mux

OMCATM Switch

ATM Switch

Ethernet

Ethernet(Option underinvestigation)

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

E1, IMA

E1, IMA

E1, IMAE1, IMA

SDH Ring(STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)

BTS

Circuit Emulation



11-37

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction to IP RAN

Introduction to IP RANWith the IP transport technology, the IP RAN feature enables IP transport on the Iub interface.

The IP RAN feature is implemented to:

• Provide enough transmission bandwidth for high speed data services such as HSDPA• Greatly reduce OPEX for transport and operation and maintenance• Provide more flexible networking for the operator to reduce network deployment costs

The IP RAN feature yields the following benefits:

• Fully utilizing rich IP network resources.

Mainstream data communication networks are based on IP transport. They have multipleaccess modes and large-scale deployment. The IP RAN feature enables the operator tofully utilize the existing IP network resources for Iub networking.

• Economical IP network construction.

While facing the competition from the ATM network, the more economical IPnetwork is preferred by a number of vendors.

• Following the trend in network migration to protect the operator’s investment.The IP transport technology is taking the lead in the data communication field,and will dominate this field in the future.

The IP RAN can be configured in three different ways:

• TDM network• Data network• Hybrid transport network

TDM NetworkIn TDM networking mode, the RNC and NodeBs support IP over PPP over E1, which can bebased on PDH/SDH or Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

Benefits: ensures security and QoS. Line clock signals can be extracted.

Restrictions: relatively high costs of E1 leasing



Pub-Date

Introduction to IP RAN Version 1 Rev 0

Introduction to IP RAN

RNCRNC

NodeBNodeB

NodeBNodeBTDM Networking

IP over PPP over E1



11-39

Pub-Date



Data NetworkThe data network can be any of the following three types:

• Layer 2 network, for example, metropolitan area Ethernet• Layer 3 network• MSTP network

The data network can be accessed through FE or E1.

A common IP network has the following benefits and restrictions:

• Benefits: good availability and relatively low costs of leasing• Restrictions: low security without QoS assurance. The requirements for

realtime services cannot be satisfied.

An IP network with assured QoS or a private network has the following benefits and restrictions:

• Benefits: high security and assured QoS• Restrictions: relatively high costs.



Pub-Date



RNCRNC

NodeBNodeB

NodeBNodeBData Networking

IP accessed via FE or E1

RouterRouter

RouterRouter

RouterRouter

RouterRouter



11-41

Pub-Date



Hybrid Transport NetworkHybrid transport enables services of different QoSs to be transported in different paths:

• The speech service with high QoS requirements is carried on the privatenetwork such as PDH and SDH

• Data services with low QoS requirements are carried on the data network such as Ethernet.

The hybrid transport network has the following benefits and restrictions:

• Benefits: flexible to meet different requirements• Restrictions: complicated management.

The relation between the transmission on the Iub interface and thetransmission technologies is as follows:

• Control plane on the Iub interface:

◦ To reduce signaling delay and connection time, data on the control plane forthe Iub interface is carried on the private network.

• User plane on the Iub interface:

◦ Realtime services are carried by private networks whereas non-realtimeservices are carried by Ethernet.

The IP hybrid transport technology for the Iub interface has the following characteristics:

• The two paths from the RNC to the NodeB can connect to two transport networkswith different QoS requirements either:

◦ Through different ports, or

◦ Through the same port that connects to the external data equipment accordingto Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)

• When the bandwidth of the low QoS network is restricted, low QoS services can be carried on thehigh QoS network. When the bandwidth of the high QoS network is limited, the RNC reducesthe rate of the low QoS services that are carried on high QoS network, or the RNC rejects theaccess of high QoS services if no low QoS services are carried on the high QoS network.

• The mapping between types of services and transmission modes is configurable.The default mapping is as follows:

◦ The interactive service and the background service in the PS domain has low QoSrequirements. The two types of services are carried on the high QoS network onlywhen the bandwidth of the low QoS network is restricted.

◦ Other services have high QoS requirements such as Iub data on thecontrol plane, RRC signaling, CS services, common channel data of cells, PSconversational service, and PS streaming service.



Pub-Date



RNC

NodeB

NodeBData Networking

Low QoS

Router

Router

Router

Router

RNCRNC

NodeBNodeB

NodeBNodeBData Networking

Low QoS

RouterRouter

RouterRouter

RouterRouter

RouterRouter

TDM Networking

High QoS

TDM Networking

High QoS



11-43

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface

IP Transport Protocols on the Iub InterfaceThis part describes concepts of IP transport protocols on the Iub interface and includes:

• Concepts of Data Link Layer Protocols• Internet Protocol (IP)• Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP)• Point-tp-Point Protocol (PPP)• Multilink Protocol (MP)

Concepts of Data Link Layer ProtocolsThis part describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport. Theprotocols consists of PPP and MP.

Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

The PPP is used on the data link layer. The PPP provides standard methods forencapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-point links. These datagrams includeIP, Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX), and Apple Talk.

As shown in the diagram opposite, the PPP consists of the following three parts:

• Link Control Protocol (LCP): used to configure, test, suspend, or remove a data link.• Network Control Protocol (NCP): used to configure parameters at the network layer for

communications between the equipment. The NCP in this part refers to Network controlProtocol, which is different from NodeB Control Port (NCP).

• Extended protocols, such as MP: used to combine multiple physical links into a logical link toprovide a relatively high bandwidth and to enable quick data transfer. Motorola RNC usesthe MP protocol through the addition of Multi Link PPP (MLPPP) data.

Multilayer Protocol (MP)

With the wide application of PPP, MP comes into being as the extended protocol of the PPP.The MP provides relatively large bandwidth to efficiently transport the data. In addition, the MPdynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save the valuable resources.

The MP protocol can flexibly arrange multiple independent physical links between point-to-pointsystems. It provides a virtual link for the whole system, and the bandwidth of the virtuallink is the sum of bandwidths of the N (N ≥ 1) physical links.

Along the development of network technologies, bandwidth is significantly increased.In this sense, MP is less applied in practice.



Pub-Date

IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface Version 1 Rev 0

IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface

Synchronous or Asynchronous Physical Media

Authentication and other options

Link Control Protocol

Network Control Protocol

IPCP IPXCP Other Control Protocols

IP IPXOther Protocols

PPP Data Link Layer

Physical Layer

Network Layer



11-45

Pub-Date



Internet Protocol (IP)The IP provides a connectionless service between networks. It defines the rules and details fordata communication. It is used along with the TCP to provide guaranteed data transfer.

IPv4 and IPv6

The current and most popular network layer protocol of the TCP/IP is IPv4 that was launchedin 1981. IPv4 will be gradually replaced by IPv6 that was launched in 1995.

Principles for IP Address Planning

When using TCP/IP to communicate, each communication entity needs an IP address. In theapplication of the RAN, adhere to the following principles when planning the IP addresses:

• IP addresses and subnet masks must be valid. Ensure that the network number cannotbe all-zeros and that the host number cannot be all-zeros or all-ones.

• The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are valid, but those of classes D and E are invalid.• Do not set the IP address to a loopback address of 127.X.X.X.

IP Address Structure

In the IP network, the IP address should be assigned to the hosts. If you connect a computer to theInternet, you need to apply for an IP address from the Internet Service Provider (ISP).

The length of the IP address is 32 bits. The IP address consists of the following two parts:

• Network number (net-id): The first bits are called class segments (class bits) thatis used to identify the class of an IP address.

• Host number (host-id): identifies different hosts in the same network.

IP addresses are categorized into five classes, as shown in the diagram opposite. Youcan identify an IP address class by its first bits.

The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are most commonly used. IP addresses of classD are used for multicasting. IP addresses of class E are reserved.



Pub-Date


IP Transport Protocols on the Iub InterfaceIP Address Range

Note that some IP addresses are reserved for special purposes. The table belowdescribes the classified IP addressing.

NetworkType Address Range Available

Range Description

A 0.0.0.0127.255.255.255

1.0.0.0126.0.0.0 • An all-zero host number means that the IP

address is the network address for networkrouting.

• An all-one host number means that the IPaddress is used to broadcast messages to allthe hosts on the network.

• When the DHCP is used, the local host cantake 0.0.0.0 as the temporary IP address butnever as the valid destination address.

• The IP address with network number of 0represents the current network that can bereferenced by other computers without knowingits network number.

• All the IP addresses in the 127.X.X.X formatare reserved for loopback testing. The packetssent to this address are not sent to lines. Thepackets are handled internally as input packets.

B 128.0.0.0191.255.255.255

128.0.0.0191.254.0.0 • An all-zero host number means that the IP



C 192.0.0.0223.255.255.255

192.0.0.0223.255.254 .0 • An all-zero host number means that the IP



D 224.0.0.0239.255.255.255

None IP addresses of class D is used for multicasting.

E 240.0.0.0255.255.255.255

None Reserved. The IP address of 255.255.255.255 isused for broadcasting in the LAN.



11-47

Pub-Date



SCTPThe Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) is mainly used for reliablytransmitting datagrams through unreliable network.

Compared with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), the SCTP has the following advantages:

• Supporting the transmission of datagrams that are not delimitated by the upper layer• Having better real-time performance• Having higher security• Avoiding the blocking of line headers• Supporting the multi-homing function

The SCTP is more suitable than the TCP for the signaling transmission of higher requirements forreal-time performance, security and reliability. Therefore, it has a promising prospect for applications.

SCTP Endpoint

The SCTP endpoint is the logical transmitter or receiver of SCTP packets.

The SCTP endpoint on a multi-homing host can be either a group of valid destinationtransport addresses for data transmission to the peer host, or a group of valid originatingtransport addresses for transmitting SCTP packets.

All the transport addresses used by an SCTP endpoint must use the same port number but can usemultiple IP addresses. The transport address used by an SCTP endpoint at a time must be unique.

A transport address is defined by the network layer address, transport layer protocols, and port number.When the SCTP protocol works on the IP transport layer, the transport address is defined by the IPaddress and SCTP port number. Then, the SCTP protocol acts as the transport layer protocol.

SCTP Association

SCTP association is the mapping between two SCTP endpoints. It involves two SCTP endpoints andprotocol status data. The protocol status data includes verification tag and transport sequence number.

SCTP association is uniquely identified by the transport address of the SCTP endpoint that uses theSCTP association. There is a maximum of one SCTP association between two SCTP endpoints.

The SCTP message consists of the common header and the chunks the diagram onthe next page shows the SCTP message structure. Multiple chunks can be bundledand transmitted in one datagrams to save bandwidth.



Pub-Date





11-49

Pub-Date



Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and Layer 2/3 SwitchingThis allows packet forwarding decisions to be made using the data link layer (Ethernet etc).

Layer 2 Switching

Fundamentally a layer 2 device is a switch with physical ports. The main benefit of Layer 2switching is to make efficient use of network bandwidth. The first switches in fact sent trafficarriving on all input ports to all the output ports without any processing. As the networks becomemore complex it can be that, two or more ports on the same switch are connected to the sameLAN. This means that packets arriving at the switch leave on multiple ports onto the same LAN,hence duplicate packets are created which will lead to congestion in the network.

Layer 2 switching eliminates looping traffic by defining a Spanning Tree and uses a Spanning TreeProtocol to configure the spanning tree. The Spanning Tree Protocol identifies ports that are connectedto the same LAN and configures the switch to send any given packet out only on one port that isconnected to a given LAN. However the Spanning Tree Protocol keeps a track of these secondaryports and allows traffic to be passed if the primary port goes OOS for any reason.

Layer 3 Switching

A layer 2 device is a switch that communicates using frames at layer 1 over physical ports. Whereas aLayer 3 device is a router that communicates with packets. and a packet is encapsulated inside ofa frame. A router has interfaces for connection into the network medium i.e. Ethernet.

The Ethernet frame contains a source layer 2 MAC address and a destination layer 2 MAC address.The IP packet contains a source layer 3 IP address and a destination layer 3 IP address. The routermaintains a routing table of network paths it has discovered. The router will examine the layer 3 IPdestination address of the packet. It will examine the routing table and determine if a path exists.

VLANs

VLAN processing is an extension to the concept of Layer 2 switching. The VLAN adds a four bytetag field between the data link layer header (i.e. Ethernet) and the network layer (i.e. IP). This tagcontains among other things a VLAN Identifier (VID) and associated user priority field.

VLAN switches look for this tag and make a switching decision based on the taginformation that determines which port(s) to send the incoming packet out on. TheVLAN protocol defines three types of traffic:

• Untagged• Priority Tagged• VLAN Tagged.

Untagged packets are packets without any VLAN tag. Priority tagged packets are packetswith a VLAN tag, but a VID of zero (the NULL VID) and a valid priority field within the VLANtag. VLAN tagged packets contain a VLAN tag with a valid VID field (non-zero). VLAN-awareswitches must be able to classify and forward packets of all three types in order to workwith legacy equipment as well as other VLAN-aware equipment.

Incoming packets may be untagged, priority tagged, or VLAN tagged. Depending on how theswitch is configured, an untagged packet may leave priority-or- VLAN-tagged. Incoming VLANtagged packets may leave untagged or even tagged with a different VID.

There are also multiple ways of configuring what constitutes a VLAN. The VLAN specifications define aport-based approach where each port is a member of a particular VLAN. All traffic coming or going onthis port would be a member of the configured VLAN. There is also a MAC-based approach to VLANprocessing where membership on a VLAN is defined by the source MAC address of a remote host.



Pub-Date



RNCRNCNodeBNodeB

R R

Ethernet VLAN V18

Ethernet VLAN V18

VPN



11-51

Pub-Date





Pub-Date

Annexe A Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 12

Annexe A



12-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Annexe A




Pub-Date



• Describe selected UMTS Signalling Flow procedures.



12-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

Paging for a UE in Idle ModeThis example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Idle Mode. The UE may be pagedfor a CS or PS service. Since the UE is in RRC Idle Mode, the location is only known at CN leveland therefore paging is distributed over a defined geographical area (e.g. LA).

NOTE:

The example below illustrates scenario where LA spans across 2 RNCs.

1. The CN initiates the paging of a UE over a LA spanning two RNCs (i.e. RNC1 andRNC2) via a RANAP message called the Paging message.Parameters Sent:CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause.

2. Paging of UE performed by cell1 using Paging Type 1 message.3. Paging of UE performed by cell2 using Paging Type 1 message.

The UE detects page message from RNC1 (as example) and the procedure for NAS signallingconnection establishment follows. NAS message transfer can now be performed.This procedure described for RRC idle mode, applies also to the RRC connectedmode in the case of CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states.



Pub-Date

Paging for a UE in Idle Mode Version 1 Rev 0

Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

UENode B

1.1Node B

2.1RNC

1 RNC

2CN

RANAP

RANAP

RANAP

RANAP

2.PCCH: Paging Type 1

3.PCCH: Paging Type 1

1. Paging

1. Paging



12-5

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected ModeThis will occur in case the position of the UE is already known; a mobility managementsession will be active at this stage. Two possible solutions exists:

• The UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection.• The UE co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection.

The following example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC ConnectedMode (CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH states) when the UTRAN co-ordinates the pagingrequest with the existing RRC connection using DCCH.

1. CN initiates the paging of a UE via RANAP message Paging Request Message.Parameters used: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity,Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause.

2. SRNC sends RRC message Paging Type 2.



Pub-Date

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode Version 1 Rev 0

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

CN

RRC

RANAP

RRC

RANAP1. Paging

UEServing

RNC

2. DCCH Paging Type 2



12-7

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC Connection Establishment

RRC Connection EstablishmentThe following example shows establishment of a RRC connection in DedicatedTransport Channel (DCH) state.

The following sequence are identified:

1. The UE initiates set-up of an RRC connection by sending RRC messageConnection Request on CCCH.

Parameters used: Initial UE Identity, Establishment cause, Initial UE Capability.

2. The SRNC decides to use a DCH for this RRC connection, allocates RNTI andradio resources for the RRC connection. When a DCH is to be set-up, NBAP messageRadio Link Setup Request is sent to Node B.

Parameters used: Cell id, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, ULscrambling code(FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information.

3. Node B allocates resources, starts PHY reception, and responses with NBAP message, RadioLink Setup Response. Parameters used: Signalling link termination, Transport layer addressinginformation (AAL2 address, AAL2 Binding Identity) for the Iub Data Transport Bearer.

4. SRNC initiates set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. This requestcontains the AAL2 Binding Identity to bind the Iub Data Transport Bearer to the DCH. Therequest for set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer is acknowledged by Node B.

5./6. The Node B and SRNC establish synchronism for the Iub and Iur Data Transport Bearer bymeans of exchange of the appropriate DCH Frame Protocol frames Downlink Synchronisationand Uplink Synchronisation. Then Node B starts DL transmission.

7. Message RRC Connection Setup is sent on CCCH from SRNC to UE.

Parameters: Initial UE Identity, RNTI, Capability update Requirement, Transport Format Set,Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, DL scrambling code (FDD only), Time Slots(TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information.

8. Message RRC Connection Setup Complete is sent on DCCH from UE to SRNC.

Parameters: Integrity information, ciphering information.



Pub-Date

RRC Connection Establishment Version 1 Rev 0

RRC Connection Establishment

RRC

UEServing

RNCNode B

Serving RNS

NBAP

DCH

RRC

NBAP

NBAP NBAP

DCH

DCH DCH

RRC

RRC

RRC

RRC

Allocate RNTISelect L1 and L2

parameters

Start Rx

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

Start Rx

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

2. Radio Link Setup Request

3. Radio Link Setup Response

5. Downlink Synchronisation

6. Uplink Synchronisation

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup

8. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete



12-9

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC DCH Release

RRC DCH ReleaseThis example shows RRC Connection release of a dedicated channel, in the case of macrodiversity ontwo Nodes B’s; the first one connected to the Serving RNC, the second one to the Drift RNC.

1. The CN initiates the release of a dedicated Channel by sending the message IuRelease Command to the SRNC. Parameters used: Cause.

2. The SRNC confirms the release by sending an Iu Release Complete message to the CN.Parameters used: Data volume Report (if data volume reporting to PS is required).

3. The SRNC initiates release of Iu Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.4. Message RRC Connection Release from SRNC to UE to initiate the RRC connection release.

Parameters: Cause.5. Message RRC Connection Release Complete from UE to SRNC to confirm

the RRC connection release.6. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion to the Node B (SRNC).7. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Drift RNC.8. The Drift RNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion to the Node B (Drift RNC).9. The Node B (SRNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio

Link Deletion Response to the SRNC.10. The Node B (Drift RNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio

Link Deletion Response to the Drift RNC.11. The Drift RNC confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion Response to the SRNC.12. The Node B (SRNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.13. The Node B (Drift RNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.14. The Drift RNC initiates release of Iur Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.



Pub-Date

RRC DCH Release Version 1 Rev 0

RRC DCH Release

RRC

NBAP

RRC

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

RNSAP

RRC

RRC

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

RANAP

Node BServing RNS

UE Node BDrift RNS

DriftRNC

ServingRNC

CN

RANAP RANAP

RANAP

RNSAPRNSAP

RNSAP

1. Iu Release

2. Iu Release

3. ALCAP Iu Bearer Release

4. RRC connection Release

5. RRC Connection Release Complete

6. Radio Link Deletion

7. Radio LinkDeletion

8. Radio Link Deletion

9. Radio Link Deletion Response

10. Radio Link DeletionResponse

11. Radio Link

12. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release

13. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release ALCAP Iur Bearer Release

Complete

Complete

DeletionResponse



12-11

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 RA Update

RA UpdateThis example shows location registration when changing Routing Area including change of3G SGSN when the UE is in MM idle state towards the 3G SGSN.

The illustrated transfer of MM signalling to/from the UE uses an established RRC connection. ThisRRC connection can have been established beforehand due to ongoing inter-working between UE and3G-MSC/VLR or be established only for this location registration procedure towards the 3G-SGSN. Foreach indicated MM message sent in this case to/from UE, the CN discriminator indicates 3G-SGSN.

The following procedure will take place to perform the RA update:

1. The RRC connection is established, if not already done. The UE sends the initial messageRouting Area Update Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI, etc.) to the new 3G-SGSN. The old P-TMSIand the old RAI are assigned data in UMTS. The SRNS transfers the message to the 3G-SGSN.The sending of this message to 3G-SGSN will also imply establishment of a signalling connectionbetween SRNS and 3G-SGSN for the concerned UE. The UTRAN shall add the RAC and theLAC of the cell where the message was received before passing the message to the SGSN.

2. The new 3G-SGSN send an SGSN Context Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI) to the old3G-SGSN to get the IMSI for the UE. (The old RAI received from UE is used to derivethe old 3G-SGSN identity/address.) The old 3G-SGSN responds with SGSN ContextResponse (e.g. IMSI, PDP context information and Authentication triplets).

3. Security functions may be executed.4. The new 3G-SGSN informs the HLR of the change of 3G-SGSN by sending Update

GPRS Location (IMSI, SGSN number, SGSN address) to the HLR.5. The HLR cancels the context in the old 3G-SGSN by sending Cancel Location (IMSI). The

old 3G-SGSN removes the context and acknowledges with Cancel Location Ack.6. The HLR sends Insert Subscriber Data (IMSI, subscription data) to the new 3G-SGSN.

The new 3G-SGSN acknowledges with Insert Subscriber Data Ack.7. The HLR acknowledges the Update GPRS Location by sending Update GPRS

Location Acknowledge to the new 3G-SGSN.8. The new 3G-SGSN validates the UE’s presence in the new RA. If due to regional, national

or international restrictions the UE is not allowed to attach in the RA or if subscriptionchecking fails, then the new 3G-SGSN rejects the Routing Area Update Request withan appropriate cause. If all checks are successful, then the new 3G-SGSN responds tothe UE with Routing Area Update Accept (new P-TMSI, new RAI, etc.).

9. The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI with Routing Area Update Complete.10. When the location registration procedure is finished, the 3G-SGSN may release the signalling

connection towards the SRNS for the concerned UE. The SRNS will then release the RRCconnection if there is no signalling connection between 3G-MSC/VLR and SRNS for the UE.



Pub-Date

RA Update Version 1 Rev 0

RA UpdateOld

3G_SGSNUE HLRSRNS

New3G_SGSN

1. RRC connectionestablishment

1. RRC update required (old RAI, old P-TMSI)2. SGSN Context Required (old P-TMSI, old RAI)

2. SGSN Context Resp. (IMSI, Auth.triplets)

3. Security Functions

4. Update GPRS Location5. Cancel Location

6. Insert Subscriber Data

6. Insert Subscriber Data Ack

7. Update GPRS Location Ack8. RA upd Accept (new RAI, new P-TMSI

9. RA update complete

10. Release

10. RRC connection release

5. Cancel Location Ack



12-13

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 SRNC Relocation

SRNC RelocationThis example shows SRNS relocation when the source RNC and target RNCare connected to different 3G-MSC.

The procedure is as follows:

1. The UTRAN makes the decision to perform the Serving RNC relocation procedure,including the decision of onto which RNC (Target RNC) the Serving RNC functionalityis to be relocated. The source SRNC sends SRNC Relocation required messagesto the MSC. This message includes parameters such as target RNC identifier and aninformation field that shall be passed transparently to the target RNC.

2. Upon reception of SRNC Relocation required message the Anchor MSC prepares itself for theswitch and determines from the received information that the SRNC relocation will (in this case)involve another MSC. The Anchor MSC will then send a Prepare SRNC Relocation Request tothe applicable non-anchor MSC, including the information received from the Source RNC.

3. The non-anchor MSC will send a SRNC Relocation Request message to the target RNC.This message includes information for building up the SRNC context, transparently sentfrom Source RNC (UE ID, No of connected CN nodes, UE capability information), anddirectives for setting up Iu user plane transport bearers. When Iu user plane transportbearers have been established, and target RNC has completed its preparation phase,SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 message is sent to the non-anchor MSC.

4. The Prepare SRNC Relocation Response that is sent from non-anchor MSC to Anchor MSC willcontain the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 received" command from the target RNC.

5. When the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1" command has been received in the AnchorMSC, the user plane transport bearers has been allocated between the target RNC andAnchor MSC and the Anchor MSC is ready for the SRNC move. Then the Anchor MSCindicates the completion of preparation phase at the CN side for the SRNC relocation bysending the SRNC relocation proceeding 2 message to the Source RNC.

6. When the source RNC has received the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 2" message, thesource RNC sends a SRNC Relocation Commit message to the target RNC. The targetRNC executes switch for all bearers at the earliest suitable time instance.

7. Immediately after a successful switch at RNC, the target RNC (=SRNC) sends "SRNC RelocationComplete" message to the non-anchor MSC. This message is included by the non-anchor MSCin the "Complete SRNC relocation message" that is sent to the anchor MSC. Upon reception ofthis message, the Anchor-MSC switches from the old Iu transport bearers to the new ones.

8. After a successful switch at the Anchor MSC, a release indication is sent towards the SourceRNC. This will imply release of all UTRAN resources that were related to this UE.

9. When the target RNC is acting as SRNC, it will send New MM System Informationto the UE indicating e.g. relevant Routing Area and Location Area. Additional RRCinformation may then also be sent to the UE, e.g. new RNTI identity.



Pub-Date

SRNC Relocation Version 1 Rev 0

SRNC RelocationUE Source

RNCTargetRNC

AnchorMSC

HLR Non-anchorMSC

1. SRNC Relocation Required

2. Prepare SRNC Relocation

3. SRNC Relocation Request

3. SRNC Relocation Proceeding

4. Prepare SRNC response

5. SRNC Reloc Proceed 2

6. SRNC RelocCommit

7. SRNC Reloc Complete

7. Complete SRNC Reloc

8. Release

9. New MM System Info

10. Routing Area Update

(a)

(b)



12-15

Pub-Date





Pub-Date





Pub-Date





Pub-Date

Glossary Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 13

Glossary



13-1

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Glossary




Pub-Date

Glossary of technical terms Version 1 Rev 0

Glossary of technical termsThis Glossary of technical terms contains standard Motorola acronyms, abbreviationsand numbers used throughout the documentation set.

A Interface - AUTO

3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project

8-PSK 8 Symbol Phase Shift Keying

A Interface Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on theuse of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on theselinks can be used for traffic or signalling.

A3 Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND andKi.

A38 A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8.

A5 Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that producesciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc.

A8 Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc usingRAND and Ki.

AA Anonymous Access

AAL-2 ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (for real-time services) (ïƒ³ ITU-T I.363.2)

AAL-5 ATM-Adaptation Layer 5 (non-real time) (ïƒ³ ITU-T I.363.5)

A-Bit Acknowledgement Request Bit (ïƒ³ used in LLC-protocol ïƒ³Logical Link Control)

AB See Access Burst.

Abis interface Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offersa GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. TheMotorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic andthus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS.

ABM Asynchronous Balanced Mode

ABR Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to totalnumber of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reflects theperformance of the total network

ac-dc PSM AC-DC Power Supply module.

ac Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when chargecarriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse theirdirection of movement. Household utility current in most countriesis AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cyclesper second). The RF current in antennas and transmission linesis another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal,square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregularor complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced bycertain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPSwhen it is operating from its battery.

AC Access Class (C0 to C15).

AC Application Context.

ACC Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congestedswitches automatically communicate their congestion level toother switches. (3GTS 22.011)



13-3

Pub-Date

Version 1 Rev 0 Glossary of technical terms

Glossary of technical termsAccess Burst The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries

RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call.

ACCH Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated withTCH or DCCH.

ACK, Ack ACKnowledgement.

ACM Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained withinthe SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) forboth the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons,the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented,not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible afterentering PIN2.

ACM Address Complete Message.

ACPIM AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTSequipment.

AC PSM AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment.

ACSE Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of thethree Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in theapplication layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to thelower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a titlefor identification. See also ASI and ROSE.

ACU Antenna Combining Unit.

A/D Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC.

ADC ADministration Centre.

ADC Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signalthat is a function of a continuous variable into a representativenumber sequence carrying equivalent information.

ADCCP Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-orienteddata-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point andpoint-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that containerror-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembleshigh-level data link control (HDLC).

ADM Asynchronous Disconnected Mode

ADM ADMinistration processor.

ADMIN ADMINistration.

ADN Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephoneservice feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits toaccess a network than are required under the nominal numberingplan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequentlydialled numbers.

ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differentialpulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithmis adjusted in accordance with specific characteristics of the inputsignal.

AE Application Entity. The system-independent application activitiesthat are made available as application services to the applicationagent.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsAEC Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power

level of an echo or the elimination of an echo.

AEF Additional Elementary Functions.

AET Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the EventsLog in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscriptionlists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they arere-routed to different subscription lists.

AFC Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintainsthe frequency of an oscillator within the specified limits withrespect to a reference frequency.

AFN Absolute Frame Number.

AGC Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain isautomatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of aspecified parameter, such as received signal level.

AGCH Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used toassign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH.

AH Authentication Header (ïƒ³ RFC 2402)

Ai Action indicator.

AI Acquisition Indicator

AI Artificial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goalis to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of thecharacteristics of human intelligence. Among these propertiesare logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to makedecisions based on past experience or insufficient or conflictinginformation, and the ability to understand natural language.

AIB Alarm Interface Board.

AICH Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

AIO A class of processor.

Air interface The radio link between the BTS and the MS.

AL See Application Layer.

ALCAP Access Link Control Application Part (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.2630.1 /Q.2630.2)

AM Acknowledged Mode operation (ïƒ³ UMTS-RLC)

AM Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of acarrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristicof the modulating signal.

AMA Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service featurethat automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls.

AMD Acknowledged Mode Data (ïƒ³UMTS RLC PDU-type)

AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-ratesof 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the airinterface.

AM/MP Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A messagebroadcast to all MSs in a cell.



13-5

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsANSI American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the primary

organisation for fostering the development of technologystandards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groupsand is the U.S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long establishedcomputer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI.

Antenna A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RFand vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RFsignals between the BTS and MS.

AoC Advice of Charge.

AoCC Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service.

AoCI Advice of Charge Information supplementary service.

AOC Automatic Output Control.

AP Application Process.

AP-AICH CPCH Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTSPhysical Channel)

API Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator

APN Access Point Name (ïƒ³ Reference to a GGSN)

Application Layer See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of sevenhierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs commonapplication services for, the application processes. It also issuesrequests to the Presentation Layer. The common applicationservices provide semantic conversion between associatedapplication processes.

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM availablefrequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCNfor one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come aroundagain. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMAframe. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called aphysical channel.

ARQ Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission inwhich the receiver detects transmission errors in a message andautomatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter.

ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds aNetwork Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physicalhardware address, e.g., Ethernet address.(RFC 826)

AS Application Server

AS Access Stratum (ïƒ³ UMTS)

ASC Access Service Class

ASCE Association Control Service Element. An ASE which providesan AP with the means to establish and control an associationwith an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentationlayer (OMC).



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is

a standard developed by ANSI to define how computers writeand read characters. It is the most common format for text filesin computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII file, alphabetic,numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binarydigit binary number. 128 possible characters are defined. UNIXand DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) useASCII for text files. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode.IBM’s System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code calledextended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversionprograms allow different operating systems to change a file fromone code to another.

ASE Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integratedfunctions to help accomplish application communication, e.g.,within an application entity (AE).

ASE Application Specific Entity (TCAP).

AS-ILCM Application Server - Incoming Leg Control Model

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation usedfor describing data transmitted by telecommunicationsprotocols, regardless of language implementation and physicalrepresentation of these data, whatever the application, whethercomplex or very simple.(ïƒ³ ITU-T X.680 / X.681)

AS-OLCM Application Server - Outgoing Leg Control Model

ASP Alarm and Status Panel.

ASR Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that arecompleted successfully.

ATB All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks(paths) in a given trunk group are busy.

AT-Command Attention-Command

Ater The interface between XCDR and BSC.

ATI Antenna Transceiver Interface.

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing andswitching method utilising fixed-length cells of 53 octets tosupport multiple types of traffic. (ïƒ³ ITU-T I.361)

ATT (flag) ATTach.

ATTS Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality oftelephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can beinitiated by either an operator command or by a command file,which can be activated at a predetermined time.

AU Access Unit.

AUC Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides thefunctionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested bythe system. Often a part of the HLR.

AUT(H) AUThentication.

AUTO AUTOmatic mode.



13-7

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsB Interface - Byte

B Interface Interface between MSC and VLR.

BA BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in acell for BCCH transmission.

BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service.

BAOC Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service.

Baud The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signallingrate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is onesymbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. Thiscoincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation withno framing or stop bits

BBBX Battery Backup Board.

BBH Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which eachtransceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency,and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst.

BCC Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of theBSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.See also NCC and BSIC.

BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used tobroadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell orsector basis.

BCD Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by aunique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits.

BCF Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digitalcontrol circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites thisis a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is locatedin the BTS cabinet.

B channel Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data,when used at full capacity.

BCH Broadcast Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

BCIE Bearer Capability Information Element. Specific GSM parametersin the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling tothe network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request abearer service (BS) from the network.

BCTP Bearer Control Tunneling Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.1990)

BCU Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS whichprovides the base control function at a BTS site. The term nolonger applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU).

BCUP Base Controller Unit Power.

BEC Backward Error Correction

BEG BEGin Message (ïƒ³ TCAP)

BEP Bit Error Probability.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsBER Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total

number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over somestipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefficientand a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5.

BES Business Exchange Services.

BFI Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decodedspeech frames. See FER.

BG Border Gateway

BGCF Breakout Gateway Control Function

BH Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minuteperiod during which occurs the maximum total traffic load in agiven 24-hour period.

BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that aswitch processes during a BH. See also BH.

BI Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service.

BIB Backward Indicator Bit

BIB Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2Mbit/s circuits. See also T43.

BICC Bearer Independent Call Control (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.1902.1 – Q.1902.6)

BIC-Roam Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the HomePLMN Country supplementary service.

Bi-directional neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour..

BIM Balanced-line Interconnect Module.

Bin From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information.Also, a name for a directory that contain files stored in binaryformat.

BL BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databasesand software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS.

BLER Block Error Rate

BLLNG BiLLiNG.

bit Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two statesor digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two.Also, a unit of storage capacity.

bit/s Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed.The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in onesecond. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link whichtransfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at8 bps.

block A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which aparity check procedure is applied for error control purposes.

Bm Full rate traffic channel. See also Full Rate.

BMC Broadcast / Multicast Control (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.324)



13-9

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsBN Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular

bit period within a timeslot.

BPF Bandpass Filter. A filter that ideally passes all frequenciesbetween two non-zero finite limits and bars all frequencies notwithin the limits.

BPSM µBCU Power Supply Module.

BRI Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interfaceallowing simultaneous voice and data services provided overtwo clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/schannel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D.

BS Base Station. See BSS.

BS Basic Service (group).

BS Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service thatprovides the capability for the transmission of signals betweenuser-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used tosupport a bearer service may be identical to that used to supportother types of telecommunication service.

BSC Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMNwhich has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. TheBSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS)but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs(see BCF, BCU, and BSU).

BS_CV_MAX Maximum Countdown Value to be used by the mobile station (ïƒ³Countdown Procedure)

BSG Basic Service Group.

BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. Itis a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguishbetween different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is anoctet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC)and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). Theremaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC.

BSIC-NCELL BSIC of an adjacent cell.

BSP Base Site control Processor (at BSC).

BSN Backward Sequence Number. A field in a signal unit (SU) thatcontains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctlyreceived signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that isbeing returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU.

BSS Base Station System. The system of base station equipment(Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by theMSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible forcommunicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipmentof a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of oneor more base stations. If an internal interface is implementedaccording to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then theBSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsBSSAP BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or

LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAPand BSSMAP messages. Supports message communicationbetween the MSC and BSS.

BSSGP Base Station System GPRS Protocol

BSSC Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which housesone or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at aremote transcoder (RXCDR).

BSSMAP Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7).Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchangedbetween the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages.

BSSOMAP BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7).

BSU Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digitalcontrol modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (partof BSSC cabinet).

BT British Telecom.

BT Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reflections on the bus,each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginningand at its end with the characteristic impedance.

BTC Bus Terminator Card.

BTF Base Transceiver Function.

BTP Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic taskgroups within the GPROC.

BTS Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSMPLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. TheBTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs).

Burst A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physicalcontent of a timeslot.

BVCI BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

Byte A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit.Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. Abyte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in adata store or memory.

C - CW

C/R-Bit Command / Response Bit

C/T-Field logical Channel / Transport channel identification Field

C Conditional.

C Interface Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC.

C7 See SS7.

CA Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to aparticular cell.

CA Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS.

CAB Cabinet.



13-11

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCADM Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used within

DataGen to create new country and network files in the DataGendatabase.

CAI Channel Assignment Indicator

CAI Charge Advice Information.

CAT Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola CellOptimization product. It is intended for engineering staff andOMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSMnetwork cell performance.

CB Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells configured forGPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this processsends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable tothe appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved toan INS (IN Service) PRP.

CB Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS.

CB Circuit Breaker.

CBA Cell Broadcast Agent.

CBC Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMSmessages.

CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcastmessages to all MSs in a specific cell.

CBF Combining Bandpass Filter.

CBL Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allowscommunications between the BSS and the CBC.

CBM Circuit Breaker Module.

CBMI Cell Broadcast Message Identifier.

CBS Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS.

CBSMS Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a numberof unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSswithin a particular region. The content may include informationsuch as local traffic conditions, the weather, the phone number ofthe local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBCvia a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcastchannel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outsidethe PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, aBSC is only connected to one CBC.

CBUS Clock Bus.

CC Connection Confirm. Part of SCCP network connectivity.

CC Country Code. A one to three digit number which specificallyidentifies a country of the world that an international call is beingrouted to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom).

CC Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations androuteing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunksare performed by the MSC.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCCB Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are

two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These,with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. Thesecond card may be used for redundancy.

CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service.

CCCH Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channelsused to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH,and RACH.

CCCH_GROUP Group of MSs in idle mode.

CCPCH Common Control Physical Channel (see also P-CCPCH andS-CCPCH)

CCD Common Channel Distributor.

CCDSP Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor.

CCF Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC.

CCH Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carrysystem management messages.

CCH Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSMRecommendations).

CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique.This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS.

CCM Current Call Meter.

CCP Capability/Configuration Parameter.

CCPE Control Channel Protocol Entity.

CCS Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred secondsis one CCS. Also, a measure of traffic load obtained by multiplyingthe number of calls per hour by the average holding time per callexpressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practiceto mean hundred call seconds per hour with “per hour" implied;as such, it is a measure of traffic intensity. See also erlang.

CCTrCH Coded Composite Transport Channel (UMTS)

CCU Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions:Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radiochannel measurement functions, including received quality level,received signal level, and information related to timing advancemeasurements.

Cct Circuit.

CD/CA-ICH Collision Detection / Channel Assignment Indicator Channel(UMTS Physical Channel)

CDB Control Driver Board.

CDE Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software(crontab - cron job file).

CDI Collision Detection Indicator



13-13

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCDMA Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular

technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlikecompeting systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA doesnot assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, everychannel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversationsare encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence.

CDR Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, whichincludes calling and called numbers, local and remote nodenames, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure classfields. This is the information needed to bill the customer for callsand facility usage data for calls.

CD-ROM Compact Disk-Read Only Memory.

CDUR Chargeable DURation.

CEB Control Equalizer Board (BTS).

CED Called station identifier.

CEIR Central Equipment Identity Register.

Cell By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At anomni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell issynonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systemswhere cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below)

CEND End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, partystops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalentprocedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path.

CEPT Conférence des administrations Européennes des Postes etTelecommunications.

CERM Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identifies when discontinuity isdetected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to theOMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specifiedthreshold. The alarm identifies the RCI or CIC and the pathwhere the error is detected.

CF Conversion Facility.

CF Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephoneuser whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorisedsubscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorisedsubscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number.See also CFC and CFU.

CF Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility managementfunctions and OA&M functions for the GSN module.

CFB Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementaryservice. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phonebusy situations.

CFC Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or notreachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy.

CFM Configuration Fault Management RSS process.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCFNRc Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable

supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incomingcalls for not reachable situations.

CFNRy Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations.

CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects all incoming calls.

CG Charging Gateway.

CGF Charging Gateway Function.

Channel A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence ofperiods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a definedfrequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence ofperiods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system.

CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1334)

CIM Coaxial Interconnect Module.

Channel Mode See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modesthat are currently used.

CHP CHarging Point.

CHV Card Holder Verification information.

CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number whichis associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensureauthentication consistency between the MS and the VLR.

CI Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within alocation area.

CI CUG Index.

C/I Carrier to Interference ratio.

CIC Circuit Identity Code. The unique identifier of the terrestrialportion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/sconnection depending on whether a site has local or remotetranscoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a completeE1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding,occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot.

CIC Call Instance Code (ïƒ³ BICC)

CID Channel Identity (ïƒ³ ATM)

CIDR Classless Inter-Domain Routing (ïƒ³ RFC 1519)

CIO Cell Individual Offset (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.331)

CIR, C/I Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal powerlevel relative to the interference power level.

Ciphertext Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment.

CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number.

CLI Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIPand CLIR.

CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service.Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR.



13-15

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.

Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party.See also CLIP.

CLK Clock.

CLKX Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributesGCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc).

CLM ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control overthe BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is,messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call).This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting andcircuit blocking.

CLR CLeaR.

CM Configuration Management. Configuration management allowsthe operator to perform network configuration tasks, and tomaintain all details of the network configuration at the OMC.

CM Connection Management. See CLM.

CM Connectionless Manager. See CLM.

CMD CoMmanD.

CMM Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request achannel mode change. When it has received the CMM message,the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replieswith a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicatingthe new channel mode.

CMIP Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used forcommunication over the OML.

CMISE Common Management Information Service Element. An ASEwhich provides a means to transfer management information viaCMIP messages with another NE over an association establishedby ASCE using ROSE (OMC).

CMR Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates.

CNG CalliNg tone.

Codec Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into adigital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa.

CODEX Manufacturer’s name for a type of multiplexer and packet switchcommonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R.

Coincident Cell A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-locatedneighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type,but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell.

COLI COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See alsoCOLP and COLR.

Collocated Placed together; two or more items together in the same place.

Colour Code An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signalsfrom another cell.

COLP COnnected Line Identification Presentation supplementaryservice. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of theconnected party. See also COLR.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCOLR COnnected Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.

Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from thecalling party. See also COLP.

COM Code Object Manager (software).

COM COMplete.

COMB Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combinetransmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna.

COMM, Comms COMMunications.

CommHub Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IProuteing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complexE1 interfaces to the public data network.

CommsLink Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link.

Compact PCI See cPCI.

CON CONtinue Message (ïƒ³ TCAP)

CONF CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls.

CONFIG CONFIGuration Control Program.

Congestion Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all theservice it is requesting.

CONNACK CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronizationprocess. After a connection has been established, the CONNACKmessage indicates that traffic channels are available.

CP Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS toBSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated callsand inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers.

CPCH Common Packet Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)ïƒ³ FDDonly

cPCI Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standardsthat define a common card cage, power supplies, and processorboards.

CPCS Common Part Convergence Sublayer

CPGM CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the pagingmessages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS.

CPICH Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see alsoP-CPICH and S-CPICH)

CPS Code and Puncturing Scheme.

CPU Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controlsthe interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portionof a digital communications switch that executes programmedinstructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations onsignals, and controls input/output functions.

C/R Command/Response field bit.

CR Carriage Return (RETURN).



13-17

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCR Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An

SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to theMSC to establish a connection. See also CREF.

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that(a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digitalsignals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and(c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the receiveddigital signal.

CRE Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishinga call in the event of a radio link failure.

CREF Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Ina number of operating circumstances, a CREF message maybe sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a ConnectionRequest (CR).

CRM Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activatestimeslots and subchannels on the available carriers.

CRM Cell Resource Machine.

CRM-LS/HS Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speedmodem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services underV.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used tointerwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32,or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards.

CNRC Controlling RNC

CRO Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of acustomer site implementation of a new product, software release,or combination of products/releases.

CRT Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal).

CS Coding Scheme

CS Circuit Switched.

CS-1 GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH).




CSCF Call Session Control Function (ïƒ³ SIP)

CSD Circuit Switched Data

CSFP Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROCdevice which facilitates the propagating of new software instanceswith reduced system down time. See also IP.

CSICH CPCH Status Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

CSP Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC.

CSPDN Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly availablecommunications network using circuit switched digital datacircuits.

CT Call Transfer supplementary service.

CT Channel Tester.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsCT Channel Type.

CTCH Common Traffic Channel (Logical) ïƒ³ PTM

CTP Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operatorsof GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune andoptimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to beanalysed and decoded.

CTP Control Terminal Port.

CTR Common Technical Regulation.

CTS Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communicationlinks, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to atransmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed.Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS.

CTU Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio).

CUG Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is usedto control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating aunique group. When a CUG is configured for an interface, onlythose subscribers that are members of the same CUG canreceive/place calls.

Cumulative value The total value for an entire statistical interval.

CV Countdown Value

CW Code Word

CW Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature whichallows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in acall to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. Theuser has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate theexisting conversation and respond to the second call.

cwnd Congestion window

D Interface - DYNET

D Interface Interface between VLR and HLR.

D/A Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC.

DAB Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet).

DAC Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an inputnumber sequence into a function of a continuous variable.

DACS Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator andorganizer for Tl / El based systems.

DAK Downlink Acknowledgement

DAN Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC).

DAS Data Acquisition System.

DAT Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/formatthat maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROMmedium/format.

DataGen Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola offline BSS binary objectconfiguration tool.



13-19

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsData Link Layer See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from the

Network Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer.It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer databetween network entities and to detect and possibly correcterrors that may occur in the Physical Layer.

dB Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numericquantities. See also dBm.

DB DataBase.

DB Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst).

DBA DataBase Administration/Database Administrator.

dBm A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt.

DBMS DataBase Management System.

dc Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional flow or movement ofelectric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of thecurrent can vary with time, but the general direction of movementstays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is usedin reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses.

DCB Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU).

DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channelsused to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH,FACCH, and SACCH.

DCD Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal defined by theRS-232-C specification that indicates that a device such as amodem is on-line and ready for transmission.

DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performsfunctions such as signal conversion and coding, at thenetwork end of the line between the DTE and the line.Also, The RS232 configuration designated for computers. DCEequipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straightcable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable.

DCF Data Communications Function.

DCF Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).

DCH Dedicated CHannel (Transport)

D channel Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling andconnection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channelcan also be used to carry user data.

DCN Data Communications Network. A DCN connects NetworkElements with internal mediation functions or mediation devicesto the Operations Systems.

DC PSM DC Power Supply Module.

DCS1800 Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone networkusing digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, butoperating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit).

DDF Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).The DDF is an integrated combiner, filter and duplexer.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsDDS DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and output

files.

DDS Data Drive Storage.

DDS Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highlyaccurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency overa wide range), low-distortion output waveforms.

DEQB Diversity Equalizer Board.

DES Data Encryption Standard

DET DETach.

DFE Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function.The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) thresholdby using error feedback.

DGT Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant datarelating to a specified problem and copies it to tape or file,together with a problem description. The file or tape is then sentto Motorola for analysis.

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2131)

DHP Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device locatedat Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slaveHorizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents isresponsible for providing DRI and carrier support.

DIA Drum Intercept Announcer.

Digit 4 Bit

DINO E1/HDSL Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).

DINO T1 Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).

DISC DISConnect.

Discon Discontinuous.

DIQ Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase.

DIR Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS.

DL Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer.

DL See Downlink.

DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier. In frame-relay transmissionsystems, 13-bit field that defines the destination address of apacket. The address is local on a link-by-link basis.

DLD Data Link Discriminator.

DLNB Diversity Low Noise Block.

DLR Destination Local Reference

DLS DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames intoRLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface.

DLSP Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP anda shelf GPROC.

DLSP Digital Link Signalling Processor.

Dm Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).



13-21

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsDMA Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an

immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA).

DMA Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device,such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passingthrough the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory athigh speeds with no processor overhead.

DMR Digital Mobile Radio.

DMX Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s networkedEMX family).

DN Directory Number.

DNIC Data Network Identifier Code. In the CCITT International X.121format, the first four digits indicate the international data number,the next three digits are the data country code, and the final digitis the network code.

DNS Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logicaldomain or equipment names to IP addresses.

Downlink Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MSreceives).

DP Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument thatinterrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determinedby the selected digit and the operating characteristics of theinstrument.

DPC Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signallingmessage that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the(signalling) destination point of the message.

DPC Digital Processing and Control board.

DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel (UMTS / Term to combine DPDCHand DPCCH)

DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

DPCM Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal issampled and the difference between the actual value of eachsample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sampleor samples, is quantified and converted, by encoding, to adigital signal. Note: There are several variations of differentialpulse-code modulation.

DPNSS Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABXinterface).

DPP Dual Path Preselector. BTS module.

DPR, DPRAM Dual Port Random Access Memory.

DPROC Data PROCessor.

DPSM Digital Power Supply Module.

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductormemory in which the information is stored in capacitors on aintegrated circuit.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsDRC Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol

conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits.Part of IWF.

DRCU Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital controlcircuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS.

DRI Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding andencryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS.

DRIM Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extramemory.

DRIX DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU.Part of the BSS.

DRNC Drift Radio Network Controller

DRX, DRx Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving batterypower (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically andautomatically switching the MS receiver on and off.

DS-1 Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal level 1). Termused to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U.S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe)digital signal carried on a T1 facility.

DS-2 German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface).

DSCH Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

DSE Data Switching Exchange.

DSI Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relieson the pauses between speech bursts to provide additionalcompression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1compression on the average on their line.

DSN Digital Switching Network

DSO 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1.

DSP Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computerprocessing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematicalprocessing.

DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interfacesignalling.

DSSI Diversity Signal Strength Indication.

DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processingprotocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly betweenthe MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS.

DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel (UMTS Logical Channel)

DTE Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument thatconverts user information into signals for transmissionor reconverts the received signals into user information.Also, the RS232 configuration designated for terminals. DTEequipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but toother DTE equipment only with a null modem.

DTF Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunkinterface equipment.

DT1 DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity).



13-23

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsDTI Digital Trunk Interface.

DTM Dual Transer Mode.

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in whichspecified combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from agroup of four low frequencies and the other from a group of fourhigher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tonetelephone makes when it dials a number.

DTR Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of flow control (RS232Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTEto the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE isready to transmit data.

DTRX Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro(M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)).

DTX, DTx Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of savingbattery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducinginterference by automatically switching the transmitter off whenno speech or data are to be sent.

Dummy burst A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is adefined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummyburst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information isto be delivered to a channel.

DYNET DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamicresources.

E - EXEC

E See Erlang.

E1 Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by EuropeanCEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voiceor data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/schannel for framing and maintenance.

E Interface Interface between MSC and MSC.

EA External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Dooropen, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder.

EAS External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoringof all customer-defined environmental alarms at a site. Thecustomer defines the alarm string and the severity of the alarmsbased on the individual requirements of the site. Indications areprovided when the alarms are set or cleared.

Eb/No Energy per Bit/Noise floor, where Eb is the signal energy per bitand No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth.

EBCG Elementary Basic Service Group.

EC Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits.If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hearsthe voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delayintroduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms).

ECB Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels(EC).



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsECID The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division.

ECM Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sendingmachine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times.

Ec/No Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density.

ECSD Enhanced Circuit Switched Data (ïƒ³ HSCSD + EDGE)

ECT Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about thenumber and type of events and alarms generated throughout thenetwork. It extracts data from the event log files for specifieddates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual networkelements, groups of elements, or the whole network.

ECT Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables auser to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in atelephone call and leave the connection himself.

EDGE Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution.

EEL Electric Echo Loss.

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. AnEEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased byexposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM,EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off.

EGPRS Enhanced GPRS.

EGSM900 Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a furtherrange of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs canuse the extended frequency band as well as the primary band,while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band.A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrierhardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit).

EI Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI.

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance.

EIR Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralizeddatabase for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists ofIMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are knownto have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIswhich have been reported stolen or which are to be denied servicefor some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems(for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufficientlysignificant to warrant a black listing.

EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product ofthe power supplied to an antenna and its gain.

EIRP Equipment Identity Register Procedure.

EL Echo Loss.

EM Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides acentralised facility for reporting network-wide generated eventsand alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network.



13-25

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsEMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment,

and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operatein their intended operational environments without sufferingunacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradationbecause of electromagnetic radiation or response.

EMF Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from asource that produces a flow of electricity in a circuit; expressedin volts.

EMI Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbancethat interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits theeffective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

eMLPP enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. Thisservice has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedenceinvolves assigning a priority level to a call in combination withfast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources,which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher levelprecedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emptioncan also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lowerprecedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence.

EMMI Electrical Man Machine Interface.

EMX Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s MSC family).

en bloc Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme);En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system toanother ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the sametime as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending.A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all thedigits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the nextsystem. All the digits are then sent as a group.

END END Message (ïƒ³ TCAP)

EOP Enhanced One-Phase

EOT End of Tape.

EPCR EGPRS Packet Channel Request.

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type ofmemory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultravioletlight. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible tore-program the memory.

EPSM Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earthcabinets.

EQ50 Static model against which the performance of the equalizer istested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250.

EQB Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slotseach with equalizing circuitry and a DSP.

EQCP Equalizer Control Processor.

EQDSP Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor.

Equalization The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is renderedessentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though thetransmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary withfrequency.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsEqualizer An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or

phase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provideequalization.

Erlang International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined asthe ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is availablefor occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this isalso known as a traffic unit (TU).

ERP Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headsetacoustic responses.

ERP Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antennamultiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction.

ERR ERRor.

ESN Electronic Serial Number (North American Market)

ESP Encapsulating Security Payload (ïƒ³ RFC 2406)

ESP Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for ananti-static wrist strap.

ESQL Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMSprogramming interface language.

E-TACS Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended).

Ethernet A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband localarea network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple accesswith collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method,implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishingthe physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network.

ETR ETSI Technical Report.

ETS European Telecommunication Standard.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

ETX End of Transmission.

EXEC Executive Process.

F Interface - Full Rate

F Interface Interface between MSC and EIR.

FA Fax Adaptor. Device which complements Group 3 facsimileapparatus in order to be able to communicate over a GSMPLMN.

FA Full Allocation.

FA Functional Area.

FAC Final Assembly Code.

FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated controlchannel which temporarily uses the TCH to perform high speedtransmissions, and carries control information after a call is setup. See also SDCCH.

FACCH/F Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate. See also Full Rate.



13-27

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsFACCH/H Fast Associated Control Channel/Half rate. See also Half Rate.

FACH Forward Access Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

FB See Frequency correction burst.

FBI Feedback Information ïƒ³ UMTS

FBI Final Block Indicator

FBM Flow control Buffer Management. FBM is a functional unitresiding on the PRP. It controls buffer capacity for each celland each mobile so that the incoming data from the SGSNmatches the air throughput.

FC-AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop. A serial data transferarchitecture. FC-AL is designed for mass storage devices andother peripheral devices that require very high bandwidth.Using optical fibre to connect devices, FC-AL supportsfull-duplex data transfer rates of 100MBps.

FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel. A GSM broadcast controlchannel which carries information for frequency correction ofthe MS.

FCP Fault Collection Process. Part of the fault management processin the BTS.

FCS Frame Check Sequence. The extra characters added to aframe for error detection and correction.

FDD Frequency Division Duplex

FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interconnect (optical Layer 2)

FDM Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique thatuses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of datafor transmission over a communications medium. FDM assignsa discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and thencombines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission.

FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequencydivision to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissionsto a single transponder.

FDN Fixed Dialling Number. The fixed dialling feature limits diallingfrom the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIMcard. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchangesor full phone numbers.

FDP Fault Diagnostic Procedure.

FEC Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors bytransmitting additional information with the original bit stream.If an error is detected, the additional information is used torecreate the original information.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsFEP Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driver

that stores data in its own database about all of the sites in thesystem. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It canalso interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually orautomatically at pre-defined times.

FER Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded goodspeech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames.

FFS, FS For Further Study.

FH See Frequency Hopping.

FHI Frequency Hopping Indicator.

FIB Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part.The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit togetherwith the forward sequence number and backward sequencenumber are used in the basic error control method to performthe signal unit sequence control and acknowledgementfunctions.

FIFO Memory logic device in which the information placed in thememory in a given order is retrieved in that order.

FIR Finite Impulse Response (filter type).

FISU Fill In Signal Unit

FK Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign keyindicates an index into another table.

FM Fault Management (at OMC).

FM Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneousfrequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart fromthe centre frequency by an amount proportional to theinstantaneous value of the modulating signal.

FMC Fixed Mobile Convergence

FMIC Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMICalarm is received, the fault management software for thenetwork item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. Seealso Intermittent and OIC.

FMUX Fibre optic MUltipleXer module.

FN Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMAframe within a hyperframe.

FOA First Office Application. A full functional verification of newproduct(s) on a commercial system using accepted technologyand approved test plans.

FOX Fibre Optic eXtender board.

FPB First Partial Bitmap

FR See Full Rate.

FR Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statisticallymultiplexed packet-switched data communications in which(a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completelyenclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmissionrates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate).



13-29

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsFrame A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots

containing samples from all channels of a group, where theposition of each sample is identified by reference to a framealignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure whichallows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel.

Frame Alignment The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment issynchronized with respect to that of the received signal toaccomplish accurate data extraction.

FRMR Frame Reject

FRU Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can beeasily replaced in the field with a few simple tools.

Frequency Correction Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulationbit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easilywithin an MS burst.

Frequency Hopping The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmissionaccording to a specified algorithm. Frequency hoppingimproves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network.Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using differentfrequencies and interference coming from neighbour cellstransmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced.

FS Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timingsignals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillatorin the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized tothe recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link.MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization bursttransmitted from the BTS site.

FSL Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radiosignal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. TheFSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and thedistance the radio signal has travelled from the point source.

FSN Forward Sequence Number. See FIB.

FTAM File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE whichprovides a means to transfer information from file to file. (OMC).

ftn forwarded-to number.

FTP Fault Translation Process (in BTS).

FTP File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allowsa user on one computer to transfer files to and from anothercomputer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program theuser executes to transfer files (RFC 959).

Full Rate Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSMair interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See alsoHR - Half Rate.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsG Interface - GWY

G Interface Interface between VLR and VLR.

Gateway MSC An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMNfrom another network or service. A gateway MSC is also aninterrogating node for incoming PLMN calls.

GB, Gbyte Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes.

GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to theGigabit Ethernet.

GBL Gb Link.

GBM Gb Manager.

GCC Generic Call Control

GCLK Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (partof BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).

GCR Group Call Register. The register which holds informationabout VGCS or VBS calls.

GDP Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with theXCDR board.

GDP E1 GDP board configured for E1 link usage.

GDP T1 GDP board configured for T1 link usage.

GDS GPRS Data Stream.

GEA GPRS Encryption Algorithm

GERAN GSM EDGE Radio Access Network

GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internetworking with external packet-switched networks.

GHz Giga-Hertz (109).

GID Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify auser’s primary group.

GIP GPRS Initialization Process

GMB GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC).

GMM GPRS Mobility Management.

GMR General Manual Revision.

GMSC Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See GatewayMSC.

GMSC-S Gateway MSC Server

GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation techniqueused in GSM.

GND GrouND.

GOS Grade of Service. A traffic statistic defined as the percentageof calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay.An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentageof calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned avoice channel.



13-31

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsGPA GSM PLMN Area.

GPC General Protocol Converter.

G-PDU T-PDU + GTP-Header

GPROC Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,RXCDR).

GPROC2 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).

{4354} GPROC3 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board:a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,RXCDR).

GPRS General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmissiontechnique that does not set up a continuous channel from aportable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, buttransmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efficientuse of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for thevolume of data sent and received.

GPS Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determiningposition on the Earth’s surface by comparing radio signals fromseveral satellites.

GR Gb Router.

GSA GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reachedby a fixed subscriber, without the subscriber’s knowledge of thelocation of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served byseveral GSM PLMNs.

GSA GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessibleby GSM MSs.

GSD GSM Systems Division.

GSL GPRS Signalling Link.

GSM Groupe Spécial Mobile (the committee).

GSM Global System for Mobile communications (the system).

GSM900 See PGSM.

GSM MS GSM Mobile Station.

GSM PLMN GSM Public Land Mobile Network.

GSM RF GSM Radio Frequency.

GSN GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided bythe SGSN and GGSN.

GSN Complex A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNsconnected to a single CommHub.

GSR GSM Software Release.

GT Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete messagerouting, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code andsubsystem number.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsGTE Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allows

users to display and edit MCDF input files.

GTM Gb Transmit Manager.

GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol

GTS GBRS TBF Scheduler

Guard period Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MStransmission is attenuated.

GUI Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or programthat displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options.These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorialsymbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by meansof which users may enter commands.

GUI client A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUIapplication which is being run on a GUI server.

GUI server A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application processrunning locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUIclients or other MMI processors).

GWM GateWay Manager.

GWY GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.

H Interface - Hyperframe

H Interface Interface between HLR and AUC.

H-M Human-Machine Terminals.

HAD, HAP HLR Authentication Distributor.

Half Rate Refers to a type of data channel that will double the currentGSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier(see also FR - Full Rate).

HANDO, Handover HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress fromone radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allowsestablished calls to continue by switching them to anotherradio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area toanother. Handovers may take place between the followingGSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC.

HCS Hierarchical Cell Structure

HCU Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part ofthe DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to becombined into a single antenna.

HDLC High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used tofacilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet.Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol forCCITT Recommendation X.25.

HDSL High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a datatransmission mechanism which supports duplex high speeddigital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshieldedtwisted pair lines.



13-33

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsHLC High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information

defining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice activeon the terminal.

HLR Home Location Register. The LR where the current locationand all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored.

HMAC Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication (ïƒ³ RFC 2104)

HMS Heat Management System. The system that providesenvironmental control of the components inside the ExCell,TopCell and M-Cell cabinets.

HO HandOver. See HANDO.

HPU Hand Portable Unit. A handset.

HOLD Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows thesubscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call.When the second call is completed, the subscriber can returnto the first call.

HPLMN Home PLMN.

HR See Half Rate.

HS HandSet.

HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data

HSI/S High Speed Interface card.

HSM HLR Subscriber Management.

HSN Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating thespecific hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. Itranges from 0 to 63.

HT100 Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50.

HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2616)

HU Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by theHPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the homecountry.

HW Hardware.

Hybrid Combiner A combiner device which requires no software control and issufficiently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitterfrequency band. See also COMB.

Hybrid Transformer A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-linetelephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece andmouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit thatconnects the phone to the exchange.

Hyperframe 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of theframe structure.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsI - IWU

I Information frames. Part of RLP.

I+S Information + Supervisory

IA Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangementwhich allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outsidethe CUG.

IA5 International Alphanumeric 5 character set.

IADU Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is theequivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-datethe M-Cell range.

IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

IAM Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forwarddirection that contains (a) address information, (b) the signalinginformation required to route and connect a call to the calledline, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating touser and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity orcall-receiver identity.

IAS Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoringall cabinet alarms at a BSS.

IC Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists ofmany individual circuit elements, such as transistors,diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active andpassive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip ofsemiconducting material and mounted on a single piece ofsubstrate material.

IC Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identifies a CUG withina network.

IC(pref) Interlock Code of the preferential CUG.

ICANN Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers

ICB Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents aCUG member from receiving calls from other members of thatgroup.

ICC Integrated Circuit(s) Card.

ICH Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also PICH,AICH, CD/CA-ICH)

ICM In-Call Modification. Function which allows the service mode(speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call.

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the InternetProtocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages,test packets, and informational messages related to IP. ThePING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internetconnection(ïƒ³ RFC 792).

I-CSCF Interrogating Call Session Control Function (ïƒ³ SIP)

ID, Id IDentification/IDentity/IDentifier.

IDN Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digitaltransmission and digital switching.



13-35

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsIDS Interface Design Specification.

IDS Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational databasemanagement system.

IE Information Element. The part of a message that containsconfiguration or signalling information.

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. An internationalstandards and conformity assessment body for electrical,electronic and related technologies.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-profit,technical professional association.

IEI Information Element Identifier. The identifier field of the IE.

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force (www.ietf.org)

I-ETS Interim European Telecommunication Standard.

IF Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrierfrequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmissionor reception.

IFAM Initial and Final Address Message.

IHOSS Internet Hosted Octet Stream Service

IKE Internet Key Exchange (ïƒ³ RFC 2409)

IKMP Internet Key Management Protocol

ILCM Incoming Leg Control Model

IM InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of asystem, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and differencefrequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof thatare transmitted through the element.

IMACS Intelligent Monitor And Control System.

IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronicserial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece orassembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along withrequest for service. See also IMEISV.

IMEISV International Mobile station Equipment Identity and SoftwareVersion number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal numbercomposed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type ApprovalCode; - a 2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit SerialNumber; and - a 2 digit Software Version Number (SVN).The first three elements comprise the IMEI. When the networkrequests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also senttowards the network. See also IMEI and SVN.

IMM IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from thenetwork to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediatelystart monitoring a specified channel.

IMPI IP Multimedia Private Identity

IMPU IP Multimedia Public Identity

IMS Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (ïƒ³Rel. 5 onwards)



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsIMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile

number (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription.It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such asdirectory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN.

IMT-2000 International Mobile Telecommunications for the year 2000

IN Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality tobe distributed flexibly at a variety of nodes on and off thenetwork and allows the architecture to be modified to controlthe services.

IN Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR,to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC.

INS IN Service.

INS Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using thecapabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN.

InterAlg Interference Algorithm.

Intermittent Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associatedwith a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms aredisplayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle andclear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of anintermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC.

Interworking The general term used to describe the inter-operation ofnetworks, services, supplementary services and so on. Seealso IWF.

Interval A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged.

Interval expiry The end of an interval.

I/O Input/Output.

IOS Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the networkquality. The IOS generates reports based on performance datafrom the BTS and OMC-R.

IOV-I / IOV-UI Input Offset Variable for I+S and UI-Frames (ïƒ³ for cipheringin GPRS)

IP Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible forbringing up the site from a reset, including code loadingthe site from a suitable code source. IP also provides theCSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to beswapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service assoon as possible.

IP Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for usein interconnected systems of packet-switched computercommunication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocksof data called datagrams from sources to destinations,where sources and destinations are hosts identified byfixed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides forfragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary,for transmission through small-packet networks (ïƒ³ RFC 791).See also TCP and TCP/IP.

IPBCP IP Bearer Control Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.1970)



13-37

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsIPC Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between one

process and another, either within the same computer or overa network.

IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1332)

IP, INP INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spuriousemission.

IPR Intellectual PRoperty.

IPSM Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V).

IPX Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used bythe Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is adatagram protocol used for connectionless communications.Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recoveryservices.

IR Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ)

Iridium A communications system comprising a constellation of 66low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wirelesssystem allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from anylocation in the world. The satellite constellation is connectedto existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number ofgateway ground-stations.

ISAKMP Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol

ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managingthe way a computer accesses records and files stored on ahard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides directaccess to specific records through an index. This combinationresults in quick data access regardless of whether records arebeing accessed sequentially or randomly.

ISC International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/fromother countries.

ISCP Interference Signal Code Power (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS25.102)

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network usingcommon switches and digital transmission paths to establishconnections for various services such as telephony, data telex,and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel.

ISG Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX).

ISO International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is aworld-wide federation of national standards bodies from some130 countries, one from each country.

ISP Internet Service Provider

ISQL An Interactive Structured Query Language client application forthe database server. See also IDS.

ISS Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netrat 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functionsfor the GSN.

IST Integrated System Test.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsISUP ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported by

signalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down(ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.761 – Q.765).

IT Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity).

ITC Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer CapabilityElement which is provided on the Dm channel to supportTerminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures.

ITU International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmentalorganization through which public and private organizationsdevelop telecommunications. It is responsible for adoptinginternational treaties, regulations and standards governingtelecommunications.

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationsStandardization Sector. The standardization functions wereformerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU.

Iub-FP Iub-Frame Protocol (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.427 / 25.435)

Iu-FP Iu-Frame Protocol (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.415)

Iur-FP Iur-Frame Protocol (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.424, 3GTS 25.425, 25.426,25.435)

IWF InterWorking Function. A network functional entity whichprovides network interworking, service interworking,supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking.It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in aGSM PLMN.

IWMSC InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/fromSGSN.

IWU InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visaversa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.

k - KW

k kilo (103).

k Windows size.

K Constraint length of the convolutional code.

KAIO Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-Rrelational database management system.

kb, kbit kilo-bit.

kbit/s, kbps kilo-bits per second.

kbyte kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes

Kc Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls theoperation of encipherment and decipherment.

kHz kilo-Hertz.

Ki Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of theauthentication process of the AUC.



13-39

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsKIO A class of processor.

KPI Key Performance Indicator.

KSW Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connectcalls. Part of the BSS.

KSWX KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDMbus. Part of the BSS.

kW kilo-Watt.

L1 - LV

L1 Layer 1 (of a communications protocol).


L2ML Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRXand BCF.

L2R Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF thatadapts a user’s known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP fortransmission between the MT and IWF.

L2R BOP L2R Bit Orientated Protocol.

L2R COP L2R Character Orientated Protocol.

L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2661)


LA Link Adaptation.

LA Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freelywithout updating the location register. An LA may comprise oneor several base station areas.

LAC Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is anoperator defined code identifying the location area.

LAI Location Area Identity. The information indicating the locationarea in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM iscontinuously updated to reflect the current location of thesubscriber.

LAN Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a)lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group,(c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switchedtelecommunications network, but may be connected to one.

LANX LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LANto/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc.

LAPB Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhancedversion of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks.

LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol thatoperates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture.LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entitiesacross the frame relay network. The D-channel carriessignalling information for circuit switching.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsLAPDm Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link access

procedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobilecommunications system.

Layer 1 See OSI-RM and Physical Layer.

Layer 2 See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer.

Layer 3 See OSI-RM and Network Layer.

Layer 4 See OSI-RM and Transport Layer.

Layer 5 See OSI-RM and Session Layer.

Layer 6 See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer.

Layer 7 See OSI-RM and Application Layer.

LC Inductor Capacitor. A type of filter.

LCF Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links inand out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF andRSL. See also LCP.

LCN Local Communications Network. A communication networkwithin a TMN that supports data communication functions(DCFs) normally at specified reference points q1 and q2. LCNsrange from the simple to the complex. LCN examples includepoint-to-point connections and networks based on star andbus topologies.

LCP Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIAboard device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has beenequipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped,processors are allocated by the software.

LCS Location Services

LE Local Exchange.

LED Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light whencurrent passes through it. Depending on the material used thecolour can be visible or infrared.

LF Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screendown one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has adecimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances thepaper one line.

LI Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC datablock, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block.

LI Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of informationunits: the subscriber’s national ISDN/MSISDN number; thecountry code; optionally, subaddress information. In a fullISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the addressinformation necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber.The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party.The connected line identity is the line identity of the connectedparty.

LLC Logical Link Control.

LLC Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry informationdefining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal.

Lm Traffic channel with capacity lower than a Bm.



13-41

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsLMP LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to a

LAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarmsare generated by the GPROC.

LMS Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizingthe sum of squares of the deviations.

LMSI Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarilyallocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed upthe search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRNallocation is done on a per cell basis.

LMT Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBMcompatible PC.

LNA Low Noise Amplifier. An amplifier with low noise characteristics.

LND Last Number Dialled.

Location area An area in which a mobile station may move freely withoutupdating the location register. A location area may compriseone or several base station areas.

LPC Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analogsignals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system inwhich the value of the signal at each sample time is predictedto be a linear function of the past values of the quantified signal.

LPD Link Protocol Discriminator

LPLMN Local PLMN.

LQC Link Quality Control.

LR Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS locationinformation is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers.

LSB Least Significant Bit

LSSU Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system).

LSTR Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, basedon how a listener will perceive the background noise pickedup by the microphone.

LTA Long Term Average. The value required in a BTS’s GCLKfrequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock.

LTE Local Terminal Emulator.

LTP Long Term Predictive.

LTU Line Terminating Unit.

LU Local Units.

LU Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS whenit detects that it has entered a new location area.

LV Length and Value.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsM - MUX

M Mandatory.

M Mega (106).

M3UA MTP-3 User Adaptation Layer (ïƒ³ RFC 3332 / 3GPP 29.202(Annex A))

M-Cell Motorola Cell.

M&TS Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of NetworkManagement software which (1) collects and displays alarms,(2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3)activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC).

MA Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated toan MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence.

MAC Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions relatedto the management of the common transmission resources.These include the packet data physical channels and theirradio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes aresupported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and fixed allocation.(UMTS ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.321) (E)GPRS ïƒ³ 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS44.060)

MACN Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA.

Macrocell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mountedaway from buildings or above rooftop level.

MAF Mobile Additional Function.

MAH Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automaticservice which searches for the first available mobile user out ofa defined group.

MAI Mobile Allocation Index.

MAIDT Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time.

MAINT MAINTenance.

MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hoppingsequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell.

MAP Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). Theinter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs.

MAPP Mobile Application Part Processor.

MASF Minimum Available Spreading Factor

Max [X, Y] The value shall be the maximum of X or Y, which ever is bigger

MB, Mbyte Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes.

Mbit/s Megabits per second.

MBZ Must Be Zero

MCAP Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is theinter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each cardcage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as anMCAP Server.



13-43

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsMCC Mobile Country Code. The first three digits of the IMSI, used

to identify the country.

MCDF Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simpledata entry and retrieval.

MCI Malicious Call Identification supplementary service. Thisfeature is supported by a malicious call trace function byprinting the report at the terminating MSC when the mobilesubscriber initiates a malicious call trace request.

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme.

MCSC Motorola Customer Support Centre.

MCU Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the MicroControl Unit in software.

MCUF Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon).

MCU-m Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referredto as the Micro Control Unit in software.

MCUm The software subtype representation of the Field ReplaceableUnit (FRU) for the MCU-m.

MD Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface)allows the OSI Processor to communicate between theNetwork Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for networkconfiguration, events and alarms.

MDL mobile Management entity - Data Link layer.

MD-X Message Digest Algorithm (MD-2, 4, 5 are defined) (MD-5 ïƒ³RFC 1321)

ME Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00).

ME Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSMPLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which doesnot contain subscriber related information. Services may beaccessed while the equipment, capable of surface movementwithin the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts atunspecified points.

MEF Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A functionwhich possesses the capability to detect elementary anomaliesand convey them to the supervision process.

MF MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames inwhich the position of each frame can be identified by referenceto a multiframe alignment signal.

MF Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF.

MF MultiFunction block.

MEGACO Media Gateway Control Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T H.248 incl. AnnexF – H and IETF RFC 3015)

MGCF Media Gateway Control Function

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2705)

MGMT, mgmt Management.

MGR Manager.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsMGW Media Gateway

MHS Message Handling System. The family of services andprotocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mailtransfer among local mail systems.

MHS Mobile Handling Service.

MHz Mega-Hertz (106).

MI Maintenance Information.

MIB Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database.There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB.

MIC Mobile Interface Controller.

Microcell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mountedbelow rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffractionand scattering around buildings, the main propagation is withinstreet canyons.

min minute(s).

MIN Mobile Identity Number (North American Market)

Min [X, Y] The value shall be the minimum of X or Y, which ever is smaller

µs micro-second (10-6).

µBCU Micro Base Control Unit. The µBCU is the Macro/Microcellimplementation of a BTS site controller.

MIT Management Information Tree. A file on the Motorola OMC-R.The MIT file effectively monitors data on every device andevery parameter of each device that is in the current versionsof software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text fileon the OMC-R. The MIT file also contains the hierarchicalrelationships between the network devices.

MLP MAC Logical Channel Priority

MM Man Machine. See MMI.

MM Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization,location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, IDconfidentiality, paging, handover, etc.

MMCC Multimedia Call Control

MME Mobile Management Entity.

MMF Middle Man Funnel process.

MMI Man Machine Interface. The method by which the userinterfaces with the software to request a function or changeparameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, oran LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrievedevice status, take modules out of service and put modulesinto service.

MMI client A machine configured to use the OMC-R software from an MMIserver.

MMI processor MMI client/MMI server.



13-45

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsMMI server A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-R

software. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients tomount.

MML Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI.

MMS Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link)

MNC Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fifth and optionally sixthdigits of the IMSI, used to identify the network.

MNRG Mobile Not Reachable for GPRS flag

MNT MaiNTenance.

Mobis Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS.

MO Mobile Originated.

MOC Mobile Originating Call

MO/PP Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission ofa SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. Themaximum length of the message is 160 characters. Themessage can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged ina call.

MOMAP Motorola OMAP.

MoU Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoUusually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding aswell as the general responsibilities and obligations of eachparty in a proposed venture. It has little legal significanceexcept to indicate the parties’ commitments and acts as an aidto interpreting the parties’ intentions. There are various typesof MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorolaunits comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectualproperty MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patentrights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the termsand conditions of a product or service transfer.

MPC Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC).

MPCC Multiparty Call Control

MPH (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive].

MPROC Master Processor

MPTY MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTYprovides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have amulti-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication withmore than one party.

MPX MultiPleXed.

MRC Micro Radio Control Unit.

MRFC Multimedia Resource Function Controller

MRFP Multimedia Resource Function Processor

MRN Mobile Roaming Number.

MRP Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset andheadset acoustic responses.

MRU Maximum Receive Unit (ïƒ³ PPP)



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsMRW Move Receiving Window

MS Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriberhandset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriberequipment, such as facsimile machines, etc.

MSB Most Significant Bit

MSC Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre.The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls thelocation registration and handover procedures for all exceptinter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlledinter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch.

MSCM Mobile Station Class Mark.

MSC-S MSC-Server

MSCU Mobile Station Control Unit.

msec millisecond (.001 second).

MSI Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS.

MSIN Mobile Station Identification Number. The part of the IMSIidentifying the mobile station within its home network.

MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobilenumber (see also IMSI). Uniquely defines the mobile station asan ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code(CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the SubscriberNumber (SN).

MSS Maximum Segment Size (ïƒ³ TCP)

MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by theMSC to service and track a visiting subscriber.

MSU Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signalunit containing a service information octet and a signallinginformation field which is retransmitted by the signalling linkcontrol, if it is received in error.

MT Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destinedfor an MS.

MT (0, 1, 2) Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates theradio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminalequipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission.MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface andMT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface.

MTBE Mean Time Between Exceptions.

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected systemreliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failurerates of various components of the system. MTBF is usuallyexpressed in hours.

MTC Mobile Terminating Call

MTL Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslotthat is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the Ainterface between the MSC and the BSC.



13-47

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsMTM Mobile-To-Mobile (call).

MTP Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channelsignaling system that transfers signal messages and performsassociated functions, such as error control and signaling linksecurity (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.701 – Q.703).

MTP-3b Message Transfer Part level 3 / broadband (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.2210)

MT/PP Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of ashort message from a message handling system to a mobile.The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. Themessage can be received whether or not the MS is engaged ina call.

MTTR Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance timedivided by the total number of corrective maintenance actionsduring a given period of time.

MTU Maximum Transmit Unit (ïƒ³ IP)

Multiframe Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-framemultiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframewith a period of 3060/13 ms.

MU Mark Up.

MUMS Multi User Mobile Station.

MUX Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into anaggregate signal to be transported via a single transmissionchannel.

NACK - nW

NACK, Nack No Acknowledgement

NAS Non-Access-Stratum (ïƒ³ UMTS)

NAT Network Address Translation (ïƒ³ RFC 1631)

N/W Network.

NB Normal Burst (see Normal burst).

NBAP NodeB Application Part (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.433)

NBIN A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generationalgorithm.

NBNS NetBios Name Service

NC Neighbour Cell

NCC Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of theBSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC andBSIC.

NCELL Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell.

NCH Notification CHannel. Part of the downlink element of theCCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast callsand notification messages.

NCP Network Control Protocol (ïƒ³ PPP)



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsNCRM Network Cell Reselection Manager.

ND No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning thecolumn contains unique values (used only with indexedcolumns).

NDC National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC isallocated to each GSM PLMN.

NDUB Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurswhen a call is about to be offered and the maximum number oftotal calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, thetotal number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, onefor a held call and one for call waiting.

NE Network Element (Network Entity). A piece oftelecommunications equipment that provides support orservices to the user.

NEF Network Element Function block. A functional block thatcommunicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored,or controlled, or both.

NET Norme Européennes de Telecommunications.

NetPlan An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMCand use it to carry out a network frequency replan.

Network Layer See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requestsfrom the Transport Layer and issues service requests to theData Link Layer. It provides the functional and proceduralmeans of transferring variable length data sequences froma source to a destination via one or more networks whilemaintaining the quality of service requested by the TransportLayer. The Network Layer performs network routing, flowcontrol, segmentation/desegmentation, and error controlfunctions.

NF Network Function.

NFS Network File System. A file system that is distributed over acomputer network. Also, a file system, on a single computer,that contains the low-level networking files for an entire network.

NHA Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. Itdetects problems by monitoring network statistics and eventsvia the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statisticsand network configuration data to try to determine the cause ofthe detected problems.

NI Network Indicator

NIB Network Interface Board.

NIC Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the formof a circuit card that provides network access.

NIC Network Independent Clocking.

NIS Network Information Service. It allows centralised control ofnetwork information for example hostnames, IP addresses andpasswords.



13-49

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsN-ISDN Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services

include basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rateinterface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI).Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps.

NIU Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interfacefunctions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, andbuffering, required for communications to and from a network.

NIU-m Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI.

NL See Network Layer.

NLK Network LinK processor(s).

Nm Newton metres.

NM Network Management (manager). NM is all activities whichcontrol, monitor and record the use and the performance ofresources of a telecommunications network in order to providetelecommunication services to customers/users at a certainlevel of quality.

NMASE Network Management Application Service Element.

NMC Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSMTMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoringand control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linkedto subordinate OMC nodes.

NMSI National Mobile Station Identification number, or, NationalMobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC andthe MSIN.

NMT Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the world’sfirst automatic international mobile telephone system.

NN No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the columnmust contain a value in all rows.

Normal burst A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot.

NPB Next Partial Bitmap

NPI Number Plan Identifier.

N-PDU Network-Protocol Data Unit (ïƒ³ IP-Packet, X.25-Frame)

NRZ Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented byone significant condition and zeros are represented by another,with no neutral or rest condition.

NS Network Service

NSAP Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration madeby an application which specifies its desired listening criteria.The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number.Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddressranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses.

NSAPI Network Service Access Point Identifier

NSE Network Service Entity

NSP Network Service Provider. A national or regional companythat owns or maintains a portion of the network and resellsconnectivity.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsNSS Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI,

which provides different network maps giving visual indicationof the network configuration and performance, and how thedifferent network management functions are implemented bythe OMC-R.

NST Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically testsall alive NS-VCs on a PICP board.

NS-VC Network Service - Virtual Circuit.

NS-VCG Network Service – Virtual Connection Group

NS-VL Network Service – Virtual Link

NT Network Termination. Network equipment that providesfunctions necessary for network operation of ISDN accessprotocols.

NT Non Transparent.

NTAAB NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engagedin harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe.

NTP Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP thatassures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio,atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol iscapable of synchronizing distributed clocks within millisecondsover long time periods.

Numbers # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used inthis manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCMchannels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th GenerationLanguage. Closer to human languages than typical high-levelprogramming languages. most 4GLs are used to accessdatabases.

NUA Network User Access.

NUI Network User Identification.

NUP National User Part. (part of SS7).

NV NonVolatile.

NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random accessmemory which is made into non-volatile storage either byhaving a battery permanently connected, or, by saving itscontents to EEPROM before turning the power off andreloading it when power is restored.

nW Nano-Watt (10-9).

O - Overlap

O Optional.

OA Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangementwhich allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside theCUG.

OA&M Operation, Administration, & Management.



13-51

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsOAMP Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.

O&M Operations and Maintenance.

OASCU Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which atelecommunication connection is being established whilst theRF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied.

OCB Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service.An access restriction that prevents a CUG member fromplacing calls to other members of that group.

Octet 8 bit

OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock sourceused for frequency synchronization.

OD Optional for operators to implement for their aim.

OFL % OverFlow.

offline IDS shutdown state.

online IDS normal operating state.

OIC Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must becleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition thatcaused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent.

OLCM Outgoing Leg Control Model

OLM Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modifyand carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSSbinary files.

OLR Overall Loudness Rating.

OMAP Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7standard) (was OAMP).

OMC Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of theGSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control ofthe PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlledby the specific OMC.

OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium)

OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part.

OMC-R Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part.

OMC-S Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part.

OMF Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC).

OML Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML providescommunication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR fortransferring network management (O&M) data.

OMP Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC.

OMS Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC).

OMSS Operation and Maintenance SubSystem.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsOOS Out Of Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state

indicates the physical device is out of service. This state isreserved for physical communication links. Also, identifies atelephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS devicesoftware to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service.

OPC Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signallingmessage that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the(signalling) origination point of the message.

OPWA One Pass With Advertising (ïƒ³ Term in RSVP)

ORAC Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset.

OS Operating System. The fundamental program running on acomputer which controls all operations.

OSA Open Service Access

OSI Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure forcommunications networks standardized by the ISO. Thestandard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicateand exchange information with any other OSI-compliantsystem.

OSI RM OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digitalcommunications between application processes running indistinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure ofseven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at therequest of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests morebasic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - PhysicalLayer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer,Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 -Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer.

OSF Operation Systems Function block.

OSF/MOTIF Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI usedfor the Motorola OMC-R MMI.

OSP Octet Stream Protocol

OSS Operator Services System.

OTDOA Observed Time Difference Of Arrival

Overlap Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system toanother as soon as they are received by the sending system. Asystem using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of acall before it starts to send the digits to the next system. Thisis the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a givencall are sent at one time. See en bloc.

OVSF Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor

PA - PXPDN

P1, P2, P3 Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3.

P/F Bit Polling/Final - Bit

PA Power Amplifier.

PAB Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS.



13-53

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPABX Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatic

telephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange andalso calls to and from the public telephone network.

PACCH Packet Associated Control Channel.

Packet A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals,that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole.

Packet Switching The process of routing and transferring data by means ofaddressed packets so that a channel is occupied during thetransmission of the packet only, and upon completion of thetransmission the channel is made available for the transfer ofother traffic.

PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware devicethat allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switchingto use a packet switching network. It assembles data intopackets for transmission, and disassembles the packets onarrival.

PAGCH Packet Access Grant Channel ((E)GPRS)

Paging The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructureattempts to reach an MS within its location area, before anyother network-initiated procedure can take place.

PAP Password Authentication Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1334)

PATH CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network.

PBCCH Packet Broadcast Control Channel ((E)GPRS)

PBUS Processor Bus.

PBX Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBXis a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only amanual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) doesnot have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange(PABX) may or may not have a switchboard.

PC Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-usermicrocomputer designed to be operated by one person at atime.

pCA PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located atevery PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident onthe master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of thestatus of every device and every software process at the site.

PCCH Paging Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel)

PCCCH Packet Common Control Channel.

P-CCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel (UMTS / used asbearer for the BCH TrCH)

PCH Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providingpoint-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Providessimultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area.

PCHN Paging Channel Network.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPCHN Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium over

which the information is carried. In the case of GSM radiocommunications this would be the Air Interface. Each RFcarrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) usedfor MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interfacethe physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer.

PCI Packet Control Interface.

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connectingperipherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, thoughit is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus.

PCM Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal issampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a fixed reference)of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to adigital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in thepresence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physicalbearer of PCM.

pCM PCU Configuration Management. pCM is a GWM process. Itdistributes all database changes performed at the BSC to thePCU boards.

PCN Personal Communications Network. Any network supportingPCS, but in particular DCS1800.

PCPCH Physical Common Packet Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

P-CPICH Primary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

PCR Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correctionsuitable for use on links with long transmission delays, suchas satellite links.

PCS The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) termused to describe a set of digital cellular technologies beingdeployed in the U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA (also calledIS-95), and North American TDMA (also called IS-136) airinterfaces.

PCS System Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, acollection of facilities that provides some combination ofpersonal mobility, terminal mobility, and service profilemanagement. Note: As used here, "facilities" includeshardware, software, and network components such astransmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities,and databases.

PCS1900 A cellular phone network using the higher frequencyrange allocated in countries such as the USA. It operateson the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit).

P-CSCF Proxy Call Session Control Function (ïƒ³ SIP)

PCU Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRSwith packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, andpacket segmentization and packetization across the FrameRelay link with the SGSN.

PCU Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess.

pd Potential difference. Voltage.



13-55

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPD Protocol Discriminator field. The first octet of the packet header

that identifies the protocol used to transport the frame.

PD Public Data. See PDN.

PDB Power Distribution Board.

PDCH Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCHand PDTCH logical channels.

PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.323)

PDF Policy Decision Function

PDF Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR).

PDN Public Data Network. A network established and operated bya telecommunications administration, or a recognized privateoperating agency, for the specific purpose of providing datatransmission services for the public.

PDP Packet Data Protocol.

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

PDTCH Packet Data Traffic Channel ((E)GPRS)

PDU Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of theAlarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board(PDB).

PDU Protected Data Unit.

PDU Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit ofdata, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network.

PEDC Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network inEurope.

Peg A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic.Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource.Each time the device or resource is used the peg count isincremented.

PER Packed Encoding Rules (ïƒ³ ITU-T X.691)

Pegging Modifying a statistical value.

PFC Packet Flow Context

pFCP PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP.

pFTP PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSPas part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at thePCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC havea local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications(SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSCand generates messages to pCA for device transitions asneeded, based on faults reported.

PFI Packet Flow Identifier

PGSM Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequencyrange, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit).

PH Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassemblespackets.

PH PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPHI Packet Handler Interface.

Physical Layer See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of sevenhierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the DataLink Layer. The major functions and services of the layerare: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to acommunications medium; (b) participation in the process ofsharing communication resources among multiple users; and,(c) conversion between the representation of digital data inuser equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted overa communications channel.

PI Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling nameinformation. Depending on database settings, the PI mayprevent the called party from seeing the identity of the callingparty.

PIA Packet Immediate Assignment.

Picocell A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted withina building.

PICH Page Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

PICP Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardwarecomponent, the PICP is a DPROC board used for networkinterfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC.

PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statementmade by the supplier of an implementation or system claimedto conform to a given specification, stating which capabilitieshave been implemented.

PID Process IDentifier/Process ID.

PIM PCM Interface Module (MSC).

PIN Personal Identification Number. A password, typically fourdigits entered through a telephone keypad.

PIN Problem Identification Number.

PIX Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarminterface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means ofwiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the baseequipment.

PIXT or PIXIT Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing.A statement made by a supplier or implementor of animplementation under test (IUT) which contains informationabout the IUT and its testing environment which will enable atest laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT.

PK Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is anot-null, non-duplicate index.

PL See Presentation Layer.

Plaintext Unciphered data.

PlaNET Frequency planning tool.



13-57

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPLL Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the

BTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information istransferred within a data stream and the receiver derives thesignal element timing by locking its local clock source to thereceived timing information.

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communicationsnetwork.

PM Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enablesthe user to produce reports specific to the performance of thenetwork.

PMA Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediateaction is necessary. See also DMA.

PMC PCI Mezzanine Card.

PMR Packet Management Report.

PMS Pseudo MMS.

PM-UI Performance Management User Interface.

PMUX PCM MUltipleXer.

PN Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee.

PNCH Packet Notification Channel ((E)GPRS)

PNE Présentation des Normes Européennes. Presentation rulesof European Standards.

POI Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular networkis connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiplePOIs.

POP Post Office Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1939)

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service withoutspecial features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc.

pp, p-p Peak-to-peak.

PP Point-to-Point.

ppb Parts per billion.

PPB PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board.The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus.The PPB and MPROC are paired boards.

PPCH Packet Paging Channel ((E)GPRS)

PPE Primitive Procedure Entity.

ppm Parts per million (x 10-6).

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1661)

PRA PCPCH Resource Availability

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel ïƒ³ UMTS Packet RandomAccess Channel ((E)GPRS)

Pref CUG Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specified for eachbasic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be usedwhen no explicit CUG index is received by the network.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPresentation Layer See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to service

requests from the Application Layer and issues servicerequests to the Session Layer. It relieves the ApplicationLayer of concern regarding syntactical differences in datarepresentation within the end-user systems.

Primary Cell A cell which is already optimized in the network and has aco-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundaryof the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal tothe frequency type of the coincident cell.

PRM Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. Itperforms all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL powercontrol and timing advance.

PROM Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, afterbeing written to once, becomes a read-only memory.

PRP Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component,the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packetresources at the PCU and is the processor where all of theradio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed toPRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interfacescheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels.

Ps Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterionfor cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge isdefined by adding margins so that the minimum service qualityis fulfilled with a certain probability.

PS Puncturing Scheme.

PSA Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a faultmanagement function. It periodically sends messages toBSSs requesting information on their current state. Thisverifies whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS failsto respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R willgenerate an alarm for that BSS.

PSC Primary Synchronization Code

P-SCH Primary Synchronization Channel (physical)

PSD Power Spectral Density (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102)

PSK Phase Shift Keying

PSI Packet System Information.

PSAP Presentation Services Access Point.

pSAP PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. Itperiodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliabilityof the system.

PSM Power Supply Module.

pSM PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part ofthe GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains datapaths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC.

PSP PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS.

PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switchingand PDN.



13-59

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsPSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic land

line telecommunications network. It is usually accessed bytelephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchangetrunks, and data arrangements.

PSU Power Supply Unit.

PSW Pure Sine Wave.

PT Protocol Type (ïƒ³ GTP or GTP’)

PTACH Packet Timing Advance Control Channel

PTCCH Packet Timing Advance Control Channel ((E)GPRS)

PTCCH/D Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Downlink Direction((E)GPRS)

PTCCH/U Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Uplink Direction((E)GPRS)

PTM Point to Multipoint

P-TMSI Packet TMSI

PTO Public Telecommunications Operator.

PTP Point to Point

PTR Packet Timeslot Reconfiguration.

PUA Packet Uplink Assignment.

PUCT Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of theHome unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCTis stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set bythe subscriber and may exceed the value published by theHPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on thecharges raised by the HPLMN.

PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology,Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that ispermanently established, saving the time associated with circuitestablishment and tear-down. See also SVC.

PW Pass Word.

PWR Power.

PXPDN Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.

QA- Quiesent mode

QA Q (Interface) - Adapter. TMN interface adapter used tocommunicate with non-TMN compatible devices and objects.Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00).

Q3 Interface between NMC and GSM network.

Q-adapter See QA.

QAF Q-Adapter Function.

QE Quality Estimate

QEI Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits toTDM switch highway. See MSI.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsQIC Quarter Inch Cartridge (Data storage format).

QoS Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates that afailure is degrading service.

Queue Data structure in which data or messages are temporarilystored until they are retrieved by a software process. Also aseries of calls waiting for service. See also FIFO.

Quiescent mode IDS intermediate state before shutdown.

R - RXU

R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relativeto the maximum allowed output power of the highest powerclass of MS (A).

RA RAndom mode request information field.

RA Radio Access.

RA Routing Area.

RA250 Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50.

RAB Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH.

RAB Radio Access Bearer

RAC Routing Area Code

RACCH Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common controlchannel used to originate a call or respond to a page.

RACH Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobilestation to request access to the network. See also RAB.

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (ïƒ³ RFC 2865)

RAI Routing Area Identification

Radio Frequency A term applied to the transmission of electromagneticallyradiated information from one point to another, usually using airor vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagneticwave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies andinfrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission.

RAM Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-accessmemory in which information can be stored, retrieved andmodified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., itscontents are lost if power is removed).

RANAP Radio Access Network Application Part (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.413)

RAND RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sentby the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process.

RAT Radio Access Technology

RATI Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface.

RAx Rate Adaptation.

RB Receive Block Bitmap (ïƒ³ EGPRS)



13-61

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsRBB Receive Block Bitmap (ïƒ³ GPRS)

RBDS Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motoroladiagnostic facility).

RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number ofbits in error to the total number of bits received, within errordetected speech frames defined as good. The measurementperiod over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During thisperiod, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated.By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to anRBER Quality number between 0 and 7.

RBTS Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-locatedwith the BSC that controls it.

RCB Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU.

RCI Radio Channel Identifier. The unique identifier of the radiochannel portion of the circuit path.

RCI Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS addressused in the RSS (channel number) to the address used inLayer 3 in the BSC CP.

RCP Radio Control Processor.

RCU Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver,digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU isnow obsolete, see DRCU.

RCVR Receiver.

RDB Requirements Database.

RDBMS Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). Thedatabase management system for the OMC-R database.

RDI Restricted Digital Information.

RDIS Radio Digital Interface System.

RDM Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrierand injection frequency synthesis.

RDN Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a uniqueidentifier, the distinguished name, for a particular networkelement.

REC, Rec RECommendation.

Reciprocal neighbour Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated asa neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional andtwo-way neighbour.

Registration The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC inorder to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MSfirst activates or moves into a new service area.

REJ REJect(ion).

REL RELease.

RELP Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding.RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech atbit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsRELP-LTP RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. See

Full Rate.

Remotely Tuned Combiner A combiner device which houses two processors (forpaired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See alsoCOMB

resync Resynchronize/resynchronization.

REQ REQuest.

Reuse Pattern The minimum number of cells required in a pattern beforechannel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference.Varies between cell configuration type and channel type. Thepattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimizeinterference between cells and sectors within the pattern area.

Revgen A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from abinary object database.

RF See Radio Frequency.

RFC, RFCH Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RFspectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centrefrequency.

RFE Radio Front End (module).

RFE Receiver Front End (shelf).

RFEB Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II.

RFI Radio Frequency Interference.

RFM Radio Frequency Module.

RFN Reduced TDMA Frame Number.

RFU Reserved for Future Use.

R-GSM Railways-GSM

RJ45 Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonlyto connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN),especially Ethernets.

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessorthat recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types,allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds.

RL Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performsconfiguration management, fault management, and someperformance management procedures at the NEs. The RLsoftware manages the X.25 connection for remote login. Thecircuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE.

RLC Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSDto release a connection.

RLC Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLCfunction processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer.(UMTS ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.322) ((E)GPRS / 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS44.060)

RLM RF Link Manager.



13-63

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsRLP Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user

data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. (ïƒ³ 3GTS24.022)

RLR Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR.

RLSD ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to releasea connection.

RMS Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematicalmethod of defining the effective voltage or current of an ACwave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peakvalue.

RMSU Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator.It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSSsites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrialsignalling and traffic circuits required.

RNC Radio Network Controller

RNR Receive Not Ready

RNS Radio Network Subsystem

RNTABLE Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence.

RNSAP Radio Network Subsystem Application Part (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.423)

RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier

ROAM Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability.

Roaming Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular systemother than the one from which service is subscribed.

ROM Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fastaccess to permanently stored data but prevents addition to ormodification of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage- it retains its contents even when the power is switched off.

ROSE Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries amessage between devices over an association established byASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC).

Roundtrip Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslotin the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviourof the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance.

RPE Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP.

RPE-LTP Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSMdigital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplified RPEcodec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s toprovide toll quality speech.

RPLMN Registered PLMN

RPOA Recognised Private Operating Agency. Privatetelecommunications operator recognised by the appropriatetelecommunications authority.

RPR Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of theOMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed onlyfor privileged accounts.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsRR Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM management

layer. The functions provided by RR include paging, ciphermode set, frequency redefinition, assignments, handover andmeasurement reports.

RR Receive Ready.

RRBP Relative Reserved Block Period

RRC Radio Resource Control (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.331)

RRSM Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages throughCall Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channelsas controlled by the CRM.

RRSM Radio Resource Switch Manager.

RS232 Recommended Standard 232. The interface between aterminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serialdata. Standard serial interface.

RSCP Received Signal Code Power (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215)

RSE Radio System Entity.

RSL Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between theBSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot witha LAPD protocol.

RSLF Radio System Link Function.

RSLP Radio System Link Processor.

RSS Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS).

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned froma transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strengthbetween the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink.

RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2205)

RSZI Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI defines theregions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZIare:The Country Code (CC) which identifies the country inwhich the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code(NDC) which identifies the GSM PLMN in that country,TheZone Code (ZC) which identifies a regional subscription zoneas a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquelywithin that PLMN.

RTC Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used tofine-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tunedcavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed.

RTE Remote Terminal Emulator.

RTF Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supportsthe air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. Whenequipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs mustbe equipped.

RTF Receive Transmit Functions.

RTO Retransmission Time Out

RTP Real Timer Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 1889)



13-65

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsRTS Request to Send. A handshaking signal used with

communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 toindicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready fortransmission. See also CTS.

RTT RoundTrip Time (ïƒ³ RFC 793)

RU Rack Unit.

Run level System processor operating mode.

Rx Receive(r).

RX Receive window buffer.

RXCDR Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcodingis performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would beat or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which thetranscoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required forinterconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR.

RXF Receive Function (of the RTF).

RXLEV Received signal level. An indication of received signal levelbased on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria forevaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover andpower control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEVvalues related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It isnecessary for these levels to attain sufficient accuracy for thecorrect functioning of the system.

RXLEV-D Received signal level downlink.

RXLEV-U Received signal level uplink.

RXQUAL Received signal quality. An indication of the received signalquality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteriafor evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handoverand power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures thereceived signal quality, which is specified in terms of BERbefore channel decoding averaged over the reporting period oflength of one SACCH multiframe.

RXQUAL-D Received signal quality downlink.

RXQUAL-U Received signal quality uplink.

RXU Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remotetranscoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcodersite.

S7- SYSGEN

S7 See SS7.

S/W SoftWare.

SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message whichestablishes the signalling link over the air interface.

SABME SABM Extended.

SABP Service Area Broadcast Protocol (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.419)



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel

used by the MS for conveying power control and timingadvance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI andlink quality reports in the uplink direction.

SACCH/C4 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4.

SACCH/C8 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8.

SACCH/T Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel.

SACCH/TF Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate.

SACCH/TH Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Half rate.

SAGE A brand of trunk test equipment.

SAP Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs ofa layer are defined as gates through which services are offeredto an adjacent higher layer.

SAP System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. Itmonitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) andon-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty ordegrading hardware and software (through the use of audittests) and notifies the Alarms handling software of the condition.

SAPI Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). The OSI term for thecomponent of a network address which identifies the individualapplication on a host which is sending or receiving a packet.

SAR Segmentation And Reassembly (ATM-sublayer)

SAW Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of aninput transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acousticwaves, which then travel through the solid propagation mediumto the output transducer where they are reconverted toelectrical signals. SAW band pass filters are used for sortingsignals by frequency.

SB Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst).

SBUS Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of thecommunication path between the GPROCs and LANX cardsin a cage.

SC Service Centre (used for Short Message Service).

SC Service Code.

SCCA System Change Control Administration. Software modulewhich allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC).

SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7).

S-CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (used as bearerfor the FACH and PCH TrCH’s / UMTS Physical Channel)

SCEG Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM).

SCH Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channelused to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs andidentification of base stations.

SCI Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager.

SCIP Serial Communication Interface Processor.



13-67

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSCM Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other

processors within the switch requesting status displays in theform of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM mapsthe status display requests into specific commands to the statuscontrol interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights.

SCN Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining aparticular physical channel in a BS.

SCP Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity).

S-CPICH Secondary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

S-CSCF Serving Call Session Control Function (ïƒ³ SIP)

SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independentstandard for system-level interfacing between a computer andintelligent devices including hard disks, floppy disks, CD-ROM,printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up toseven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) onthe computer’s bus.

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2960)

SCU Slim Channel Unit.

SCU900 Slim Channel Unit for GSM900.

SDCCH Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM controlchannel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS toBTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCHis used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, locationupdating and SMS point to point.

SDL Specification Description Language. A method for visuallydepicting the functionality of call processing, operations andmaintenance software.

SDM Sub-rate Data Multiplexor

SDMA Space Division Multiple Access

SDT SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validatereal-time, state-based product software designs.

SDU Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sentby a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted toa peer service user semantically unchanged.

SDR Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International MonetaryFund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for the unit ofaccount for a number of other international organizations andas a basis for private financial instruments. The SDR is basedon the values of the euro, U.S. dollar, Japanese yen and poundsterling.

SE Support Entity. See SEF.

Secondary Cell A cell which is not optimized in the network and has aco-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundaryof the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band thesame as that of its own frequency type.

SEF Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directlyinvolved in the telecommunication process. They include faultlocalisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00).



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSession Layer See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requests

from the Presentation Layer and issues service requests tothe Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managingthe dialogue between end-user application processes. Itprovides for either duplex or half-duplex operation andestablishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, andrestart procedures.

SF Spreading Factor

SFH Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is thatevery mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence offrequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequencyhopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobilestation transmits (or receives) on a fixed frequency during onetime slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the nextTDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring otherbase stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive andtransmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies.

SFN System Frame Number

SG Security Gateway (IPsec / ïƒ³ RFC 2401)

SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control,transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track ofthe individual MS locations, and performs security functionsand access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via aFrame Relay network.

SGW Signaling Gateway (SS7 ïƒ³ IP)

SHA Secure Hash Algorithm

SHCCH Shared Channel Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel /ïƒ³ TDD only)

SI Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screeningindicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radioconnection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of theMS and hence determine either whether a particular networkinitiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of anetwork initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SSscreening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SSoperation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection.

SI Service Interworking. Part of the IWF.

SI Supplementary Information.

SI System Information.

SIA Supplementary Information A.

SIB System Information Block



13-69

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSID Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise

information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SIDframe. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech burstsand serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. Inorder to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RXside, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also duringspeech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving themeasurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem(RSS).

SIF Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit thatcarry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF alwayscontains a label.

Signalling System No.7 See SS7.

SIM Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which isinserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part ofthe MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN),other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 andA8.

SIMM Single Inline Memory module.

SIMM System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuitboard providing additional RAM for a computer.

SIO Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a messagesignal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-servicefield. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling messagespecifying the User Part type.

SIP Session Initiation Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 3261)

SIR Signal to Interference Ratio

SITE BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site.

SIX Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTLlevels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to externaldevices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics).

SK Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondarykey indicates an additional index and/or usage as a compositekey.

SL See Session Layer.

SL Signalling Link. The signalling links between the variousnetwork elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio SignallingLink (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL),OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML),Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC toBSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL).

SLC Signaling Link Code

SLF Subscriber Locator Function

SLNK Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIPand peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sentserially in a bit-synchronous format.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSLR Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land

direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the landto mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for thecustomers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated fromthe send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses.

SLR Source Local Reference (SS7)

SLS Signaling Link Selection

SLTA Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from theMSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM.

SLTM Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringingan MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message tothe MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message.

SM Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MSterrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to theradio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager inthe BSS software.

SM Summing Manager.

SM Session Management

SMAE System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO9596). OSI terminology for a software Management InformationServer that manages a network.

SMASE System Management Application Service Element.

SMCB Short Message Cell Broadcast.

SME Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive ShortMessages. The SME may be located in a fixed network, anMS, or a SC. See also SMS.

SMG Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSMsystem and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities,the committee was renamed SMG in 1992.

SMP Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola programdesigned to ensure the highest quality of software with thehighest level of support.

SMS Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wirelessservice that enables the transmission of alphanumericmessages between mobile subscribers and external systemssuch as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. Ittransfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, betweenSmts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PPand Smt.

SMSCB Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service inwhich short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs.SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. trafficreports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged bythe MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is onlypossible in idle mode. The geographical area over which eachmessage is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, byagreement with the provider of the information.

SMS-G-MSC SMS Gateway MSC (for Short Messages destined to MobileStation)



13-71

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSMS-IW-MSC SMS Interworking MSC (for Short Messages coming from

Mobile Station)

SMS-SC Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is aninterworking unit between stationary networks and the GSMNetwork. It acts as a store and forward centre for shortmessages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt.

SMS/PP Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two differentpoint-to-point services have been defined: Mobile Originated(MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message alwaysoriginates or terminates in the GSM network. This means thatshort messages can never be sent between two users bothlocated in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC andSmt.

Smt Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC andSMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one beingthe Computer Access Interface which provides services forexternal computers communicating with SMS-SCs through theComputer Access Protocol.

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ïƒ³ RFC 2821)

SN Subscriber Number.

SND Sequence Number Downlink (ïƒ³ GTP)

SND SeND.

SNDCP Subnetwork Dependent Convergence Protocol

SNDR SeNDeR.

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNN SNDCP N-PDU Number Flag

SN-PDU Segmented N-PDU (SN-PDU is the payload of SNDCP)

SNR Signal to Noise Ratio

SNR Serial NumbeR.

SNU Sequence Number Uplink (ïƒ³ GTP)

SOA Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement whichprevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG.

SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol (ïƒ³http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/NOTE-SOAP-20000508)

Software Instance A complete set of software and firmware objects including thedatabase object.

SP Service Provider. The organisation through which thesubscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. Thismay be a network operator or possibly a separate body.

SP Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7network.

SP Special Product.

SP SPare.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSPARC Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bit

microprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that isbased on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC).SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardwareused with UNIX-based operating systems.

SPC Signalling Point Code.

SPC Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferentialCUG, on a per call basis.

SPI Security Parameter Index (ïƒ³ RFC 2401)

SPI Signalling Point Inaccessible.

SPP Single Path Preselector.

SQE Signal Quality Error.

SQL Structured Query Language. The standard language forrelational database management systems as adopted by theAmerican National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) andthe International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989).

SRB Signaling Radio Bearer

SRD Service Request Distributor.

SRES Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated bythe MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticatethe MS.

SRNC Serving RNC

SRTT Smoothed RoundTrip Time (ïƒ³ RFC 793)

SS Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to,a basic telecommunication service.

SS System Simulator.

SS7 ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Alsoknown as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard defines the proceduresand protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchangeinformation over a digital signalling network to effect wireless(cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control.

SSA SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystemmanagement. An SSA message is sent to concerneddestinations to inform those destinations that a subsystemwhich was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-TRecommendation Q.712 para 1.15).

SSAP Site System Audits Processor.

SSC Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriberselects a supplementary service control from the menu in aGSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sendingthe network the appropriate functional signalling message.

SSCF/NNI Service Specific Coordination Function – Network NodeInterface Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.2140)

SSCF/UNI Service Specific Coordination Function – User NetworkInterface Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.2130)

S-SCH Secondary Synchronization Channel (physical)



13-73

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSSCOP Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol (ïƒ³ ITU-T

Q.2110)

SSCOPMCE Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol in a Multi-link orConnectionless Environment (ïƒ³ ITU T Q.2111)

SSCS Service Specific Convergence Sublayer

SSDT Site Selection Diversity Transmission

SSF Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the networkindicator and two spare bits.

SSM SCCP Switch Manager.

SSM Signalling State Machine.

SSN Start Sequence Number (ïƒ³ related to ARQ-Bitmap in GPRS/ EGPRS)

SSN Send Sequence Number (ïƒ³ GSM MM and CC-Protocols)

SSN SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) maycontain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has aunique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR).

SSP Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN forswitching signalling, control and handoff.

SSP Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystemmanagement. An SSP message is sent to concerneddestinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinationsof the failure of a subsystem.

SSS Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and theLRs.

SSSAR Service Specific Segmentation And Reassembly (ïƒ³ ITU-TI.366.1)

ssthresh Slow start threshold

STAN Statistical ANalysis (processor).

STAT STATistics.

stats Statistics.

STC Signaling Transport Converter on MTP-3 and MTP-3b (ïƒ³ITU-T Q.2150.1) / Signaling Transport Converter on SSCOPand SSCOPMCE (ïƒ³ ITU-T Q.2150.2)

STC System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timingfunctions for the GPROC.

STMR Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based onhow a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking.

STTD Space Time block coding based Transmission Diversity

SUERM Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor.

STP Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone networkthat routes messages between exchanges and betweenexchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routinginformation.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsSU Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferable

entity used to convey information on a signalling link.

SUFI Super Field (RLC-Protocol)

SunOS Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS wasrenamed Solaris.

Superframe 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s).

Super user User account that can access all files, regardless of protectionsettings, and control all user accounts.

SURF Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used inHorizonmacro).

SVC Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set upand used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once thecommunication between the two hosts is complete, the SVCdisappears. See also PVC.

SVM SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall managementauthority for all in-service service circuits.

SVN Software Version Number. The SVN allows the MEmanufacturer to identify different software versions of a giventype approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV.

SW Software.

SWFM SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handledthrough a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMCindependently through the FCP.

SYM SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sendsGPRS system information messages over the BCCH.

sync synchronize/synchronization.

Synchronization burst Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulationbit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize itsframe to that of the received signal.

Synthesizer hopping Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping inwhich the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency tofrequency.

SYS SYStem.

SYSGEN SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading aconfiguration database into a BTS.

T -TxBPF

T Timer.

T Transparent.

T Type only.



13-75

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsT1 Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatted

data at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network.companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks aswell as interconnections between an organization’s PBX orLAN and the telco.

T43 Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2Mbit/s circuits (See BIB).

TA Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminaladaptation functions (see GSM 04.02).

TA See Timing Advance.

TAC Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV.

TACS Total Access Communication System. European analoguecellular system.

TAF Terminal Adaptation Function.(ïƒ³ 3GTS 27.001)

TAI Timing Advance Index

TATI Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists ofRF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining.See CCB.

TAXI Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface(physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standarddefined by the ATM Forum.

TB Transport Block

TBD To Be Determined.

TBF Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision ofTBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and userdata between the network and an MS.

TBR Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containingtechnical requirements and procedures.

TBS Transport Block Set

TBUS TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDMbackplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDMhighway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (ifthey exist).

TC Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structureabove the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP serviceinterface) up to the application layer including commonapplication service elements but not the specific applicationservice elements using them. TC is structured as a Componentsub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer.

TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of theSS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certainservices.(ïƒ³ Q.771 – Q.773)

TCB TATI Control Board.

TCH Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry eitherencoded speech or user data.

TCH/F A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsTCH/F2.4 A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.

TCH/F4.8 A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.

TCH/F9.6 A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s.

TCH/FD Traffic Channel / Fullrate Downlink

TCH/FS A full rate Speech TCH.

TCH/H A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate.

TCH/H2.4 A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.

TCH/H4.8 A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.

TCH/HS A half rate Speech TCH.

TCI Transceiver Control Interface.

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the mainprotocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol dealsonly with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish aconnection and exchange streams of data. TCP guaranteesdelivery of data and also guarantees that packets will bedelivered in the same order in which they were sent. See alsoIP and TCP/IP.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Twointerrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite.TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates onthe OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP.

TCTF Target Channel Type Field

TC-TR Technical Commitee Technical Report.

TCTV Transport Channel Traffic Volume

TCU Transceiver Control Unit.

TDD Time Division Duplex

TDF Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon.

TDM Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combinesdata streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in aset. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of time slotsover a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems,such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created foreach conversation or data stream.

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for deliveringdigital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividinga radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots tomultiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can supportmultiple, simultaneous data channels.

TDU TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDUis capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors.

TE Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functionsnecessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user.

Tei Terminal endpoint identifier. A number that identifies a specificconnection endpoint within a service access point.

TEI Terminal Equipment Identity.



13-77

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsTEID Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (ïƒ³ GTP / 3GTS 29.060)

TEMP TEMPorary.

TEST TEST control processor.

TF Transport Format

TF Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocolsoftware for handling payload information transfer and forproviding signalling communications between the controlfunction and external systems.

TFA TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message usedto notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route.

TFC Transport Format Combination

TFCI Transport Format Combination Identifier

TFCS Transport Format Combination Set

TFI Transport Format Indication (UMTS). Temporary Flow Identity((E)GPRS)

TFP TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management messageused to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessibleroute.

TFS Transport Format Set

TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. Ituses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used byservers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers.

TGD Transmission Gap start Distance (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215)

TGL Transmission Gap Length (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215)

TGPRC Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215)

TGSN Transmission Gap Starting Slot Number (ïƒ³ 3GTS 25.215)

THIG Topology Hiding Inter Network Gateway

TI Transaction Identifier.

TID Tunnel Identifier

Timeslot The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits aresent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots.See also ARFCN.

Timing advance A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS toadvance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as tocompensate for propagation delay.

TL See Transport Layer.

TLLI Temporary Logical Link Identifier.

TLS Transport Layer Security (ïƒ³ RFC 2246 / RFC 3546 / formerlyknown as SSL or Secure Socket Layer)

TLV Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed ofthree fields: a type identifier, a length indicator, and contentoctets.

TM Transparent Mode operation (ïƒ³ UMTS-RLC)



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsTM Transmission Modules

TM Traffic Manager.

TMD Transparent Mode Data (ïƒ³UMTS RLC PDU-type)

TMI TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interfacefrom IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF.

TMM Traffic Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system toolsto be used by traffic engineering and switch maintenancepersonnel to determine if the system is operating correctly.TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups,service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data.

TMN Telecommunications Management Network. Thephysical entities required to implement theNetwork Management functionality for the PLMN.Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TSas a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfacesthat would allow a network to be managed consistently acrossall network element suppliers. The concept has led to aseries of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways todefine and address network elements. TMN uses the OSIManagement Standards as its framework. TMN applies towireless communications and cable TV as well as to privateand public wired networks.

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identitytemporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriberto process a call. May be changed between calls and evenduring a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality.

TN Timeslot Number.

TOM Tunneling of Messages.

TON Type Of Number.

TPC Transmit Power Command

T-PDU Payload of a G-PDU which can be user data, i.e. possiblysegmented IP-frames, or GTP signaling information (ïƒ³ GTP)

TQI Temporary Queuing Identifier

Traffic channels Channels which carry user’s speech or data. See also TCH.

Traffic unit Equivalent to an erlang.

Training sequence Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timingrecovery and channel equalization in the receiver.

Transport Layer See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requestsfrom the Session Layer and issues service requests to theNetwork Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transferof data between end users, thus relieving the upper layersfrom any concern with providing reliable and cost-effectivedata transfer.

TRAU Transcoding Rate and Adaption Unit

TRS Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines whichtimeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of theGPRS traffic.



13-79

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsTRAU Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encoded

voice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN.

TrCH Transport Channel (UMTS)

TrGW Transition Gateway (IPv4 ïƒ³ IPv6)

TRM Terrestrial Resource Management.

TRU TopCell Radio unit.

TRX Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve fullduplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels accordingto specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH)is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on oneRF carrier.

TS Technical Specification.

TS TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunicationprovider.

TS TimeSlot (see Timeslot).

TS1 Training Sequence 1.

TS2 Training Sequence 2.

TSA TimeSlot Acquisition.

TSA TimeSlot Assignment.

TSDA Transceiver Speech & Data Interface.

TSC Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at thecentre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronizeto the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bitswhich is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There areeight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operatingwith the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allowthe receiver to identify the correct signal.

TSI TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within aTDM stream.

TSDI Transceiver Speech and Data Interface.

TSM Transceiver Station Manager.

TSN TRAU SyNc.

TSTD Time Switched Transmit Diversity

TSW Timeslot SWitch.

TTCN Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programminglanguage endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites fortelecommunications systems.

TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductortechnology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits.

TTL Time To Live (ïƒ³ IP-Header / RFC 791)

TTY TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal).

TU Traffic Unit.



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsTU3 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic model

against which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.

TU50 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.

TUP Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation ofSS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications.

TV Type and Value.

Two-way neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour.

Tx Transmit(ter).

TX Transmit window buffer.

TXF Transmit Function. See RTF.

TXPWR Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in theMS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONFparameters.

TxBPF Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.

U - UUS

UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MSto the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when acall is being cleared.(LAPD/LLC/RLP-Frame Type)

UA User Agent

UAC User Agent Client

UARFCN UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

UAS User Agent Server

UCS2 Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all ofthe characters commonly used in computer applications.

UDI Unrestricted Digital Information.

UDP User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocolthat, like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP,UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offeringinstead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IPnetwork. It is used primarily for broadcasting messages over anetwork.(ïƒ³ RFC 768)

UDUB User Determined User Busy.

UE User Equipment

UFE Uplink Frame Error.

UHF Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum isthe band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz.

UI Unnumbered Information (Frame) (ïƒ³ LAPD) / UnconfirmedInformation (ïƒ³ LLC) / Frame Type



13-81

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsUIC Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is the

worldwide organisation for cooperation among railwaycompanies. Its activities encompass all fields related to thedevelopment of rail transport.

UICC Universal Integrated Circuit Card (ïƒ³ 3GTS 22.101 / Bearercard of SIM / USIM)

UID User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user.

UL Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS).

UL UpLink.

ULC UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocksinto LLC frames.

Um Air interface.

UM Unacknowledged Mode operation (ïƒ³ UMTS-RLC)

UMD Unacknowledged Mode Data (ïƒ³UMTS RLC PDU-type)

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The Europeanimplementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, whichis part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band andoffers global roaming and personalized features. Designed asan evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimediadata rates up to 2 Mbps are expected.

UNIX A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely usedas the master control program in workstations and especiallyservers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed togovernment and academic institutions, causing it to be portedto a wider variety of machine families than any other operatingsystem. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with opensystems.

UPCMI Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced fordesign purposes in order to separate the speech transcoderimpairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS.

UPD Up to Date.

Uplink Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTSreceives).

UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is insertedbetween a primary power source, such as a commercial utility,and the primary power input of equipment to be protected,e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating theeffects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backuppower is used when the electrical power fails or drops to anunacceptable voltage level.

UPU User Part Unavailable.

URA UTRAN Registration Area

URI Uniform Resource Identifier

URL Uniform Resource Locators (ïƒ³ RFC 1738)

USAT USIM Application Toolkit

USCH Uplink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel ïƒ³ TDD only



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsUseful part of burst That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from

the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of theGMSK signal.

USF Uplink State Flag.

USIM Universal Subscriber Identity Module [3GTS 31.102]

USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSDmechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator definedapplication to communicate in a way which is transparent tothe MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanismallows development of PLMN specific supplementary services.

UTRAN UMTS Radio Access Network

UUS User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUSsupplementary service allows a mobile subscriber tosend/receive a limited amount of information to/from anotherPLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel inassociation with a call to the other subscriber.

UWC Universal Wireless Convergence (Merge IS-136 with GSM)

V - VTX host

V Value only.

VA Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm tocompute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a modelgiven a sequence of observed outputs.

VAD Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence orabsence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX.

VAP Videotex Access Point.

VBS Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech(or other signals which can be transmitted via the speechcodec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predefinedgeographical area to all or a group of service subscriberslocated in this area.

VC See Virtual Circuit.

VCI Virtual Circuit Identifier (ïƒ³ ATM)

VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clockfrequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltagepresented at its input. The frequency changes when thevoltage changes.

VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator.

VDU Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporarydisplay of computer output data. Monitor.

VGCS Voice Group Call Service.

VHE Virtual Home Environment (ïƒ³ 3GTS 22.121, 3GTS 23.127)



13-83

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsVideotex The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means of

proper access points and standardized procedures, providesthe access to data base information stored in host computersexternal to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks.

Virtual Circuit A connection between two devices, that functions as thoughit is a direct connection, even though it may physically becircuitous. The term is used most frequently to describeconnections between two hosts in a packet-switching network.

VLR Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element whichprovides a temporary register for subscriber information for avisiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC.

VLSI Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placingbetween 100,000 and one million electronic components ona single chip.

VMSC Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used).

vocoder Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists ofa speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveformsinto narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer,which converts the digital signals into artificial speech sounds.

VOX Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducerand a keying relay connected so that the keying relay isactuated when sound, or voice energy above a certainthreshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used toeliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter byusing voice energy to turn on the transmitter

VPI Virtual Path Identifier (ïƒ³ ATM)

VPLMN Visited PLMN.

VSC Videotex Service Centre.

V(SD) Send state variable.

VSP Vehicular Speaker Phone.

VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratioof maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern.Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatchbetween the transmission line and its load. The higher theVSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e.,that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity.

VTX host The components dedicated to Videotex service.

W - WWW

WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that providesdata communications to a larger number of independent usersthan are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over alarger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may includephysical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks,and T1 networks.

WAP Wireless Application Protocol

WINS Windows Internet Name Service



Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsW-LAN Wireless Local Area Network (ïƒ³ IEEE 802.11)

WPA Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementaryservices have the option of the subscriber using a password.If a password check is done with an incorrect password, theWPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed,the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three,the subscriber will have to register a new password with theservice provider.

WS Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnelexecute input and output transactions for network managementpurposes.

WSF Work Station Function block.

WSN Window Size Number

WWW World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-basedinformation service composed of Internet host computers thatprovide on-line information in a specific hypertext format. WWWservers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatteddocuments using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP.Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.

X - X Window

X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly usedprotocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). TheX.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks tocommunicate through an intermediary computer at the networklayer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-linkand physical-layer protocols defined in the OSI communicationmodel.

X.25 link A communications link which conforms to X.25 specificationsand uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links).

XBL Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications linkbetween the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS.

XCB Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver.

XCDR Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processingequipment required to perform GSM-defined speech encodingand decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speechtranscoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network tothe 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. Seealso RXCDR.

XCDR board The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding atthe BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board.Interchangeable with the GDP board.



13-85

Pub-Date


Glossary of technical termsXFER Transfer.

XID eXchange IDentifier.

xterm X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the XWindow System. A user can have many different invocationsof xterm running at once on the same display, each of whichprovides independent input and output for the process runningin it (normally a shell).

X Window A specification for device-independent windowing operationson bitmap display devices.

ZC

ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identifies a regionalsubscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowedlocation areas uniquely within a PLMN.



Pub-Date





13-87

Pub-Date

123508194-3g-Motorolla

Documents

motorola logo

property of motorola

purchase of motorola

copyright computer programs

computer language

umts usr6cp13

umts usr6for training

umts usr6chapter